FLAMES OF WAR.
THE WORLD WAR II MINIATURES GAME
>Zw..Tr>
At 4:4о on the morning of September 1, 1939 the soldiers of the German army launched thier
Blitzkrieg into Toland. Referred to as lighting war. the swift, immense attack by the Germans
smashed into the Polish defenders.
German troops marched to war under the banner of the Thousand-Year Riech. Rolands’ allies,
France and Britian, found themselves outgunned and out fought as the German juggernaut
4 combined infantry, armour and air into a devastating weapon of conquest.
It was a time of bold actions and bravery ' ey<md measure. World War II had begun!
Simon McBeth, Alex McEwen
Proof Readers: Paul Goldsto nu, Kyra n He n гу, Ga ry Ma rein, Damian Ro b i n so n,
Greg Si ter, Neal Smith, Chris Townley
Graphic Design: Casey Davies, Victor Pesch
Miniatures Design: Evan Allen, Karl Cederman, Anton Ducrot
Cover A rt: Vincent Wa i
flie Battery Commander (Chris Townley),
lhe Regiment (Simon McBeth), 'lhe Shedstcrs (Charles Stubbs)
Photographs: Bundesarchiv, National Library of New Zealand,
Imperial War Museum, Bovington Tank Museum,
Australian War Memorial, Roger Key Private Collection,
NARA, National Archives' Of Canada,
/ nt er n al Art: Vi nee n t Wa i, Ben Woo t te n
www. ss'w 2 model ma ker.com, US Army Signal Corps
-------------------------=---A*----—-
ГЪе Invasions of
Poland and France........................2
Blitzkrieg........................4
Introduction......................8
Basing Your Army.................10
Fielding Variant Forces..........12
Blitzkrieg Motorcycle
Reconnaissance...................13
The Polish Army..................14
"lhe German Army.................15
The British Army.................16
The French Army..................17
POLISH
aland—First to	Fight...........18
i ish Forces...................22
nan Orlik.....................23
К uupania Czolgow................24
PuIk Kawalerii
Z m о to ry zowanej............26
-	aralion Piechoty..............32
к Kawalerii...................38
-	n nired Trains................44
Arsenal....................46
'special Rules.............48
.. Armoured Trains
7 'I Rules..................51
GERMAN
. 2 Seated..................56
Contents
=--------______-—w=--------—
Invasion of France
and the Low Countries.........59
German Forces..................64
Generalmajor Erwin Rommel .... 65
Leichte Panzerkompanie.........66
Mittlere Panzerkompanie........68
Verlastete Panzerkompanie......70
Czech Panzerkompanie...........72
Schutzenkompanie...............74
Panzerschiitzenkompanie........78
Kradschutzenkompanie...........80
SS-Kradschiitzensturm..........84
Leichte Pionierkompanie........88
Infanteriekompanie.............92
Pionierkompanie...............100
Divisional Support............102
German Arsenal................108
German Special Rules..........Ill
BRITISH
The Miracle of Dunkirk........112
British Forces................116
Major-General
Bernard Montgomery...........117
Armoured Regiment.............118
Infantry Tank Company.........120
Divisional Cavalry Squadron...122
Rifle Company.................124
Divisional Support............127
F
British Arsenal.................132
British Special Rules...........134
FRENCH
Fighting For France.............136
French Forces...................140
General de Brigade
Charles De Gaulle...............141
Compagnie de Combat.............142
Escadron de Combat..............144
Compagnie de Chasseurs Portes. . 146
Escadron de Fusiliers Portes....148
Escadron de Reconnaissance .... 152
Escadron de
Fusiliers Motocyclistes.........156
Compagnie de
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs............158
Divisional Support..............167
French Arsenal..................171
French Special Rules............173
GUIDES
Polish Terrain Guide............176
French and Belgian
Terrain Guide...................177
Polish Painting Guide...........178
German Painting Guide...........179
British Painting Guide..........180
French Painting Guide...........181
Tank Recognition Guide..........182
This is a supplement for Flames Of War, the World War II miniatures game.
A copy of the rulebook for Flames Of War is necessary to fully use the contents of this book.
—----—=>=——<==-----------—	=“^*=——-----------*=—
- reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form
cans without the prior written permission of the publisher, nor be otherwise circulated in any form of binding or
than that in which it is published and without a similar condition being imposed on the subsequent purchaser.
-=*=----=-—=-*=—=-----~ ----------------#=—- - —	j>- --——*=-------— 'T*
© Copyright Battlelront Miniatures Ltd., 2010. ISBN: 978-0-9864514-9-2

THE INVASIONS OF
POLAND AND FRANCE
ELS
Rhineland
Saar
R L
Germany invades the Low
Countries— Ihe Netherlands,
Belgium, and Luxembourg—
on 10 May 1940.
AN DS
HAGUE GERMANY
KEY—
German Case White Attacks
*THE MARCH ТО WAR-
30 January 1933:
7 March 1936:
12 March 1938:
30 September 1938:
15 March 1939:
1 September 1939:
Adolf Hitler appointed chancellor. His Nazi Party assumes control of Germany.
Germany re-occupies the Saar and Rhineland.
Germany invades Austria incorporating it into Germany in the Anschluss (unification).
Britain, France, Italy, and Germany sign the Munich Agreement giving Germany the Sudentenland,
part of Czechoslovakia.
Germany invades Czechoslovakia unopposed. Slovakia forms a separate pro-Nazi state. Poland and
Hungary occupy the Teschen and Ruthenian areas.
Germany invades Poland, expecting similar acquiescence from France and Britain.
UNITED
KINGDOM
NET
LONDO
Dunkir
Paris
FRANC
Case Red
Germany Crowes the Somme,
5 June 1940.
German Case Red Attacks
Italian Attacks
Soviet Attacks
Cities
Rivers
National Borders 1939
Partition of
Czechoslovakia
German-Soviet Border
EMBOURG
Maginot
/Line
ITALY
Invades Franc,
AND
*E*LIN
PRAGUE
BUDAPEST
к 1чпу Invade» Poland,
! September 1939.
: О V А К i A
Slovakia formed,
September 1938 J
Rulhenia Annexed to Hungary,
March 1939 Mi '
ZIG
EAST
PRUSSI
POLISH CAMPAIGN
Phoney war
2 September 1939: France and Britain declare war on Germany. The Soviet Union remains neutral.
September 1939: German forces reach Warsaw.
~ September 1939: The Soviet union invades Poland to secure territory promised by Germany in the secret Molotov-
Ribbentropp Pact signed a month earlier.
2- September 1939: Warsaw surrenders after nearly three weeks of fighting and aerial bombardment.
October 1939:	Poland surrenders.
September 1939: French Army makes limited attack on the Saar, advancing 5 miles (8km) in 9 days before stopping.
* 1 V
1940:
'440:
1940:
 '40:
 >40:
- >40:
--------^FRENCH CAMPAIGN—*—*-----------------------------------------------
After six months of the ‘Phoney War’, Germany invades the neutral low countries—Tire Netherlands.
Belgium and Luxembourg, fire Franco-British army crosses the Belgium border to link up with the
Belgian Army.
German thrust reaches the English Channel, cutting oft the main Franco-British forces.
British and French armies evacuated from Dunkirk. By 4 June, 338,226 soldiers had been evacuated.
German Army attacks remaining Franco-British forces south of the Somme River.
Italy invades France from the south.
France surrenders.
March 1939
AUSTRIA
Annexed io Germany,
March 1938.
HUNGARY
C Z E C
German-Soviet Border
negotiated under the
Molotov-Ribbentrupp
Paet.
Soviet Union
Invade» Poland,
17 September 1939
N О I N П ±3 I AOS
The Path to the Second World War
The Rise of the Nazi Party
To understand the beginning of the Second World War, you
need to go back to the end of the First World War. That war
ended with an armistice, a cessation of fighting, rather than
Germany’s surrender. Germany was in no state to continue
the war, but this technical distinction allowed German right-
wing nationalists to claim that the army was stabbed in the
back bv [ewish and communist traitors rather than defeated
Czechoslovakia, and acknowledged a free Poland carved out
of areas previously controlled by Germany and Russia.
problems for the new German republic,
.d over the next few years. By the late 1920’s
nt .-.earned to have everything under control,
the Great Depression derail everything,
tisfaction with the liberal government’s in-
ability to reduce unemployment and prevent
fighting between the communists and
the fascists allowed a minority party
Adolf Hitler’s Nazi Party, to take total
control of Germany in early 19' i.
The early 1920’s were a tumultuous time in Germany. A civil
war between communist and nationalist forces broke out,
lasting until 1923, and there were several conflicts with the
emerging Polish state. The problems were exacerbated by
hvperinflation that saw the price of a loaf of bread soar to 3
hsmarks in 1923! People needed a wheelbarrow
to do their groceries.
anths later a new German Empire, the Third Reich,
__tred. Under the Nazi regime, Germany began openly
„ and unilaterally reversing clauses of the Treaty
1 es designed to punish Germany and compensate
i 1935 the Germans regained control of the Saar
area from the French, and in 1936 sent the army
. ..militarised Rhineland on the French border.
. bolder, Hitler then demanded that Austria be
.. Germany. The Austrian government responded
:g a referendum on the matter. The day before the
was due, on 12 March 1938, Germany invaded
..nsibly to restore order after rioting in the lead-
. eferendum. Unsurprisingly, when the Germans
. . .rendum a month later, the result was a landslide
‘ unification with Germany.
The Munich Agreement
: target was Czechoslovakia. Citing the Treaty
principle of national self-determination, he
: the Sudentenland with its largely German
. . handed over to Germany. France and Britain
had been re-arming since the reoccupation of the Rhineland,
but were unready to confront Germany militarily. Instead,
they accepted Hitler’s argument and the great European
powers, Britain, France, Italy, and Germany (but notably
excluding the Soviet Union), signed the Munich Agreement
on 30 September 1938 giving the Sudentenland to Germany
—without the consent of Czechoslovakia. After further talks
that followed in Vienna (again without the Czechoslovak
government having a say), Poland occupied Teschen and
Hungary annexed Czechoslovakia’s southern border.
The British Prime Minister, Neville Chamberlain, famously
stated after the talks 'I believe it is peace for our time’. He
couldn’t have been more wrong. Having got his own way so
far, Hitler was not about to stop. On 15 March 1939, he
invaded what was left of Czechoslovakia. Having lost their
border fortifications in the Sudentenland, there was little the
Czech government could do to resist. Hitler carved up the
remains of Czechoslovakia. Germany received Moravia and
formed a puppet Slovak Republic, while Hungary occupied
Ruthenia.
T-t EVASION OF POLAND
France and Helgntm.
fbe combined French
г*

molotov-Ribbentropp Pact
inced that Britain and France would
him. and planned the destruction of
7 . n and France were becoming increas-
. nanv’s aggression, and guaranteed
। sought an alliance with the Soviet
wit Stalin, recognising that Russia
•lie brunt of such a war, declined,
n signed a secret agreement with
: ’ between Germany and the
\ lotov-Ribbentropp Pact after

ate large scale conflict. Britains Royal Air Force bombed
Germany with propaganda leaflets instead of bombs, while
it took until 7 September for the French Army to launch an
attack on the Saar. Even then the French offensive ended
with a hesitant advance of 5 miles (8km) in nine days.
Meanwhile, the German armoured forces had smashed
through the Polish frontier defences and pushed nearly
200 miles (320km) into the heart of Poland to reach Warsaw
on 8 September. With their capital surrounded and under
aerial bombardment, the Polish army fought on as best it
could.
The cessation of the French offensive on 16 September
was followed by even worse news on 17 September when
the Soviet Union invaded eastern Poland. The Molotov-
Ribbentropp Pact had included a partition of Poland, and
the German success' threatening an early end to hostili-
T ..’on crossed the almost undefended eastern
‘’vol the spoils.
. 7 capital held out until
• . t tc end was in little doubt
. .	. ’.. _ tor the borders with
>p:ng to make their
. B\ 6 October, the
I
1
The Phoney War
Despite their rearmament during the late 1930’s, neither
rrance nor Britain were ready to take the war to Germany
1939. For their part, the Germans needed time to replace
.he losses from the Polish campaign. Over winter and spring,
>th sides built up their forces, staring at each other across
he Maginot Line, France’s massively fortified border. The
ritish press dubbed this the ‘Phoney War’, while the French
belled it 'La drdle de guerre , a funny war.
The invasion of France
10 May 1940 Germany invaded the Low Countries—The
.nerlands, Belgium and Luxembourg—using Case Yellow.
. French Army and the British Expeditionary Force (BEF)
eng into action, crossing the Belgian border (after waiting
ermission from the Belgian government of course) and
ing up with the Belgian Army.
The French and British forces in Belgium found themselves
completely cut oft from France and their only source of
supplies. Fighting on half rations and unable to coordinate
an attack with the French on the German corridor, the British
decided on 26 May to evacuate the BEF by sea from the port
of Dunkirk. Tire evacuation started on 27 May and lasted
until 4 June, by which time 338,226 British and French
soldiers had been evacuated, although another 30-40,000
French soldiers were left behind.
On 5 June, the German army activated Case Red, crossing 1
the Somme River and attacking the Franco-British forces
desperately trying to reform a coherent defence line south of
the river. After initial delays due to fierce French and British
resistance, the German armoured forces broke through once
more. The Franco-British forces desperately tried to form
new defence lines on each river as they retreated, but the
Germans broke through each time.
rtunately for them, the real attack came through
.mbourg, just north of the Maginot Line. Punching
gh the reserve divisions holding this section of the
- :he German armoured forces once again raced deep
enemy territory. Their movement was so rapid that
_ May; the leading elements had reached the English
icl at Abbeville on the mouth of the Somme River,
Mng the Franco-British forces in rwo.
Adding to France’s difficulties, Italy declared war on 10 June,
hoping for easy pickings. While the Italians were easily held
on the mountainous southern border, the Germans pushed
on reaching Paris on 14 June. By 22 June 1940 it was all
over. France signed an Armistice at Versailles, the site of the
hated treaty that ended the First World War. Linder the terms
of the Armistice, Germany occupied most of France leaving
only the south under a collaborationist French government
based in the city of Vichy.
INTRODUCTION
Flames of War
In Flames Of War, you take on the role of a company
commander manoeuvring your troops across the bat-
tlefields of World War II. This classic period of warfare is
brought to life in your own game room. Blitzkrieg provides
the core armies in the form of Intelligence Briefings. These
Intelligence Briefings allow you to field forces from the
German Army and its Polish, British and French opponents
as it sliced through Poland, France and the Low Countries in
the lightning campaigns of 1939 and 1940.
To play Flames Of War you’ll also need the Flames Of War
rulebook. The rulebook contains all the rules that you need
to fight miniature World War II battles.
Why collect a force from
Blitzkrieg?
By the middle of 1939 the world was poised on the brink
of war. Hitler’s Nazi Germany had occupied Austria, then
Czechoslovakia while the world looked helplessly on. In
August Hitler turned his eyes on Poland. This time France
and Britain would not stand aside.
On 1 September 1939, Hitler plunged Europe into the
Second World War by invading Poland. Massively outnum-
bered, the Poles resolved to fight for their country, hoping
in vain that the British and French would attack Germany
from the West to even the odds. Germany, with five times as
many modern tanks and aircraft as Poland, sliced through
the Polish Army striking for Warsaw. The gallant Poles held
out for three weeks after Warsaw was surrounded, fighting
hard the whole time, but were eventually overwhelmed.
Nine months later on 10 May 1940, the Germans had recov-
ered from their losses in Poland and struck westward against
Britain and France. This time it was the Germans who \ er<
outnumbered, but it did not matter. Their blitzkrieg tacti -
sliced through weak spots in the Allied line. Their fast moving
spearheads did not give the French High Command time to
react, capturing Paris in just over five weeks, and defeating
the most powerful army in the world in the process.
All of this is right here in Blitzkrieg looking for the right
general to take command. Are you that general? Can you
face the challenge and change the course of history? Do you
have what it takes to repeat Germany’s successes? Can you
reverse history, stopping the German blitzkrieg with better
tactics?
How this book Works
This book is divided into a section for each army. Each army
has intelligence briefings for tank, motorised infantry, and
infantry companies.
Each company has easy-to-use charts, highlighting available
platoons which are the fighting units of your company. Each
platoon diagram visually displays what troops are included
in the platoon.
A detailed arsenal at the end of each section describes the
specific ratings for your units and the weapons they use.
From tanks to infantry, this book contains everything you
need to get started!
All of the forces in this book are based on historical examples
that fought in 1939 and 1940.
To find out more, visit your local game store or visit our
informative website at iviinv.FlamesOfWar.com.
How to build a force
Flames Of War uses a point system when setting up and
playing games. Typical games are around 1500 points, but
are ccrtainlv not limited to any value! Play any point value
you and your opponent decide. You can play small 600 point
gam  .--a hurt period, or you can play mammoth games
. ii a .... < t arc 3000 or 5000 points!
Light Combat Platoon
Medium Combat Platoon
Company HQ
1 most Flames Of War games you will command a company
th several platoons. Each company includes:
• Company HQ—The company headquarters platoon is
required. Without it you have no command! When you
choose your force the first thing you must purchase with
our points is your company headquarters platoon.
• Combat Platoons—Usually, at least two combat platoons
required. Whatever your battle plan requires, the
mbat Platoons are the ones you rely upon to get the
b done!
• Weapons Platoons—Weapons platoons come from your
 n battalion. They arc not required, but can offer your
, npany excellent support, such as heavy machine-guns,
>rtars and anti-tank weapons.
-upport Platoons—Support platoons are loaned to
. ur company by the regiment, division or corps. These
oons give you extra support in many forms, ranging
'i tanks to artillery.
Special Rules
In Flames Of War, there arc many special rules that give
players the flavour of playing each individual nation in
the Second World War. Tire special rules reflect the sort
of training and equipment the soldiers of each nation use,
as well as the fighting spirit of the men. Remember ro use
each nation’s special rules found after each nations arsenal.
When cleverly used, these special rules will give you the edge
needed to bring glorious victory to your armies!
that
Deep Reconnaissance Platoon
©
Fusiliers Portes Platoon
PLATOONS
; platoon diagram indicates the required reams that you
 have to make that unit a combat-worthy force. Tire
that are black in each diagram are essential and must
'tided. Those troops in grey are optional troops
.rial weapons and equipment to the platoon.
Sample French Escadron de combat
(Combat Squadron, Page 144)
Company HQ
Command Somua S-35
© Light Combat Platoon
(Compulsory Combat Platoon)
1 Hotchkiss H-35 (long) and
3 Hotchkiss H-35 (short)
J?) Medium Combat Platoon
(Compulsory Combat Platoon)
4 Somua S-35
Q. Light Combat Platoon
(Combat Platoon)
1 Hotchkiss H-39 (long) and
2 Hotchkiss H-39 (short)
Medium Combat Platoon
(Combat Platoon)
3 Somua S-35
Deep Reconnaissance Platoon
(Support Platoon)
5 Panhard AMD-35
jf) Fusiliers Portes Platoon
(Support Platoon)
HQ Section with 3 Fusiliers Squads
105 points
205 points
415 points
160 points
310 points
165 points
165 points
Total—1525 points
6]
BASING YOUR ARMY
rs packages Flames Of War products to give you everything you need to assemble your force as quickly
Able. Our blisters and box sets are packaged to give you all of the options available to build your army.
HO* TO BASE DIFFERENT TYPES OF UNITS—*——-*
its platoons differently, and the organisation diagrams reflect this. For example, a Schtitzen squad in a
; n Platoon has ten men split into two Rifle/MG or MG teams of five soldiers, while a Chasseurs Squad
cur< Portes Platoon has nine men split into two MG teams, one of five and one of four men. Of course,
 re v maintain their theoretical strength. We reflect this by allowing you to take fewer squads.
sFamTRY TEAMS—*
uilding blocks of an infantry platoon are the various types of infantry teams. The most common ones are
a brief description of their function and organisation.

A Command team is made up of an officer, an NCO and a rifleman on
a small base. There are often options to upgrade your Command team
with a different weapon. To do so, simply replace the rifleman with the
chosen upgrade. You can see an example of this on the following page.



.tins
teams




Gun teams
Rifle teams are the basic form of infantry. All the miniatures in a rifle
team will normally be armed with rifles. Some squads may have a single
machine-gun, but its- effect is diluted, by the number of rifles in the
squad. Base your rifle teams on a medium base.
Rifle/MG teams are organised like rifle teams, except that every squad of
two teams has a machine-gun. Base Rifle/MG teams on a medium base
with the second base normally modelled with a machine-gun.
MG teams are better armed than Rifle/MG teams. Every MG team has
a machine-gun. Base MG teams with a machine-gun team and two to
three riflemen on a medium base.
Light Mortar teams are made up of a miniature armed with a light
mortar and a loader on a small base.
Anti-tank Rifle teams are macle up of a miniature armed with an anti-
tank rifle and a rifle-armed assistant on a small base.
A Pion, r team retains the characteristics of its type, e.g. a Rifle team on
a medium base, and gains extra abilities such as an increased anti-tank
rating and the ability to clear mines and demolish fortifications. Pioneer
teams are modelled with one or two pioneers in place of riflemen.
A Flame-thrower team has one miniature armed with a flame-thrower
and three or four riflemen based on a medium base. The primary
armament of the team is the flame-thrower, the other soldiers are there
to protect the flame-thrower operator and ensure they reach the target.
A Cavalry team retains the characteristics of its type, but is mounted on
horseback, so a Cavalry Rifle team is a Rifle team. All Cavalry teams are
mounted on larger bases than dismounted infantry teams.
A Blitzkrieg Motorcycle Reconnaissance team retains the characteristics of
its type, but is mounted on motorcycles, so a Motorcycle MG team is an
MG team. See page 1.3 for more information.

. . :r. ..	anti-tank gun, infantry gun platoons combine command infantry teams with gun
	tc ns can be found in Basing Your Miniatures on page 25 of the rulebook. Essentially,
: " ire "	t d like infantry teams on a medium base, anti-tank and infantry guns are mounted on a
c  tov. end. and artillery is mounted on a large base facing the narrow end.
J	О	о
Platoon diagrams
Each platoon diagram indicates the required squads and teams you must have to make that unit combat-worthy. Troops in
Маск аге the core of the unit. Troops in grey are optional supporting weapons and vehicles that you can add to give them
lore punch or mobility. Many platoons also include options that allow you to improve the equipment or capabilities of some
f the teams. The platoon entry will also list rhe special rules that the platoon follows.
Each platoon entry in a Flames Of War book reflects the historical make-up of the platoon, and tells you how to base the
lister or box set that represents that particular unit. The following example shows a Panzerschutzen Platoon from page 79
id how to assemble it using one Schiitzen Platoon blister and four Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track blisters.
PANZERSCHUTZEN PLATOON
*
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
3 Schiitzen Squads
2 Schiitzen .Squads
245 points
185 points
Options
•	Replace Command Rifle/MG team with a Command
SMG team at no cost.
•	Replace all Rifle/MG teams with MG teams for
+ 10 points per Schiitzen Squad.
•	Add Anti-tank Rifle team for +20 points.
BUILDING THE PLATQON 
. c the diagram below to base your platoon. By replacing
rifleman on the Command Rifle/MG team with an
1G armed miniature, the team is upgraded to a Command
!G team. In the same way, replacing a riflemen with a
hine-gunner in the three Rifle/MG teams that don’t
. c a machine-gunner converts the entire platoon from
LEUTNANT1
FleUTNAN^
АН ал
Command Light mortar
Rifle/MG team team
HQ SECTION
L UNTEROFFIZIERl
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track
SCHIITZEN SQUAD
Sd Kfz 251/1
half-track
lUNTEROFFIZIERl
munim
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track
SCHUTZEN SQUAD
L UNTEROFF1Z1ER 5 ~	'
Him
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track
SCHUTZEN SQUAD *	,
L PANZERSCHUTZEN PLATOON
IMG .teams to MG teams.
LEUTNANT 1
. LEUTNANT 1
Rifle/MG team
Rifle/MG team
Rifle/MG team
Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track
Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track
Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track
. SCHUTZEN SQUAD
SCHUTZEN SQUAD
SCHUTZEN SQUAD
L PANZERSCHUTZEN PLATOON L
command Rifle/MG team Command SMG team
UNTEROFFIZIER1
Rifle/MG team
Light Mortar
team
L HQ SECTION]
1 UNTEROFFIZIER
Rifle/MG team
Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track
UNTEROFFIZ1ER1
Rifle/MG team
FIELDING VARIANT FORCES
The armies fighting in Poland and France were extremely
varied. The Poles had their superb cavalry backed up by the
main infantry force. The Germans had their elite armoured
and motorised divisions, the fanatical 55, and the horse-
drawn infantry divisions that made up the bulk of their
troops. Tlie British fielded the proud guardsmen, pre-war
regulars and war-service territorials. The French had their
active regular divisions, their colonial troops, and their
second-line reserves. Blitzkrieg allows you to field all of these
diverse troops by having multiple variants available for the
appropriate Intelligence Briefings.
Platoon entries in the briefings that have variants have
multiple columns. Each column shows the name and symbol
of the variant and the points values for a platoon of that
Old Infanterie Platoon
variant. If any of the points values in the column are listed
as that combination of organisation and equipment is
not available for this variant. If all of the points values in the
column are listed as then the platoon is not available to
that variant and cannot be taken.
An example of an Intelligence Briefing that has variants is the
German Infanteriekompanie on page 92. Па is company has
three variants, the Heer (Army) marked ,	, the Motorisiert
(or motorised) divisions marked , and the 55 marked tt.
They differ in their Motivation and Skill ratings. The Heer
are Confident Trained, while the elite motorised divisions
are Confident Veteran. The inexperienced, but fanatical, 55
are rated as Fearless Trained. The platoon entry for an Old
Infanterie Platoon below demonstrates how this is shown.
PLATOON
HQ Section with:	X Heer	РЦ MOTORISIERT	Ц) SS
3 Infanterie Squads	145 points	190 points	175 points
2 Infanterie Squads	105 points	140 points	125 points
Add Anti-tank Rille team	♦ 15 points	*20 points	+20 points
Option
Add 3-ton trucks for +5 points for the
platoon.
In some cases options are only available to certain variants
as only those variants had that type of equipment. This is
shown by marking the option with the symbol or symbols of
the variants that can have that option.
The Old Infanterie Platoon diagram above shows an example
where trucks are only available to the Motorisiert and 55 forces
as shown by the symbols (	) to the left of the option.
PLATOON RATINGS'—*
Each variant has its own Motivation and Skill ratings. In
general, all Combat, Weapons, and Support platoons
must be taken from the same s ariant unless ot .rw:
stated. If a platoon from one variant is taken	>rt t -
another variant, it retains its own ratings, so for example,
an Infanteriekompanie rated Confident Trained can be
stq. x’tted by an Assault Gun Platoon rated as Confident
I eteran.
Allies and National Special Rules
The Poles fought alone against Germany, so all t o, p	t . tr ..nd it<. in . d'f.erent situation. Although the
Polish force are Poles and use the Polish special rules.	onlv turn., fj ting v r ( .-rmany were German, they came
On the other hand, the British alongside the 1 к ch in
Belgium and northern France. French and British troops
serving in each others forces are Allied Platoons and use the
Fielding Allied Platoons rules on page 183 of the Fla-,,^ <
War rulebook. As allies, they retain all of their normal ratings
and national special rules when fighting in an allied force.
from t c । r foot that were competing ruthlessly for
manpower ... d th.. : <. act ter . cw equipment: the German
Arms focluv inc •• 'nd Motorisiert troops), the Waffen-SS
and the у • Ad me . So intense was the competition
jnd 'h.i U't .t. .. .t e irganisations that all three groups
nt ' Alli..	to each other using the Fielding
A cd l. ti  • i page 183 of the rulebook.

\rmourrrl orz
(1ГНН
BLITZKRIEG
MOTORCYCLE RECONNAISSANCE
Motorcycles arc the ideal replacement for horsed cavalry in
г aces like Europe where there are plenty of roads. Their speed
makes them perfect for leading the way in every advance.
Й rzkrieg Motorcycle Reconnaissance teams are Infantry and
< :.s teams prefixed with the word Motorcycle. Blitzkrieg
Vvtorcycle Reconnaissance teams do not have separate motor-
 i de Transport teams. Instead, they are Cavalry teams combin-
; both riders and vehicles into the same team. As such they
hire a 3+ Infantry Save.
Л AH other Motorcycle and Sidecar teams are still Transport
trams just like a KJz 15 field car or any other commanders vehicle.
i Transport teams they have a 5+ Unarmoured Vehicle Save.
Basing motorcycles
Ke...use each motorcycle can only earn two soldiers in
addition to its driver, most teams have two motorcycles, one
earn ing a machine-gun and the other carrying the rest of the
crew and extra ammunition.
V -rrycle Command teams, Anti-tank Rifle teams and Light
'' tar teams are carried on a single motorcycle and sidecar
tucscd on a medium base facing the narrow end.
•• _•> >er Motorcycle infantry and gun teams are carried on two motor-
। . . W sidecars based on a large base facing the narrow end
motorcycle Reconnaissance
Motorcyclists quickly learned to use their speed and recon-
Ituksance skills to survive.
B.. : teg Motorcycle Reconnaissance teams are Recce teams and
SdidnegMotorcycle Reconnaissanceplatoons are Reconnaissance
?-:• ns while they are mounted on their motorcycles.
a   .. Blitzkrieg Motorcycle Reconnaissance platoon dismounts,
s  ps being a Reconnaissance Platoon. If the platoon was
• _ anizing after having Disengaged last turn (see page 153 of
dr- . t book), it continues to Reorganize when it dismounts.
'AQvt as Jeeps
Tbc biggest advantage of motorcycle-mounted infantry is
ftci- speed of movement across good terrain, but they arc
off fighting on foot in rougher terrain.
K..--	/ Motorcycle Reconnaissance teams move as Jeep teams
пк* f-.in as Cavalry teams.
Dismounting from motorcycles
lJU .s • jin. motorcycle reconnaissance units move mounted,
S-’ d m unt to fight, sending their vehicles to the rear.
,. Motorcycle Reconnaissance teams may dismount and
a-ьл v . i- . r hides to the rear at the start of your Movement Step
- a replace all Motorcycle teams in the platoon with the
*r<.	r,. ntry teams placed anywhere under the area catered
Ar A ' :  .-\cle team it replaces. As an example, a Command
1 '!G team would dismount as an SMG team and a
U*.	. j  team would dismount as an MG team.
Blitzkrieg Motorcycle Reconnaissance teams may only dismount
if you hair Infantry or Gun teamsfor the dismounted soldiers to
replace them with, otherwise they must stay on their vehicles.
When a Bogged Down Blitzkrieg Motorcycle Reconnaissance
team dismounts, it immediately ceases to be Bogged Down.
German Blitzkrieg Motorcycle Reconnaissance teams can also
dismount at the start of a Stormtroopers move.
Starting Dismounted
When motorcyclists arc called on to defend their gains, they
dug in and sent their bikes to the rear.
You may start the game with all of the Blitzkrieg Motorcycle
Reconnaissance teams in a platoon dismounted by replacing
each Motorcycle team with the equivalent dismounted team.
SHOOTING FROM MOTORCYCLES
Machine-gun-armed motorcycles mount their weapons on
the sidecar allowing the gunner to fire on the move.
Blitzkrieg Motorcycle Reconnaissance teams have a field office
extending 180 degrees across the front of their base.
Unlike horsed cavalry, Motorcycle MG, Rifle/MG, and SMG
teams can fire at full ROF while mounted and fire at full
ROF when moving. Motorcycle HMG teams fire as MG teams
(ROF3) while mounted.
Other Blitzkrieg Motorcycle Reconnaissance teams may not
shoot at all unless they remain stationary, but then fire with
their full ROF.
Dismount to Assault
Motorcycles arc designed for speedy advances, not for
assaults. Motorcyclists dismount before assaulting.
While mounted. Blitzkrieg Motorcycle Reconnaissance teams
cannot Launch an Assault and must Break Off if assaulted.
’P
KOMPANIA CZOLGOW
Tank Company
Although Poland only has wo battalions of 7TP light tanks,
they still have more of them than the Germans have of their
similarly-armed Panzer III tank. Poland’s tanks spearhead
the attempts to break through German encirclements and
save Warsaw, fighting bravely until the end. You can field a
company of well-armed 7TP tanks and the fearless men that
crewed them in a Kompania C/olgOw.
Pulk Kawalerii Zmotoryzowanej
Motorised Cavalry Regiment
Poland has two motorised brigades in the field: 10 Brygada
Kawalerii (called the ‘Black Brigade’ on account of its long
black leather coats) and the Warsaw Armoured-Motorised
Brigade. These small brigades are miniature armoured div-
isions, combining two battalion-strength regiments of motor-
ised infantry, backed up by small battalions of tanks and
anti-tank guns. Fielding a Pulk Kawalerii Zmotoryzowanej
puts you in command of the most up-to-date formation in
the Polish Army, one second to none in its ability to fight a
modern war.
BATAILON PIECHOTY
Infantry Battalion
Despite having less than half the number of anti-tank guns
of a German infantry division, the Polish infantry divisions
can give a good account of themselves against the German
armoured spearheads, substituting raw guts for massed tech-
nology. Although Polands infantry were well trained, their
equipment is light and their formations large by modern
standards. A Batailon Piechoty puts you in command of an
infantry force determined to protect its country at all costs.
PULK KAWALERII
Cavalry Regiment
Polish cavalry has long been acknowledged as amongst the
best in the world. While horses may seem archaic in a modern
mechanised war, they give Poland a mobile force well suited
to a country lacking in modern paved roads and motorised
transport. Fighting dismounted, they are able to face down a
German Panzer division. Fighting mounted, they ride down
infantry caught out of position. With a Pulk Kawalerii, you
can pit Poland’s elite cavalry against anything the Germans
care to throw at you.

LEICHTE PANZERKOMPANIE
' ft Armoured Company
	mainstay of Germany’s ten Panzer divisions are the light
n cured companies equipped with light Panzer I and II
ks. Don’t underestimate the fighting power of these tanks
e hands of a veteran crew. Germany conquered Poland
France with it and you can too. Not that you have to
*	entirely on light tanks. One company in each battalion
.hides Panzer 111 and IV tanks for heavier gun support.
d the Blitzkrieg with a Leichte Panzerkompanie.
mittlere Panzerkompanie
i lium Armoured Company
	Ie most Panzer divisions have to make do with a handful
''anzer 111 or IV gun tanks, some elite units like the Panzer
 battalion and 1. Panzerdivision have whole companies of
l* powerful tanks. You can field an elite Panzer strike force
:pped with gun tanks with a Mittlere Panzerkompanie.
Verlastete Panzerkompanie
n ked Armoured Company
' *)39 tanks are still new technology and break down tre-
ndy on long road marches. To counter this, Germany has
nted the tanks on trucks in its light mechanised divisions
.: can keep up with the motorcycles and armoured cars
ie reconnaissance elements. When the reconnaissance
into heavy opposition, the tanks dismount and go into
in. Fielding a Verlastete Panzerkompanie, you can speed
hu> action at the head of your tanks.
'zech Panzerkompanie
b Armoured Company
i Germany occupied Czechoslovakia in 1939, they took
its armament industry and stock of modern light tanks
.. I arm of the Panzer 35(t) and Panzer 38(t). Armed with
gun like the P.i-i.- r JU these light tanks combine
. and manoeuvrability. Three of its Panzer divisions
France
Czech
_ u a-c- excellent tanks for the campaign in
I), Follow in Rommel*; footsieps leading a
.'mp.mic to victory.
CHUTZENKOMPANIE
Company
Panzer divisions arc nalan. ‘d, all-arn 
h >!\ ,
: .r i giment •• matched with a motorised rifle
- ~ . rjflcmen are mounted in light ttuck *  ir । • -Hz
.L np( rting v,capons and мине of the world , first
- . .*[ rtv.e.-.p m , Panzcrjaget tank hunter
~ - \j. 3 г I1 uzer 1 seft-propelkd ntanrrygnn.
1 e a g p for the Pin. ; to exploit
Schiitzenl mpanie.
Panzerschutzenkompanie
Armoured Rifle Company
Germany recognises the need for mechanised infantry able to
keep pace with their Panzers and has equipped every Panzer
division with an armoured rifle company for the invasion of
France. Mounted in armoured half-tracks as well protected
and armed as a light tank, your Panzerschutzenkompanie
need fear little. It can drive straight up to an enemy position,
dismount, and assault.
Kradschutzenkompanie
Motorcycle Rifle Company
The true tip of Germany’s armoured spear-thrusts are the
motorcycle companies and their supporting armoured cars.
These fast-moving troops capture villages and bridge cross-
ings before the defenders even know they are threatened.
When the tanks catch up, the motorcyclists speed onward.
Field your Kradschutzenkompanie and outmanoeuvre the
enemy, speeding through gaps in their lines to capture your
objectives.
Leichte Pionierkompanie
Light Pioneer Company
Tanks can’t swim and lack the firepower to knock out
bunkers, so when they hit a defensive line they need the
division’s light pioneer companies to clear the way for them.
The pioneers of Germany’s armoured divisions are exception-
ally well .quipped with armoured half-tracks and demoli-
tion tanks years ahead of their opponents. Your Leichte
Pionierkompanie will get all the hard tasks, but it has the
men and equipment to do the job.
Infanteriekompanie
Infantry Company
While the Panzer divisions steal all of the glory, the motor-
ised infantry divisions and SS follow behind protecting their
flanks from Allied counterattacks and finishing oft the enemy
troops trapped in the pockets. Trudging along after them all
are the horse-drawn infantry divisions that make up 900/
of the German Army, lhese hardy soldiers capture the posi-
tions bypassed by the tanks as too tough and ensure that the
beaten enemy stays beaten. Leading an Infanteriekompanie
may not seem glamourous, but not even the Maginot I ine
can stand in their v ty.
Pionierkompanie
Pioneer Company
Ihe infanti\r’s pioneers base flame throwers and demolition
tges tor assaulting hunkers and entrenched infantry. Take
char*,:	tPioni. 1 ontpar ie r< . T -*• .* - of,	-
to rubbl .
о . 112 Matilda Senior tanks
ARMOURED REGIMENT
When the Germans invaded Belgium, Britain’s only armoured
division was still in training. Hastily brought up to strength,
they were sent to France only to be cut off from the BEF by
the German advance. Fighting alone without their infantry
or artillery, the armoured regiments tried to break through at
Abbeville on the Somme. Field this force of massed light and
cruiser tanks in a fast-moving Armoured Regiment.
Infantry Tank Company
Britain led the world in heavy tank development in the First
World War and designed its All and A12 Matilda tanks as
successors for the Second World War. Their moment of gL ту
came when they counterattacked the German thrust around
their flank at Arras where their massed heavy tanks proved
virtually invulnerable to most German weapons. Crush the
opposition beneath your tracks with the heavy tanks of an
Infantry Tank Company.
divisional Cavalry Squadron
lhe bulk ol Britain’s tank force is in the divisional cavalry
regiments of the infantry divisions fighting in Belgium. In
the retreat to Dunkirk their role is to hold the Germans at
bay long enough for the infantry to retreat to the next river
line where they will set up their next defence line. Although
they have nothing of their own heavier than a machine-gun,
your Divisional Cavalry Squadron can call on the infantry’s
artillery and anti-tank guns for a heavy punch.
RIFLE COMPANY
Britain’s BEF is the world’s first totally mechanised army.
There is not a horse to be seen and every rifle battalion has
its own armoured force in the form of its Bren Gun Carriers.
Whether stoic Guardsmen, long-service regulars, war-service
territorials, or even highlanders marching to battle with the
skirl ol pipes, you can rely on a well-equipped Rifle Company
ro hold its positions against all comers.
COMPAGNIE DE COMBAT
Combat Company
in. French infantry designate their tanks chars de combat,
ir combat tanks, and organise them into independent units
or assignment to the infantry as required. In the chaos after
c German invasion, these independent units often have to
ituck with little support. Fortunately, while French infantry
n- ’ aren’t fast, they are very hard to stop, being designed to
1 stand heavy fire while slowly rolling over all opposition.
>u can field a Compagnie de Combat of heavy Char B-l
s tanks and lighter Renault and Hotchkiss tanks to rumble
i r the Germans.
Escadron de Combat
tombat Squadron
' . rhe infantry, the cavalry have their own tanks, auto-
itrailleuses de combat (combat armoured cars). Faster and
’I i r than the heavy infantry tanks, the cavalry tanks fight
d lay the enemy while the infantry dig their trenches and
\ re for the coming battle. In a head-to-head fight, the
i i tanks will beat the Germans hands down with as
ч! or better guns and more armour. Fight for /r/wrr and
e. Take an Escadron de Combat and give the Germans
: iloody nose they deserve!
Compagnie de Chasseurs portes
I .- > -borne Light Infantry Company
the start of the war, the French were the only nation to
ant all of the infantry in their armoured divisions in
v-tracked armoured personnel carriers. The first three
. avv armoured divisions each had a battalion of Chasseurs
.nt infantry) mounted in armoured Lorraine 38L carriers
anting two machine-guns apiece. Their role was to ac-
. pany the heavy tanks forward under fire and occupy
. objective until the infantry caught up. With a couple of
ions of heavy tanks leading the way, your Compagnie de
iseurs Portes will have no trouble fulfilling any mission
• e given.
Escadron de Fusiliers Portes
k-borne Fusilier Squadron
. the infantrv mounted their motorised troops in
red personnel carriers, the cavalry opted for speed
and mobility. With trucks for mobility (protected from the
German Air Force by the infantry’s machine-guns mounted
for anti-aircraft fire), motorcycles for speed, armoured cars
for reconnaissance and plenty of anti-tank guns and artil-
lery, the Fusiliers of the cavalry are ready for any challenge,
whether attacking or defending. Command an Escadron de
Fusiliers Portes, France’s elite mounted infantry.
Escadron de Reconnaissance
Reconnaissance Squadron
France’s cavalry fields a wide variety of armoured cars, each
designed for one aspect of the traditional cavalry battle.
There are long-range armoured cars for independent scouting
missions, short-ranged tracked armoured cars for screening,
and heavier combat armoured cars when fighting is una-
voidable. Backed up by infantry, motorcycles and guns, the
armoured cars of the Escadron de Reconnaissance are iclc-.il
for fighting a battle of manoeuvre.
ESCADRON DE FUSILIERS MOTOCYCLISTES
Motorcyclist Fusilier Squadron
The leading element of the French advance into Belgium was
the motorcyclists and their accompanying armoured cars. Fast
and well-armed, these mobile troops fight delaying actions
ahead of and on the flanks of the infantry and cavalry divi-
sions as they seek to regroup and halt the German onslaught.
Field an Escadron de Fusiliers Motocyclistes for a fast-
moving, free-wheeling scrap with the German spearheads.
Compagnie de fusiliers-voltigeurs
Fusilier-Light Infantry Company
France has prepared its infantry well for the war it expects to
fight. They have plenty of machine-guns, enough anti-tank
guns, and excellent training in preparing trench lines. When
they need to attack, they have some of the best artillery and
heaviest tanks in the world to lead the way. With an army as
large as France’s there is a wide variety of divisions. Tire best
are the active divisions, both motorised and horse-drawn,
and the North African and colonial divisions made up of
native troops and colonial Frenchmen. In quiet sectors of the
front like the Ardennes, the second-line reserve divisions fill
in. Fielding a Compagnie de Fusiliers-Voltigeurs, you will
have the best-supported infantry available, whether defend-
ing France or counterattacking to throw out the invade;.
Having secured Czechoslovakia in March 1939, Hitler
demanded that Poland hand over the port city' of Danzig
in August. Having seen what happened to Czechoslovakia
when they' complied with Hitler’s initial demands, Poland
was in no mood to comply.
The port of Danzig was Polands only access to the Baltic Sea.
Communications between Danzig and the bulk of Poland
were along the narrow Danzig Corridor through Pomerania
(Pomorze in Polish). While Danzig's port was essential for
the survival of the new Polish state, the corridor split East
Prussia from the rest of Germany.
When Germany delivered its final ultimatum on 29 August
1939, the Polish government knew that without the help of
Danzig
Krojanty
Pomerania
Third
ARMY
Mlawa
modTTn
ARMY
NareW P***
ARMY
Mod tin
/ffokra
lakow
FOURTEENTH ARMY,
s
18
r
M O
EIGHTH
ARMY
I cgionowo
• Jierakdw
Kutno	^WaRSAW
Nicpolomi
Britain and France they had no chance of defeating a German
invasion. Outnumbered two to one in soldiers and ten to
one in tanks and aircraft, their only hope lay in holding on
long enough for France and Britain to intervene,
The Poles had prepared for the coming storm as best they
could. Poland’s borders were defended by six armies named
for the areas they defended: the Modlin. Pomorze. Poznart,
Lodz. Krakow, and Carpathian Armies, with the Narew
Group covering Eastern Prussia. These armies were fully mo-
bilised. although reserve units were still forming. Trenches
were dug, barbed wire laid, and artillery fire surveyed, the air
force dispersed its aircraft to secret secondary' airfields, and
the navy' set sail for Britain, anticipating the loss of Danzig.
Fourth
Army


'Poznan
army
ARMY t Ab 1
Я PRUSSIA
Bialystok
Narew
Group


Szczuczya
GERMANY
“ (Tenth arm?,
RESERVE
HrzcSc
Siedlcc
Reserve
Kii»r
Germany Invades Poland,
4:45am. I September 1939.
Loo
N D
Sandomicrz
Breslau
RESERVE
Tomtuzo*
Lubelski
Carpathian
AIM».*
ARMY
Group
South
' A I N <
118 Corrs |
L О V А К I A

H 4
POLISH
German Territories
Soviet Territories
Rivers
The defence of Poland began at 0445 hr on 1 September
1939 when German troops crossed the border to carry
jut their invasion plan Case White. The plan was a classic
tjerman battle of annihilation with converging thrusts on
Warsaw from the north and the south, trapping the bulk
of the Polish Army and capturing the capital in one fell
swoop. The first task, which fell to the Fourth Army, was to
reunite East Prussia with the body of Germany by cutting
the Danzig Corridor. With this done, the united Third
id Fourth Armies would thrust towards Warsaw from
the north. At the same time the Eighth and Tenth Armies
thrust towards Warsaw from the south. Fourteenth Army
ould cover their flanks to the south and east and capture
Poland’s industrial south around Krakow.
in the north Polands strategy was to lightly garrison the
Danzig Gorridor to stop the Germans grabbing it without
. war, but to withdraw the garrison when the Germans
tacked. Poland’s Pomorska Cavalry Brigade it launched
:e first cavalry charge of the war to cover this withdrawal
gainst the attack by Guderian’s 19'h Armoured Corps
 two Panzer and one motorised divisions, the leading
cment of the Fourth Army. The IS'11 Uhlan (Lancer)
egiment was ordered to charge the leading elements of the
erman 20th Motorised Infantry Division near Krojanty
- allow the Polish infantry to withdraw. The charge threw
; Germans back in disarray causing panic at all levels.
_ ’.fortunately for the cavalry, a German armoured car
trol turned up and machine-gunned the Poles, throwing
cm back in turn. When a war correspondent later saw the
ttlefield, now occupied by a German tank unit, littered
ith dead horses and cavalrymen, his news report started
myth of Polish cavalry charging German tanks.
ermany’s Third Army had perhaps the hardest task—at-
:king the Polish defences around Mlawa. Supported
the Kempf Panzer Division, they made slow progress
Tng nearly half of their tanks on the first day. The general
’ charge declared that ‘An attack here is hopeless’.
the south the Poles also had some success in holding
the German advance. Tenth Army attacked the Lodz
mv with Hoepner s 16lh Armoured Corps of two panzer
isions and three further light divisions (a cross between
eak Panzer division and a reconnaissance brigade). The
;rman 4th Panzer Division faced the Wo/ynska Cavalry
de at Mokra. Here, with just 18 anti-tank guns,
Id artillery pieces, and a dozen tankettes, the cavalry
.cd nearly 400 tanks. With the aid of an armoured
 n. the Wolynska Cavalry Brigade held their positions
ughout the day and delayed the German advance on
. next day until forced to retreat when the 1' Panzer
Ton and two infantry divisions forced back the Polish
-----------
German Armies
German Attacks
-KEY—
Front Line 5 September
National Borders
Polish Armies
Polish Movements
Fortifications
. 1
L4*.
7’1 Division on its southern flank. The Germans lost
7 b tanks in the battle. Meanwhile, the Vourteenth Army
with two Panzer and one light divisions attacked towards
Krakow finding progress difficult against a stout defence
by the 10 Mechanised Cavalry Brigade.
The first two days of the war had brought hard fighting
for little gain for the Germans. In most areas the Poles
were still holding their assigned sectors. The cracks that
were showing though, were serious, Lhe German Panzer
divisions were capable of exploiting their breakthroughs
far faster than the Poles could stop them. By 3 September
when the British and French finally declared war, Poland’s
borders had been fatally compromised.
fhe Polish Marshal Rydz-Smigfy needed to delay the
Germans until help from his allies could arrive. To do this
he needed to avoid a decisive battle and keep his army in
being. General Kutrzeba commanding the as yet uncom-
mitted Poznan Army demanded to be allowed to attack the
Eighth Army in the flank, but the Marshal refused fearing
that it would commit them to a trap between Fourth and
Tenth Armies. Instead Rydz-Smigly ordered a withdrawal
to a new defensive line behind the Vistula River. Even
this was to prove impossible. By the end of 4 September,
Hoepners 16lh Armoured Corps and the light divisions
had broken through between the Lodz Army and the
Krakow Army. The Polish 19'1’ Division supported by the
2"J Tank Battalion (half of Poland’s tank force) attempted
to stop them on the morning of 5 September, knocking
out 17 tanks and 14 armoured cars for the loss of two
tanks. Refusing to be distracted, the Panzer divisions
simply outflanked and bypassed the Poles, continuing
their advance.
By the evening of 5 September, the Germans were reas-
sessing their plans. Aware of the need to keep a strong
force in reserve to counter the anticipated French attack,
the German commanders were becoming increasingly
disturbed as it became clear that the Poles were retreating
across the Vistula rather than fighting in the West where
they could be encircled. Progress everywhere was good,
but a French attack combined with a successful Polish
defence of the Vistula could put Germany in the position
of fighting a two-front war.
The Poles were also reassessing their plans. Faced with the
grim reality of a faster than expected defeat of their border
defences and motorised spearheads advancing faster than
their marching infantry could retreat, forming a strong de-
fensive line on the Vistula was looking increasingly tricky.
The only good news was in the north where the Modlin
Army was holding, although its counterattacks had failed.
Continued on page 56

19



In 1939 Poland has yet to celebrate 20 years of independence
from more than a century of Prussian and Russian occupa-
tion. The success of the new Polish state in its war of inde-
pendence in 1920 has left it surrounded by enemies. Poland’s
bordi s encompass lands held by Poland centuries earlier in
its glory days, and the more recent possessors of these lands
want them back. Germany in the west and north harbours
ambitions to regain Pomerania and Silesia. The Soviet Union
in the east wants Byelorussia and the northern Ukraine. Even
their smaller neighbours bear them a grudge. Lithuania to
the north-east wants its old capital of Vilnius, and there is a
long-standing dispute with Czechoslovakia over the Teschen
area.
Most Poles are proud of their new state, and are determined
to defend it, determined to avoid another century of foreign
domination.
KOMPANIAHZOLG OW
TANKCOMPANY
France gave the new Polish state a regiment
of Renault FT tanks in 1920, making the
Poles the fourth strongest tank force in the
world at the time. Unfortunately their indus-
trial capacity was insufficient to maintain this
status, and the old First World War tanks had
up until just before the Second World War when they were
finally replaced with Polish 7TP light tanks.
Like the rest of the Polish Army, tank units
were determined to protect their freedom
against German aggression. This gives a
Kompania Czofgow (Tank Company) a
Motivation rating of Fearless. Their Trained
to serve right Skill rating reflects their thorough training, but out-of-date
tank tactics.
PULK KAWALER1I ZMOTORYZOWANEJ
motorised Cavalry Regiment
the
all
Poland’s cavalry have always formed
of its army, so they were the natural choice
to form a motorised brigade. Lik<
cavalry troopers, the motorised cavalry were
volunteers serving a two-year conscription
term rather than the single year
resistance to giving up their L.___„ ________
applied themselves to their new role with their customary
professionalism giving them their Skill rating of Veteran.
eli
Polish
No one can doubt the bravery of the Polish
cavalry in facing down German tanks while
massively outnumbered, earning them their
Fearless Motivation rating.
 of the infantry. After ini
beloved horses, the caw
The motorised brigades were given tank and
tankette companies as the war approached, but these came
from the tank arm. They fought bravely, but lacked the
German’s flair for armoured warfare and retain a Skill rating
ofTrained.
^RELUCTANT | CONSCRIPT j
^CONFIDENT
FEARLESS
TRAINED
VETERAN
Despite not having a country of their own,
Poland had plenty of trained soldiers ready
to fight for their new state. In the First
World War Polish soldiers fought for the
Austrians, French, Germans and Russians.
These soldiers did well fighting to create a new Poland i
1920. Poland continued to ensure it had plenty or wel
trained soldiers in the 1920's and 1930 s bv requiring e r
man to undergo a year of compulsory military training.
When they mobilised for war in 1939, the
Polish infantry knew that they fought for the
verv existence of their country. They fought
hard, earning themselves a Motivation rating
of Fearless.
 it vear-1 mg training prepared them well, and the majority
of Polish di\ isions coped better than could be expected against
the overwhelming Blitzkrieg they faced. This gives a Batalion
Piechoty Jr fantrv P tr.ilion) a Skill rating ofTrained.
In a country lacking in modern roads and
motorised transport, Poland’s cavalry were
far from the anachronisms they now seem.
Horsed cavalry moved faster than marching
infantry, and when well equipped with anti-
tank weapons, could block enemy thrusts.
Polish cavalry are the army’s elite and fought
hard gaining a Fearless Motivation rating. As
volunteers they trained for two years rather
than the infantry’s one. This is reflected
in their performance and their Veteran
Skill rating.
i Edmund Orlik was born in Rogozno, Wielkopolska
‘IS while Poland was fighting for its independence,
i the Polish Army mobilised in 1939, Orlik v.as drafted
Plutonowy Podchorazy rez., an Officer Cadet of the
, assigned to the 71'1 Armoured Battalion of the
. .opolska Cavalry Brigade of the Poznan Army.
: first day of the war his brigade attacked, fighting their
 Germany. However, the outflanked Poznan Army
ted to withdraw into the Bzura Pocket on the Bzura
.tween 8 and 11 September, the cavalrymen attacked
>unding Germans, until the order came to break out
On 14 September the brigade retreated into the
 as Forest where Orlik accounted for three German
- am the 4'1' Panzer Division around the village of
. On 18 September Orlik ambushed and destroyed
re German tanks (including a Panzer IV) as part
-i,ades attack to capture the village of Sierakow. At
. next day the Germans launched a counterattack.
The brigade commander ordered Orlik to attack the flank
of the German spearhead using the large gravel pits to the
south of the village as cover. As the Germans advanced,
Orlik positioned his TKS to fire on two tanks ahead of the
main line and disabled both of them. After a short gun battle
he captured the crew of another tank, then quickly knocked
out a fourth. Three more enemy tanks then joined the battle.
While Orlik knocked two of them out, the third pressed
the attack, so Orlik retreated into the gravel pits. When
the German tank crew dismounted to search for the little
tankette, Orlik judged his moment carefully and attacked the
tank at close range only to find he was out of ammunition!
He beat a rapid retreat to cover and when he checked a little
later he discovered the German tank sitting abandoned.
Orlik’s brigade broke through to Warsaw, fighting until its
surrender, whereupon Orlik joined the resistance. After
the war he was awarded the Order Virtuti Militari for his
valorous actions.
Characteristics
 Podchorazy Orlik is a Warrior and a Platoon
Tank team rated as Fearless Trained. Orlik
in a TKS (20mm FKA) tankette mounting a
38 sun.
Orlik in any Reconnaissance Tank Platoon re-
>on Command team for +35 points. Orlik’s
К tankette counts as one of the TKS (20mm
wed in his platoon.
Special Rules
n t of hi
Tuqm on . J uung the
to any other platoons that would normally be deployed in
Ambush. Orlik and his platoon may deploy in Ambush even in
missions that do not normally use the Ambush special rule.
Excellent Shot: With only a 20mm gun, Orlik had to be a
good shot to knock out so many tanks. Orlik’s tankette may
re-roll any failed roll To Hit when it shoots.
Shots from Nowhere: lire enemy return fire was wild,
‘shooting everywhere’ as they tried to locate Orlik’s tankette.
Orlik counts as Gone to Ground if he is Concealed and did
not move in his own turn, even if he did shoot in his turn.
Fire and Movement: Once the first few tanks were destroyed
from ambush, Orlik manoeuvred in the open to destroy the
rest. Orlik mav elect to fire at full ROF when he mo' . k r
+ 1 : th ore required To H r.
(Tank Company)
HEADQUARTERS
ARMOUR
ARMOUR
Czotgow Platoon
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
Ptechoty Company
INFANTRY
Ptechoty Company
ARMOUR
ANTITANK
CrotgOw Platoon
111
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
Kawatem Zmotoryzowanet
Company


ARTILLERY JWljbAl	Motoused Artillery Battery	£
О-	Light Gun Battery	к
POLISH $
HEADQUARTERS
Czotcow Platoon -
Platoon
£
HEADQUARTERS
I TI P jw
L CZOLGOW section 1
5 TI P jw
4 7TP jw
3 7TP jw
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
The Polish Army has fielded tanks since its inception in 1918. The tankers of a Kompania
Czolgotv (pronounced kom-pah-nee-ah chowgpov) are well trained and committed to
the freedom of their country. A Kompania Czolgow is rated as Fearless Trained.
Cl
COMPANY HQ
50 points
At rhe time of the invasion the Polish Army was able to field
two independent light tank battalions equipped with 7TP
light tanks. An additional independent company of eleven
brand new tanks was formed to defend Warsaw.
RELUCTANT
CONFIDENT
FEARLESS
CONSCRIPT
TRAINED
VETERAN
NJ
\PITAN 1
. KAP^N^
Company Command TTP jw
L COMPANY HQ]
L KOMPANIA CZOLGOW HQ
245 points
195 points
145 points
rhe 7TP (meaning 7-Ton, Polish—weighing in at nearly
10 tons) light tank was a locally-produced. diesel-engined
ersion of the British Vickers E. Like the Vickers E, the
first 40 completed were armed with twin wz. 30 machine-
gun turrets (labelled dw from dwuwiezowy or twin turret),
лhile rhe final 95 had a single turret armed with rhe
excellent Bofors 37mm wz. 37 gun (labelled jw from
.'nowiezouy or single turret). The 7TP was an effective
• ink. but there were simply not enough of them to make a
iTcrencc to the eventual outcome of the invasion.
L PLUTONOWY1
7TP |w
7TP jw
PODPORUCZNIK
. PODPORUCZNIK
Command TTPjvv
L HQ SECTION 1
Lplutonqwy
7TPjw
7TP [w
L CZOLGOW SECTION
CZOLGOW PLATOON
TTP w Р1л*
C
-
йо
ZmORYZOWARCJ^e
motorised Cavalry Regiment
(MECHANISED COMPANY)
SZWADRON KAWALERII ZMOTORYZOWANEJ
HEADQUARTERS
Regiment HO
Kawalerii Zmotoryz- V 
owanej Company
ANTI-TANK
ARMOUR
Kawaterii Zmotoryz-	V-	Zmoloryzowanei
owanej Company________Л>)	Anti-tank Gun Platoon
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
Czdpow Platoon
3
ARMOUR
ARTILLERY
Reconnaissance Tank
Platoon
ZmotoryzowarM
Anti-tank Gun Platoon
ANTI-TANK
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
Kawaterii Zmotoryz-
owanej Company Ж
INFANTRY
Kawaterii Zmotoryz-
owanet Company_____
Zmotoryzowanej Heavy
Machine gut Company
Reconnaissance Tank k$>
Platoon________________
MACHINE-GUNS
Reconnaissance Tank	кй
HMM	м
Vtckers Tank Platoon
К
£
You must field one platoon from each box shaded Nack and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
a
<
s
о
2
О
ARMOUR
ANTITANK
•urn
Zmotoryzowaiel
Anti-tank Gun Platoon

In typical European cavalry fashion, rhe Poles fielded
their cavalry in battalion-sized regiments made up of
company-sized squadrons.
In Flames Of Ufi/r a Puik Kawalerii Zmotoryzowanej
operates as if it is a company. Uns means that
•	Kawalerii Zmotoryzowanej Companies and
•	Zmotoryzowanej Heavy Machine-gun Companies
operate as if they are single platoons. Whenever the rules
talk about a platoon read that as the appropriate type of
Kawalerii or Zmotoryzowanej company. Where the rules
talk about a company, read that as a I'ulk Kawalerii
Zmotoryzowanej (Motorised Ca airy Regiment).

2
5
£
ANTI-TANK
ARTILLERY
Kawaterii Zmotaryz-
owanei Company
Motonsed Artillery flattery
Lignt Gun Battery
Armoured train
INFANTRY

Piechoty Company

HEADQUARTERS
L MAJOR
L BATTALION HQ^
COMBAT PLATOONS
L ROTMISTRZ ।
L PORUCZNIK ।
2iC Command
Rifle team
Company
Command
Rifle team
Motorcycle
and sidecar
Motivation and Skill
Despite their distaste for motorised transport, the Pulk Kawalerii Zmotoryzowanej (pro-
nounced pooti'k kab-vahl-err-ee zmot-orr-ez-oh-vabn-eh-ya) remained an elite cavalry
force. A Pulk Kawalerii Zmotoryzowanej is rated as Fearless Veteran.
л90И T»W
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
TtSW'WT
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
Regiment HQ
Headquarters
Company
HQ Section with:
Po ski-F AT 621 truck
Polski-FI AT 621 truck
Polski-FIAT 621 truck
Regiment HQ
•10 points
L PORUCZNIK
LKAWALERII PLATOON?
KAWALERII ZMOTORYZOWANEJ COMPANY
a 1936 review of their defence policy, the Poles decided
t Germany was a greater threat than Russia. Germany’s
mament program emphasised a strike force of motorised
armoured divisions. Poland responded as best it could
forming a motorised cavalry brigade.
Anti-tank
Rifle team
Polski-FIAT 621 truck
t»w
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
Tjmnw*
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
Option
• Add 81mm wz. 31 mortars with Polski-FIAT 621
trucks for +30 points per mortar.
Kawalerii Zmotoryzowanej Company—*
3 Kawalerii Platoons	390 points
2 Kawalerii Platoons	270 points
1 Kawalerii Platoon	150 points
Options
•	Add Ckm wz. 30 HMG teams with Polski-FIAT 508
field cars for +35 points per weapon.
•	Replace all Polski-FIAT 508 field cars with a single
Polski-FIAT 621 truck at no cost.
•	Replace all Polski-FIAT 621 trucks with PZInz 222
half-tracks for +5 points for the company.
 J was desperately short of vehicles, so initially a single
motorised cavalry brigade was all it was able to form.
2t Ulan (Lancer) Regiment and the 10’1’ Mounted
Regiment were converted from horsed cavalry into
Brygada Kawalerii Z < arryzi w<. uej (10lb Motorised
. Brigade) in 1936. A second brigade, the Warsaw
ured-Motorised Brigade was formed in May 1939.
cision to give up their horses was not an easy one for
valrymen. On learning they were to be motorised,
. ers of the 20lh Lancers mutinied, so the 2-T Lancers
otorised in their place. Ironically, the 201" Lan cct,
1 exist with the fall of Poland, while the 24'1’ went on
n France in 1940, and then again in 1944.
Polish-designed PZInz 222 half-tracks were deliv-
> BKZ in 1939 and used as infantry carriers and

MAJOR
Ploski-FIAT 508
field car
L PULK KAWALERII ZMOTORYZOWANEJ HQ
ROTMISTRZ 1
Command Rifle/MG team
Ploski-FIAT 508 field car
HQ SECTION 7
Anti-tank Rifle team
Polski-FIAT 621 truck
.KAWALERII PLATOON?
L PORUCZNIK

О
лШ T»W
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
тЙШТЙГЖ
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
Anti-tank
Rifle team
Polski-FIAT 621 truck
L KAWALERII PLATOON?
27
2	Machine-gun PLltonni and 1 Tarranka Platoon	435	points
1	Machine-gun Platoon and 1 Faczauka Platoon	300	points
		275	points
	Machine-gun Platoons		
1	Machine-gun Platoon	140	points
1 Taczanka Platoon		165	points
T On
-• ПАТ 508 field car and Polski-FIAT 621
. - - -  points for the company.
Heavy Machine-gun Company may
..	... ' < or Machine-gun Platoon to each
 ' aaej Company (on page 27). When
.:  Katualerii Zmotoryzowanej Company,
. ' inc-gun Platoons count as part of the
? anej Company for all purposes.
... '. machine-gun company is set up simi-
. lipped equivalent with three platoons of
Ihe Ckm wz. 30 is a Polish variant of the
"ing M1917 machine-gun, converted to fire
r ~.92mm ammunition.
wb&A
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
3&&A
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Wb&A
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
3&&A
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
L ROTMISTRZ
L TACZANKA PLATOON
Polski-FIAT 508 Polski-FIAT 508 Polski-FIAT 508 Polski-FIAT 508
Taczanka Taczanka Taczanka Taczanka
Command Rifle/MG team
L HQ SECTION
PORUCZN1K
L PORUCZN1K '
Zmotoryzowanej Anti-tank Gun Platoon
? ‘ TON
mni with:
3 37mm wz. 36	130 points
2 37mm wz 36	95 points
OdiONS
 Polski-FIAT 508 field cars for +5 points for the
- .7 ОП.
•	, 1 <ce all Polski-FIAT 508 field cars with PZInz 222
 '-tracks for +5 points for the platoon.
.ed cavalry regiment has its own anti-tank
t three lightweight 37mm wz. 36 anti-tank
brigade can back each regiment up with a further
three platoons. This gives each regiment twelve
.. is. not counting the guns in the reconnaissance
. ; had an additional platoon.
_ with the motorised nature of the brigades, the
•ons are all motorised giving them the capabil-
. vring to block off German tank thrusts as they
MACHINE-GUN
PLATOON
PORUCZNIK
MACHINE-GUN
PLATOON
ZMOTORYZOWANEJ HEAVY
MACHINE-GUN COMPANY
anti-tank gunt
POLISH
> Pulk Kawalerii Zmotoi
Reconnaissance Tank Platoon
Platoon
5 TKS	100 points
4 TKS	80 points
3 TKS	60 points
Option
Replace up to half of the TKS tankettes with TKS
(20mm FKA) tankettes for +5 points per tankette.
-1 n armoured battalion was attached to each cavalry brigade
the start о/ the war. Reconnaissance Tank Platoons are
ated as Fearless Trained.
PORUCZNIK 1
iToRUCZNlH
Command TKS
L HQ SECTION
L PLUTONOWY
Fplutonowy
TKS
TKS
TKS
TKS
L TANKETTE SECTION
L TANKETTE SECTION
RECONNAISSANCE TANK PLATOON 
Despite their name, Reconnaissance Tank Platoons are not
Reconnaissance Platoons.
Each cavalry brigade has a squadron of tankietka (tankettes)
and armoured cars. The lack of armour in the Polish forces
means they have to operate as light tanks.
Zmotoryzowanej Motorcyclist Platoon
Platoon
Г PORUCZNIK1
^ORUCZNI^
L PLUTONOWY1
HQ Section with:
3 Motorcyclist Squads	230 points
2 Motorcyclist Squads	165 prints
1 Motorcyclist Squad	100 points
Horyzowanej Motorcyclist Platoons use the Blitzkrieg
orcycle Reconnaissance rules on page 13 and arc
vanaissance Platoons while mounted.
motorised regiment and the brigade’s reconnaissance
have a motorcyclist platoon with (at least in theory) six
uissance groups. In the Warsaw Armoured-Motorised
.. le the motorcyclists operate with the tankette platoons
mobile strike force able to move from crisis point to
Command Motorcycle
Rifle/MG team
L HQ SECTION,
L PLUTONOWY
A A
Motorcycle
Rifle/MG team
41
Motorcycle
Rifle/MG team
Lmotorcyclist squad!
A A
Motorcycle
Rifle/MG team
Motorcycle
Rifle/MG team
Lmotorcyclist SQUAD
L PLUTONOWY
A A
Motorcycle
Rifle/MG team
Motorcycle
Rifle/MG team
Lmotorcyclist squad
zmotoryzowanej MOTORCYCLIST PLATOON fl
A
WEAPONS PLATOONS
Vickers Tank Platoon —--------k=>—.—*=----------.—*=»---------*=----——я
Platoon
3 Vickers E Type В and 2 Vickers F Type A 2 Vickers F. Гуре В and 2 Vickers E Type A 2 Vickers E Туре В and I Vickers E Type A	160 points 130 points 95 points
Although the light tank companies are attached to the mo-
torised brigades, they are not cavalry. Vickers lank Platoons
are rated as Fearless Trained.
Both motorised cavalry brigades have a company of Vickers
tanks. 1 O'1’ Motorised Cavalry Brigade has the 121“ Light
Tank Company, while the Warsaw Armoured-Motorised
Brigade has the 12lb. Each company has three platoons of
British-built Vickers light tanks, with both the machine-gun
armed Гуре A and the gun-armed Type В in each platoon.
LpodporuczniiC
L HQ SECTION!
L PLUTONOWYT
Vickers E
Type A
'PLUTONOWY !
L TANK SECTION
L TANK SECTION
Vickers E
Type В
Vickers E
Туре В
Vickers E
Type A
k VICKERS TANK PLATOON
PODPORUCZNIK 1
Command Vickers E Type В
Twin MG Turret Tanks
The Vickers E Type A had two side-by-side machine-
gun turrets, making them ideal against infantry.
Ihe two deck turrets of a Vickers E Type A have an all-
round field of fire, except where the line office is blocked by
the other turret or the superstructure.
Both turrets can fire at the same time, either at the same
platoon or each at a different enemy platoon. Both turrets
can fire at their fid! ROF 3 at the same time.
motorised Artillery Battery—*
Platoon
HQ Section with:
4 75mm wz. 1897	305	points
2 75mm wz. 1897	160	points
4 100mm wz. 14/19	385	points
2 100mm wz. 14/19	200	points
Options
•	Add Observer Rifle team for +15 points.
•	Add Polski-FIAT 621 trucks for +5 points for the
battery.
»w
Command Rifle team Staff team
KAPITAN 1
L KAPITAN1
L HQ SECTION!
LporucznikI
Lporucznik^
Motorised Artillery Batteries may not be deployed in
Ambush.
The only motorised artillery in the Polish army are in
the IO'1’ Motorised Cavalry and the Warsaw Armoured-
Motorised Brigades. The former’s 16lh Motorised Artillery
Battalion has a battery each of french 75mm wz. 1897
guns and Czech 100mm wz. 14/19 howitzers. The latter’s
2nd Motorised Artillery Squadron has two batteries of 75mm
wz. 1897 guns. The first battery of the 16'" Motorised
Artillery Battalion paints a small skull on the door of their
tractors, reflecting their nickname of ‘Death’s Battery’ earned
in the I’olish-Sovii t War of 19 18-1920.
Gun
L GUN PLATOON 1
Lgun platoon^
MOTORISED ARTILLERY BATTERY
Motorised Artillery Batteries use the Horse Artillery rides on
page 50.
Г



Polish
-VICKERS 6-TON TANK
DrawiKq Scale 1:100
Leaf Spring Boqie
( (100 wilfry)
7.3 tQndt£>
4.57м (15‘)
Ar'UAMl&tt:
7yp,B
Vickers Mark E Type A
FrcotT FlevilHin
Two Bivwiwty
7.92nun  • r aMw
OQE 47шлп ijiddt
Power'/Weight: 12.8 kp/toiute
Еибр&ЪШГК:
Ор^гаНопа/
гше:
10th motorised cavalry brigade	——*
retreat, counterattacking whenever possible, back to the
San River.
Britidt Vkkers Mil-
Pulk Kawalerii Zmotoryzowanej
Poland’s first motorised formation was 10Brygada Kawalerii
Zmotoryzowanej (101’ Motorised Cavalry Brigade) formed
in 1937 from 24 Pulk Ulanow (24th Lancer Regiment) and
10 Pulk Strzelcow Konnych (1 O’1’ Mounted Rifle Regiment).
These were supported by an anti-tank squadron, recon-
naissance squadron, the 121st Light Tank Company, the
16lh Motorised Artillery Battalion, and the 101'1 Recon-
naissance Tank Company.
At the outbreak of the war the brigade operated with the
Krakow Army. Together with the 1" Mountain Brigade the
10’1’ Motorised Cavalry Brigade fought a week-long battle
against the German 21”1 Panzer Division and 4th Light
Division. Tire fighting started in the Tatra Mountains south
of Krakow, but the out-numbered brigade was forced to

WARSAW MOTORISED CAVALRY BRIGADE *=
As war approached Poland formed a second motorised
brigade, the Waszatvska Brygada Pancerno-Motorowa,
the Warsaw Armoured-Motorised Brigade. -This brigade
was formed by motorising 1 Ptilk Strzelcow Konnych
Г’ Mounted Rifle Regiment) and 1 Pulk Strzelcow
Pieszycb (Г' Foot Rifle Regiment) supported by an anti-
tank squadron, reconnaissance squadron, the 12"’ Light
Lank Company, the 2,,d Motorised Artillery Battalion, and
the 1 Г1' Reconnaissance Tank Company.
The brigade remained in reserve awaiting its final units
until 5 September when the supreme commander ordered
it to join the newly-formed Lublin Army to defend the
istula River south of Warsaw in an attempt to prevent the
rmans from surrounding the city. It went into action
Te Polish purchased 38 Vickers Mark E (6-tonner) tanks
.rom Vickers Ltd., an English armaments company, in
>32 to replace its aging fleet of Renault FT-17 tanks. All
ere of the Type A configuration with two machine-gun
irrets. After testing revealed inadequate cooling, large air
makes were fitted to all Polish Mark E tanks at Vickers’
expense. These were followed by large tool boxes, logether
licse changed the profile of the tanks quite significantly.
1934, 22 of the tanks were rebuilt to Гуре В standard
irh a single turret mounting a Vickers 47mm dual-
urpose gun capable of firing both high-explosive and
ti-tank rounds. Poland never manufactured its own
Akers Mark E tanks. Instead they began production of
'unproved design, the 7TP, in 1935.
13 nun (0.5 1")
ArmtirimC) suldeley
4~<gluidir, 80-30 lip
Over the next week, the survivors fought numerous hard
battles with the German Г' Mountain Division during an
arduous retreat further east to Lvov where they denied the
Germans the road north to Chelm and Brzesc. Despite
their heroic resistance, their fate was sealed when the Soviet
Union invaded on 17 September. The brigade was then
ordered to withdraw to Hungary by the Tartar Pass.
The Hungarians interned the brigade, but eventually
released the personnel who reformed in France ready to
take part in the Battle of France in 1940.
with the 4"’ and 14,h Infantry Divisions on the line of the
Vistula on 8 September.
When the Germans crossed the river in their sector on
13 September they counterattacked driving the Germans
back. The operation was ultimately unsuccessful, and the
force began to retreat towards Lvov. En route the brigade
absorbed the remains of the 1” Light Tank Battalion
(equipped with 7TP tanks) and the 11th Armoured
Battalion (from the Mazowiecka Brygada Kawalerii,
equipped with TKS tankettes and wz. 34 armoured cars)
retreating southwards from the Narew River.
The brigade was destroyed in the Battle of Tomaszow
Lnbelski between 18 and 20 September as it fought its way
towards Lvov.
сэ С Э. -
British Vickers Mark E Type A
Left Side Elevation / 1
®...©
СЭСЭСзСЭ
Pvlivk Vickers Макк E Type В
(Note a.lr intakes Mid toolboxes)
Left Side Екг>а2игп
31
BACALICB PlGCFjCCY
Infantry Battalion
(Infantry Company)
HEADQUARTERS
2
3
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
Battalion HQ
DIVISIONAL SUPPORT PLATOONS
INFANTRY
ARTILLERY
ARTILLERY
3
5
О
Piechoty Company

Prechoty Infantry Gun
Platoon
ARMOUR

INFANTRY
aStllW
J
ANTI-TANK
•WlXX
Piechoty Company

Piechoty Anti-tank Gun
Platoon
Czolgow Platoon
Light Tank Platoon
Zmotoryzowanej
Anti-tank Gun Platoon
Reconnaissance Tank
Platoon
Light Gun Battery
ARTILLERY
Light Gun Battery
1
INFANTRY
4ЛШ
ANTI-TANK
•urn
Piechoty Anti-tank Gun
Platoon
INFANTRY
WWW*
гЯ
Plechoty Company
Piechoty Heavy
Machine-gun Platoon
MACHINEGUNS
RECONNAISSANCE
Light Howitzer Battery
ARTILLERY


Light Howitzer Battery
Heavy Artillery Battery
Prechoty Scout Platoon
ARMOURED TRAIN
Mounted Kawaleni
Company
LMSfnounwu mrwaicni
Company
Kawalerti Cyclist
Company
Armoured Train
Batalion Piechoty
In Flames Of War a Batalion Piechoty operates as if it is a
company. Whenever the rules talk about a Company, read
that as a Batalion Piechoty (Infantry Battalion).
HEADQUARTERS
Battalion HQ
HEADQUARTERS
MAJOR
Battalion HQ
25 points
L MAJOR
L MORTAR PLATOON^
L BATTALION HQ
Company Command
Rifle team
2iC Command
Rifle team
Option
• Add 81mm wz. 31 mortars for +25 points per
mortar.
The Polish Army began the war on I September 1939 with
thirty regular infantry divisions, just over half the number
they faced in the German Army. Despite being outnumbered
and largely lacking tank support, the Polish Army fought
hard throughout rhe campaign.
L BATALION PIECHOTY HQ
POLISH Ц!
Motivation and Skill
A Batalion Piechoty (pronounced ba-tal-yohn pce-ho-te), or infantry battalion, was a
strong formation of three companies of well-trained riflemen and a heavy machine-gun
company. A Batalion Piechoty is rated as Fearless Trained.
CONSCRIPT
TRAINED

COMBAT COMPANIES
Piechoty Company
Company
KAPITAN 1
3 Piechoty Platoons and
1 Machine-gun Platoon
3 Piechoty Platoons
2 Piechoty Platoons and
1	Machine-gun Platoon
2	Piechoty Platoons
I Piechoty Platoon and
I Machine-gun Platoon
I Piechoty Platoon
640 points
555 points
455 points
370 points
270 points
185 points
1. KAPITAN
Command Rifle team
тйш тйж тйж
Rifle team Rifle team	Rifle team	Rifle team
тйш тйш тйж
Rifle team Rifle team	Rifle team	Rifle team
тйш тйш m
Rifle team Rifle team	Rifle team	Rifle team
к PIECHOTY PLATOON ,
Options
•	Add Anti-tank Rifle teams for +20 points per team.
•	Add Light Mortar teams for +15 points per team.
he Polish rifle company is an unusually strong forma-
< in with 232 officers and men, nearly 50% larger than its
rrman counterpart. Each of its three rifle platoons has three
-man sections. With just a single wz. 28 automatic rifle (a
.cnsed copy of the American Browning Automatic Rifle) in
.. -h 19-man squad, the main firepower of a platoon comes
- im its riflemen. These are armed with the Mauser Karabin
. 98a, the same weapon as their German counterparts.
e company’s three 7.92mm wz. 35 anti-tank rifles are
. 'able of penetrating the armour of most German tanks.
cse weapons were top secret until the start of the war as they
tungsten-cored ammunition to obtain an outstanding
c etration for such a small-calibre weapon. The company
। has a squad of three 46mm wz. 36 light mortars, usually
Tiled one to each platoon. In addition, the battalion
ily supports each company with a platoon of wz. 30
;hine-guns from the heavy n>„chine-gun company.
choty and Machine-gun Platoons from a Piechoty
трапу operate as separate platoons, each with their own
imand team. Although its platoons operate separately for
other purposes, a Piechoty Company deploys all at the
time as a single platoon. For example, this means that ।
treat the entire Piechoty Company as a single platoon
। calculating the number of platoons held in Ambush
serve.
I PORUCZNIK
Command Rifle team
тйш тйш тйж
Rifle team Rifle team Rifle team Rifle team
лЖ тЙШ ТЙШ тЙЖ
Rifle team	Rifle team	Rifle team	Rifle team
Л тЙШ тЙШ тЙЖ
Rifle team	Rifle team	Rifle team	Rifle team
L PIECHOTY PLATOON ,
I PORUCZNIK
Command Rifle team
лМ ТЙШ ТЙШ ТЙЖ
Rifle team Rifle team Rifle team	Rifle team
лИШ ТЙШ тЙЙНЙ тЙЖ
Rifle team	Rifle team	Rifle team	Rifle team
ляш immu ш
Rifle team	Rifle team	Rifle team	Rifle team
L PIECHOTY PLATOON ,
L PODPORUCZNIK^
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Command
Rifle team
Ckm wz. 30 Ckm wz. 30
HMG	HMG
L MACHINE-GUN PLATOON
choty Heavy Machine-gun platoon
Platoon
PORUCZNIK
HQ Section with:
i. PORUCZNIK
3 Taczanka Sections
110 points
Each infan: и baitalion Las a company of heavy machine-
guns. Norm.dl h • unpany is assigned a platoon of three
Ckm 7.92 mm wz. 30 heavy machine-guns, while the fourth
platoon remained at the battalion commanders Jbpo-.il.
This platoon had its machine-guns mounted on hotsc-drawti
race, carls allowing them tr> move qun kly to when. nt,
are needed The machine-gun is mounted facing to the rear
of the l. e ' . allowing it to fire Irom the cart if necessary.
Poland adopted the water-cooled Browning .30 cal Ml917
heavy machine-gun in 1930 as the Ckm wz. 30. Aside from
changing the design to metric for manufacture in Europe,
they also changed the calibre to 7.92mm to match their rifle
ammunition.

Command Cavalry Rifle team
1 HQ SECTION
PLUTONOWY
. PLUTONOWY J
Taczanka
Taczanka
TACZANKA SECTION
. TACZANKA SECTION7
I PLUTONOWY
Taczanka
TACZANKA SECTION
. PIECHOTY HEAVY MACHINE-GUN PLATOON
WEAPONS PLATOONS
PORUCZNIK
PORUCZNIK
2 75mm wz. 02/26
115 points
Piechoty Infantry Gun Platoon —-
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
Options
•	Add Observer Rifle team for +15 points.
•	Add horse-drawn limbers at no cost.
Piechoty Infantry Gun Platoons may not be deployed in
Ambush.
Each infantry regiment has a small infantry gun platoon. It
fields a pair of 75mm wz. 02/26 field guns. Older than most
of the crews serving them, these simple, hardy guns are re-
chambered Russian 3-inch guns that had originally' fought
under the Tcir before being captured front the Red Army.
Command Rifle team
L HQ SECTION
к PLUTONOWY 
к PLUTONOWY
75mm wz. 02/26
I INFANTRY 1
I GUN SECTION I
75mm wz. 02/26
I INFANTRY
I GUN SECTION
INFANTRY GUN PLATOON
> Batalion Piechoty
Piechoty Anti-tank Gun Platoon
platoon
HQ Section with:
3 37mm wz. 36
90 points
Option
Add horse-drawn limbers at no cost.
Each Dvwizja ' , •• y, or infantry division, has 27 anti-tank
guns with a company of nine gun in each regiment. The
anti lank comp.iiiics ate equipped with du ...cellent little
Bofors 37mm wz. 36 inti ink gun. The first 300 of these
highly-capable guns v , i. imported from Sweden, while the
remaining 900 on hand were built under licence in Poland.
A platoon or two of these guns attached to your battalion
are your main anti-tank asset. Do not waste them in head-
to-head battles against the German Panzers. The tanks have
the mobility to mass all of their firepower against a single
platoon of guns, wiping them out before they can destroy
more than one or two tanks. Instead, position your guns to
protect your infantry where they cannot be engaged until
'.be enemy attempts to assault your infantry. The combined
fighting power of the infantry and guns together will cause
tar more casualties.
Piechoty scout Platoon -
Platoon
HQ Section with:
2 Scout Sections
I Scout Section
195 points
110 points
Options
•	Replace up to one Rifle team with an Anti-tank Rifle
team for +5 points.
•	Mount the whole platoon as Cavalry for +10 points
per Scout Section
Piechoty Scout Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
PORUCZNIK
^ORUCZNfl^
Command Rifle team
L HQ SECTION]
L PLUTONOWY 1
FPLUTONOWY 1
37mm wz. 36
37mm wz. 36
I ANTI-TANK 1
L GUN SECTION |
I ANTI-TANK
L GUN SECTION
L PLUTONOWY 1
37mm wz. 36
«SMSMWP AN 11 IAN К Wl'M J
L PIECHOTY ANTI-TANK GUN PLATOON
L PLUTONOWY 1
Rifle team	Rifle team
Rifle team	Rifle team
SCOUT SECTION 1
PORUCZNIK
L PORUCZNIK]
Command Rifle team
L HQ SECTION]
L PLUTONOWY
тйт
Rifle team Rifle team
тйШ тЙЖ
Rifle team Rifle team
L SCOUT SECTION 1
. PIECHOTY SCOUT PLATOON
Mounted infantry scout platoons are mounted infantry-
men rather than cavalrymen and are not trained in the
, use of lances.
Cavalry teams in a Piechoty Scout Platoon do not use the
Lancers special rule on page 50.
Each infantry regiment has a small scout company as its recon-
naissance clement. The company has a small cyclist platoon
and a small mounted platoon. The cyclist platoon use their
mobility to move ahead of the infaptry battalions and scout
out ent my positions, while the cavalry operate on the flanks
where their cross-country mobility is put to best use.
Light Gun Battery
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
Staff team
Light Gun Batteries may not be deployed in Ambush.
75mm wz. 1897
110 points
65 points
4 75mm wz. 1897
235 points
HQ SECTION 1
L PORUCZNIK 1
L PORUCZNIK^
75mm wz. 1897
75mm wz. 1897
KAPITAN 1
^APTM^
Command
Rifle team
Light Tank platoon
Platoon
5 7TPdw
4 7TP dw
3 7TPdw
SUPPORT PLATOONS
205 points
165 points
125 points
3 FT-17 with S.A. 37mm and
2 FT-17 with MG
2 FT-17 with S.A. 37mm and
I FT-17 with MG
Twin MG Turret Tanks
Like the Vickers E Гуре A, the 71 P dw is a dedicated
machine-gun tank with two side-by-side MG turrets.
The two deck turrets of a 7TP dw have an all-round field
of fire, except where the line of fire is blocked by the other
turret or the superstructure.
Both turrets can fire at the same time, cither at the same
platoon or each at a different enemy platoon. Both turrets
can fire at their full. ROF 3 at the same time.

Options
•	Add Observer Rifle team for +15 points.
•	Add horse-drawn wagon and horse-drawn limbers
for +5 points for the battery.
An infantry division has a light artillery regiment with two
battalions of field guns and one of howitzers. Each battalion
has three batteries, which each have four guns. The light gun
batteries use the classic French 75mm Model 1897. In Polish
service it is known .is the armatapolowa wz. 97/17 (field gun
todcl 1897/191 . Mobility and ammunition are provided
dr.iwn limbers.
PODPORUCZNIK
Command tank
HQ SECTION ।
L PLUTONOWY 1
L PLUTONOWY 1
k TANK SECTION 1
LIGHT TANK PLATOON
L TANK SECTION
The 7TP dw twin-turret light tank was considered obsolete
at the start of the war, but the eleven available were formed
into an HQ defence company fighting in Warsaw.
Poland fielded three companies (numbered 111, 112, and
113) of old First World War Renault FT-17 tanks. The
later two companies participated in the defence of Brzesc
where they helped hold the 10th Panzer Division at bay for
wo days.

75mm wz. 1897
GUN PLATOON 1
L GUN PLATOON1
LIGHT GUN BATTERY
KAPITAN
4 lOOmmwz. 14/19
| 2-10 points
Light howitzer Battery =————
Platoon
HQ Section with:
Options
•	Add Observer Rifle team for +15 points.
•	Add horse-drawn wagon and horse-drawn limbers
for +5 points for the battery.
You may not field a Light Howitzer Battery unless you
are also fielding a Light Gun Battery or Horse Artillery
Battery.
Light Howitzer Batteries may not be deployed in Ambush.
fhe light artillery regiment’s howitzer battalion has twelve
Skoda 100mm haubic wz. 1914/19 howitzers. These guns
were widely exported by Czechoslovakia and are used by
many European nations. It is a solid design, able to stand up
to long, hard use, while still light enough to be conveniently
, sed by horse teams.
Heavy Artillery Battery^----------------*=——
Platoon
HQ Section with:
Option
• Add horse-drawn wagon and horse-drawn limbers at
no cost.
You may not field a Heavy Artillery Battery unless you
are also fielding a Light Gun Battery.
Heavy Artillery Batteries may not be deployed in Ambush.
ich infantry division also has a heavy artillery battalion
ith two batteries, each of three weapons. The first battery
equipped with the 105mm wz. 29 gun, a modified version
the French 105mm Model 1913 artillery piece. The
ond battery is armed with the 155mm wz. 17, old French
'mm Model 1917 howitzers. Both guns are manufactured
Schneider and share a common carriage.
3 105mm wz. 29
235 points
KAPITAN
3 155mm wz. 17
260 points
Command
Rifle team
Staff team
I HQ SECTION
t. PODPORUCZNIK 1
t. PODPORUCZNIK
100mm wz. 14/19
100mm wz. 14/19
L GUN PLATOON 1
100mm wz. 14/19
100mm wz. 14/19
L GUN PLATOON
L LIGHT HOWITZER BATTERY I
KAPITAN
KAPITAN
Command Staff team Observer
Rifle team	Rifle team
L HQ SECTION
к OGNIOMISTRZ 
i GUN SECTION i
к OGNIOMISTRZ
i. GUN SECTION
OGNIOMISTRZ
L GUN SECTION ,
HEAVY ARTILLERY BATTERY

<«W
(MECHANISED COMPANY)
Regiment HO
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
INFANTRY
Piechoty Company
ЛЙГМ
3
2
ARTILLERY
Light Gun Battery
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
ARTILLERY
Horse Artillery Battery
Kawaterii Cyclist
Company
ANTI-TANK
Kawaterii Anti-tank Gun Vz
Platoon	Ж
HEADQUARTERS
Reconnaissance Tank	ky
Platoon	Ik
Armoured Car Platoon
LlqM howttzer Battery
Armoured train
Reconnaissance Tank
Platoon
Amio^ Car Platoon

I
£
о

Mounted Kawateni
MACHINE-GUNS
*****
Mounted Kawateni	Vb
Company	Ж,
ARMOUR
Piechoty Company
s
S

2
2
Dismounted	V-
Kawaterii Company	Ж
Polk Kawalerii
Cavalry Regiment
INFANTRY
Mounted Kawateni
Company
INFANTRY
Mounted Kawateni	к
Company	
Dismounted
Kawateni Company Ж
Szwadron Kawalerii
In typical European cavalry fashion, the Poles fielded
their cavalry in battalion-sized regiments made up of
company-sized squadrons.
In Flames Of War a Pulk Kawalerii operates as if it is a
company. This means that
•	Mounted Kawalerii Companies.
•	Dismounted Kawalerii Companies.
•	Kawalerii Heavy Machine-gun Companies, and
•	Kawaterii Cyclist Companies
operate as if they are single platoons. Whenever the rules
talk about a platoon read that as the appropriate type of
Kawalerii company. Where the rules talk about a company,
read that as a Pulk Kawalerii (Cavalry Regiment).
POLISH $
RELUCTANT | CONSCRIPT
FEARLESS
HEADQUARTERS
REGIMENT HQ
L PORUCZNIK’,
KAWALERII PLATOON
MOUNTED KAWALERII COMPANY I
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
Cavalry has always been the elite of Boland’s army, from the winged lancers of the
Sixteenth Century to rhe modern Bulk Kawalerii (pronounced poowk kah-vahl-err-ee).
A Bulk Kawalerii is rated as Fearless Veteran.
Company Command
Cavalry Rifle team
W W W
Cavalry Rifle team
Cavalry Rifle team
Cavalry Rifle team
Cavalry Rifle team
it к
Cavalry Anu tank Rifle team
Command Cavalry Rifle team Cavalry Rifle team
Regiment HQ
Headquarters
MOUNTED KAWALERII COMPANY
Company
HQ Section with:
Regiment HQ
L HQ SECTION]
L PORUCZNIK 1
L KAWALERII PLATOON
L PORUCZNIK
L KAWALERII PLATOON
39
A Mounted Kawalerii Company and any other Cavalry
teams in the force may elect to dismount before the start of
the game sending their horses to the rear and out oj play for
the rest of the game.
3 Kawalerii Platoons
2 Kawalerii Platoons
1 Kawalerii Platoon
he Polish Army consider horse cavalry essential in a country
inking a good road network and plentiful motorised
 chides. The cavaln' provide the army with its most capable
ind mobile elements.
440 points
310 points
180 points
Cavalry Rifle team
Cavalry Rifle team
Cavalry Rifle team
Cavalry Rifle team
SSi
Cavalry Anti-tank Rifle team
ROTMISTRZ
lhe regiments of the twelve Brygada Kawalerii (Cavaln'
Brigades) represent the elite of the Polish Army. The men
volunteered for a two-year term rather than the single year of
the infantry conscripts. The quality of their officers and men
provided them with their only significant advantage over the
(Armans during the campaign in September 1939.
COMBAT PLATOONS
’ he army has forty cavalry regiments, consisting of three Bulk
4zwoleierdw (pronounced poowk shvol-ezh-er-oov) light
lorsc regiments. 27 Bulk I Ila now (pronounced poowk uw-
ri-oov) or lancer regiments, and 10 Bulk Strzehbw Konnych
pronounced poowk stzhel-tsoov kon-nih' or mounted rifle
regiments. Despite their titles, these regiments have identical
>le$, organisation and equipment, although there are some
light variations in uniforms, particularly fot rhe light horse
regiments who trace their lineage back to the chcvatix-lcgers
i Napoleon’s army a century ago.
Despite lances being obsolete, some regiments took their
.-.ccs to war and have used them well on Germans who
Ae the mistake of thinking that the day of cavalry is over.
45 points
PODPULKOWNIK 1
2rC Command
Cavalry Rifle team
PULK KAWALERII HQ
****
Cavalry Rifle team Cavalry Rifle team
\ v v v \ v v v	Cavalry
Ani’tank Ri,le
““““ ““““ ,eam
Cavalry Rifle team Cavalry Rifle team


ISMOUNTED KAWALERII COMPANY
Company
HQ Section with:
ROTMISTRZ 1
3 Kawalerii Platoons
2 Kawalerii Platoons
I Kawalerii Platoon
335 points
235 points
135 points
'The role of caval rv in the modern age was not necessaiiiv to
'ride down the enemy with lance and sabre, but to use their
horse i»> get to the battlefield and manoeuvre tri md tin
flanks of the enemv. Once in position, the cavalrv generally
dismount and fight on foot at infantry (although a mounted
rest r ve is of ten In Id as a liable il t sources pe rm it;.
Polish cavalry platoons are tiny with just eighteen to twenty
dismounted soldiers. They are armed with one of the excel-
lent Polish wz. 35 anti-tank rifles and a wz. 28 automatic rifle
(a licence-built copy of the American Browning Automatic
Rifle) in each platoon, supporting the kb Mauser wz. 98a
rilles of the troopers.
This gives a company of three platoons enough firepower to
fight as infantry and plenty of anti-tank capability to deal
with German tanks (almost all of which are easily penetrated
by the wz. 35 anti-tank rifle).
L ROTMISTRZ ।
Command Rifle team
w
Rifle team
L HQ SECTION 7
L PORUCZNIK
L PORUCZNIK 1
Rifle team Rifle team
Tim -иш
Rifle team Rifle team
лШ -rim
Rifle team Rifle team
Tim -nw
Rifle team Rifle team
Anti-tank Rifle team
Anti-tank Rifle team
L KAWALERII PLATOON?
LKAWALERII PLATOON^
L PORUCZNIK?
Tim Tim ш
Rifle team
Rifle team
Rifle team
Rifle team
Anti-tank Rifle team
LKAWALERII PLATOON?
DISMOUNTED KAWALERII COMPANY
KAWALERII HEAVY MACHINE-GUN COMPANY"
COMPANY
ROTMISTRZ
L ROTMISTRZ ?
HQ Section with:
2 Machine-gun Platoons and	
I Taczanka Platoon	430 points
2 Machinc-gun Platoons	275 points
1 Machine-gun Platoon and	
I Taczanka Platoon	295 points
1 Machinc-gun Platoon	140 points
1 Taczanka Platoon	160 points
r
Command Rifle team
L HQ SECTION]
L PORUCZNIK?
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
[ PORUCZNIK ।
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Ckm wz. 30
HMG
Options
•	Replace one Machine-gun Platoon with a Taczanka
Platoon for +20 points.
•	Mount the Command Rifle team and any Machine-
gun Platoons as Cavalry for +20 points per platoon.
A Kawalerii Heavy Machine-gun Company may Combat
Attach a Taczanka or Machine-gun Platoon to each Mounted
or Dismounted Kawalerii Company. When Combat
Attached to a Kawalerii Company, Taczanka and Machine-
gun Platoons count as part of the Mounted or Dismounted
Kawalerii Company for all purposes.
MACHINE-GUN 1
PLATOON
MACHINE-GUN 1
PLATOON
Taczanka Taczanka Taczanka Taczanka
L TACZANKA PLATOON
KAWALERII HEAVY MACHINE-GUN COMPANY
The regimental he. у machine-gun squadron has twelve
Ckm wz. 30 machine-guns {ckm = aeikich kar.-ibiniiw
. lOtvych, or Heavy Machine-gun) in tl rec platoons of
four guns each. Eight of th ; g ;i are cars d by pa. к horses,
while il c remaining four are mourned on taczi. '.( four-
у. heeled horse-drawn carts with the machine-gun mounted
to fire to the rear without needing to dismount.
Platoon
Kawalerii anti-tank Gun Platoon
*
PORUCZNIK 1
Polish $ I

HQ Section with:
4 37mm wz. 36	155	points
3 37mm wz. 36	120	points
137mm wz. 36	85	points
c
Command Rifle team
L HQ SECTION]
Option
• Add cavalry limbers and mount the Command Rifle
team as Cavalry for +5 points for the platoon.
Each cavalry n in. nt I . .Jc plutu > t przecitv-
pamernych, or anti-tank gun platoon, equippt d with four
37mm wz. 36 anti-tank guns made by the Swedish Bofors
armaments works. These lightweight, rapid-firing guns were
ideal anti-armour support for the cavalry. The Wolyriska
Cavalry Brigade used them to great effect during the battle at
Mokra on 1 September 1939, knocking out dozens of tanks
from the German 4"’ Panzer Division.
KAWALERII CYCLIST COMPANY
Company
HQ Section with:
3 Cyclist Platoons	270	points
2 Cyclist Platoons	185	points
1 Cyclist Platoon	100	points
Options
Replace up to one Rifle team per Cyclist Platoon with
an Anti-tank Rifle team for +5 points per team.
Add Ckm wz. 30 HMG teams for +25 points per
team.
Add Light Mortar teams for +15 points per team.
The cavalry found that bicycles allowed infantry to keep up
with the cavalry on the march, reinforcing the elite cavalry
ithout the cost of training them to ride horses. Cyclist
Companies are rated as Fearless Trained.
onlv have one cyclist platoon with a pair of heavy
i-guns. but the 2ri‘: Light Horse, 15rh, 16l!’, and 17"’
- nd- and 8 Mounted Rifles had a whole company.
 . se their bicvcles to keep up with the cavalry as
then di itint to fieht.
HSAPRAL 1
L KAPRAL 1
37mm wz. 36
37mm wz. 36
I ANTI-TANK 1
L GUN SECTION |
37mm wz. 36
37mm wz. 36
I ANTI-TANK 1
L GUN SECTION I
L KAWALERII ANTI-TANK GUN PLATOON
ROTM1STRZ
Пютмст?
Command Rifle team
L HQ SECTION]
L PORUCZNIK "i
Rifle team	Rifle team
Rifle team	Rifle team
Rifle team	Rifle team
L CYCLIST PLATOON T
L PORUCZNIK ~i
Rifle team Rifle team
saw nw
Rifle team Rifle team
Rifle team Rifle team
L CYCLIST PLATOON

L PORUCZNIK "i
+ЙЙМ TlW
Rifle team	Rifle team
TSW TlW
Rifle team Rifle team
Rifle team Rifle team
L CYCLIST PLATOON
KAWALERII CYCLIST COMPANY I

WEAPONS PLATOONS
HORSE ARTILLERY BATTERY
Platoon
KAPITAN
HQ Section with:
4 75mm wz. 02/26
2 75mm w-z. 02/26
305 points
160 points
Options
•	Add Observer Rifle team for+15 points.
•	Add cavalry wagon and limbers and mount the
Command and Observer Rifle team as Cavalry for
+ 5 points for the batter}'.
Horse Artillery Batteries use the Horse Artillery rules on
page 50.
Horse Artillery Batteries may not be deployed in Ambush.
The wz.. 02/26 is the Tsarist Russian 3-inch Putilov gun
produced in 1902 and re-chambered to 75mm in 1926. Ir
is known as the praivoslawna, or orthodox, as in the Russian
Orthodox Church, due to its origins.
Armoured Car Platoon *
Platoon
3 Wz. 34 armoured car
80 points
Option
• Replace the Command wz. 34 armoured car with a
Wz. 34 (SA 37mm) armoured car at no cost.
The personnel for the cavalry brigade's armoured battalion
are not from the cavalry arm. Armoured Car Platoons are
rated as Fearless Trained.
KAPITAN
Command Rifle team Staff team
I HQ SECTION
L PORUCZNIK i
75mm wz. 02/26
75mm wz. 02/26
L GUN PLATOON 1
к PORUCZNIK
75mm wz. 02/26
75mm wz. 02/26
t GUN PLATOON
HORSE ARTILLERY BATTERY 1
PORUCZNIK
L PORUCZNIKП
HQ SECTION ;
L PLUTONOWY
Wz. 34 armoured car

SECTION
L PLUTONOWY 1
Wz. 34 armoured car

SECTION
i ARMOURED CAR PLATOON
Armoured Car Platoons tire Reconnaissance Platoons.
Q- Я
•-ML s

Polish Pennants—*
~ . introduced in 1917 when the first
.giments formed. These were carried
• res were officially abolished in 1936.
" insisted on carrying their lances to
___heir old pennants. The same colours
pennant sewn onto the collars of
The regimental and squadron headquarters carried larger
pennants and streamers marked with the squadron colours.
Lance pennons are 30’775cm long by 8’720cm wide.
Squadron streamers are 36‘785cm long by 10’725cm wide.
The regimental pennant is 48’7120cm long by 14’735cm
wide. Tire examples below are from the Г Ulan (Lancer)
Regiment.
REGIMENTAL PENNANT
Regimental HQ
SQUADRON PENNANTS
Light Cavalry Regiments
Ulan (Lancer) Regiments
mounted Rifle Regiments

Armoured Train
I KAPITAN 1
^ORUCZNIK
-w nw nw
Command Rifle team Rifle team Rifle team	Rifle team Rifle team Rifle team Rifle team
. ASSAULT PLATOON 1
Artillery Car
Assault Car
ARMOURED TRAIN
Armoured trains were critical to Poland’s survival in
the 1920 ’s and are still an important part of the army.
Armoured Trains, Assault Platoons, and Armoured Railcar
Platoons are rated as Fearless Trained.
^RMOUREEURAI^
ARMOURED TRAIN
Armoured Trains may not be deployed in Ambush.
Locomotive, Assault Car and Assault Platoon with:
2 Heavy Artillery Cars	695	points
1 Heavy Artillery Car and 1 Light Artillery Car	690	points
2 Light Artillery Cars	685	points
1 Heavy Artillery Car	430	points
1 1 ight Artillery Car	425	points
Locomotive with:
2 1 leavy Artillery Cars	535	points
1 Heavy Artillery Car and I Light Artillery Car	530	points
2 Light Artillery Cars	525	points
1 1 leavy Artillery Car	270	points
1 Light Artillery' Car	265	points
Option
• Add up to one Armoured Railcar Platoon for
each Light or Heavy Artillery Car for +70 points
per platoon.
Note that the TKS tankettes attached to armoured
trains do not have 20mm wz. 38 guns.
The history of Polish armoured trains started shortly after
Poland gained independence in 1918. They were one of
the most important weapons in the war against Bolsheviks
in 1919 and 1920, and the other conflicts that shaped the
borders of Poland. Dozens of improvised armoured trains
fought between 1918 and 1921. After operations ceased in
1921, only the dozen most advanced were left in service.
In September 1939 the Polish Army had two armoured train
battalions in service:
•	1. Dywizjon Pociqgow Pancernych based in Legionowo
operated in the north-west of Poland.
•	2. Dywizjon Pociqgow Pancernych based in Nicpolomicc
operated in the south of Poland.
Each battalion mobilised five armoured trains, 1” Battalion
included trains numbered from 11 to 15 and the 2nd Bat-
talion had trains numbered from 51 to 55. The trains were
usually attached to other units patrolling, providing artillery
support, and often covering withdrawals.
Armoured train Nr. 53 Smiaty (‘Bold’) was typical. It was
grouped with train Nr. 52 Pilsudezyk (‘Pflsudskiite’—sup-
porter of Jdzef Pilsudski, Chief of State from 1918 to 1922).
Both had fought for Poland in the wars of independence
from 1918 to 1920, and modernised, fought again in 1939.
On the day of rhe German invasion Nr. 53 assisted the
Wolyriska Brygada Kawalerii (Volynian Cavalry Brigade) in
stopping the advance of the German 411’ Panzer Division at
Mokra. On the following day the trains withdrew towards
Warsaw engaging tanks of the l'! Panzer Division.
Two weeks later both trains fought in the defence of the fort-
ress city of Brzesc, holding off the 10d’ Panzer Division for
three days. The train escaped rhe fall of the fortress, only to
be finally captured by the Red Army in Lvov.
Polish
Trains in Assaults
• Armoured Trains cannot launch assaults.
comotive
* ARMOURED TRAINS
Artillery Car
POLISH ARMOURED TRAINS SUMMARY
See pages SI to SS for the full rules for Polish Armoured Trains
DEPLOYMENT
•	Tlte opponent picks a point on their table edge. Tien
the Armoured Train player picks a point on their table-
edge. Tlie railway line runs between these points.
•	An Armoured Train must be deployed on the railway
line in the order shown, but can face backwards or
forwards.
•	The Assault Platoon deploys in the Assault Car. It can
then dismount to fight as a separate platoon.
•	Armoured Railcar Platoons are separate platoons and
deploy at ends of train. They can move with the train
or dismount and move normally.

MOVEMENT
•	Armoured Trains move 16’740cm forward or backward
along the railway line ignoring enemy troops.
•	As long as the Locomotive is not Bailed Out or
Destroyed, the Armoured Train can move.
•	Teams cannot move through an operational Armoured
frain. A Destroyed Armoured frain is Very Difficult
Going.
Shooting With Trains
•	Armoured Trains fire at full ROF when moving.
•	Armoured Irains can fire Artillery Bombardments
while moving. Guns on Armoured Trains count as two
weapons when bombarding.
•	All weapons on a train can fire at the same time. Train
MG fire ROF 2, even when other weapons fire.
Shooting At trains
•	The Locomotive and each car are separate teams in
the same platoon. Destroyed Artillery or Assault Cars
continue to move with the train.
Friendly teams cannot fire through an Armoured Train.
Enemy teams can fire through an Armoured Train, but
targets behind an Armoured Train are Concealed.
While the Locomotive can move, Armoured Trains
cannot be captured in assaults.
45
PCLISF) ARSCQAi.
TANK TEAMS
Armour					
Name	Mobility	Front	Side	lop	1 qnipmeru and Noto
Weapon	Range	ROF	Anri i.ink	Firepo.trer	
Tanks					
TKS	Half-tracked	0	0	1	Hull MG.
TKS I'ZOmr FKA)	I {jif-trackd	0	0	1	
20mm wz. 38 gun	•' 6 740cm	2	2	5+	Hull minted.
FT-17 with MG	Fully-tracked	1	1	1	MG, Very slow tank, Unreliable.
FT-17 with S.A. 37mm	Fully-tracked	1	1	1	Very slow tank, Unreliable.
S.A. 37mm gun	16740cm	2	4	T+	One-man turret.
Vickers E Type A	Fully-tracked	0	0	1	Twin MG turrets (p. 30), Slow tank, Unreliabl
Vickers E Type В	Fully-t racked	0	0	1	Co-ax MG, Slow tank, Unreliable.
47mm Vickers gun	16740cm	2	5	4+	
7TP dw	Fully-tracked	1	1	1	Twin MG turrets (p. 36), Slow tank.
7 TP jw	Fully-tracked	1	1	1	Co-ax MG, Slow tank.
37mm wz. 37 gun	24760cm	2	6	4+	
Armoured Cars					
Wz. 34 armoured car	Wheeled	0	0	0	MG.
Wz. 34 (SA 37mm) armoured car	Wheeled	0	0	0	
S.A. 37mm gun	16740cm	1	4	7 +	
Machine-gun Carriers					
Taczanka	Cavalry wagon	-	-	-	
Ckm Wz. 30 machine-gun	16740cm	6	2	6	FI MG carrier, Portee.
Polski-FIAT 508 Taczanka	Jeep	-	-	-	
Ckm IVz. 30 machine-gun	16’/40cm	6	2	6	HMG earner, Portee.
Armoured Train					
Loco mo rive	Train	3	3	2	
Light Artillery Car	Train	3	3	2	Six train MG, MG turret (p. 54).
Two 75mm wz. 02126guns	24760cm	2	8	3+	Deck turrets.
Firing bom bardmen ts	727180cm	-	3	6	
Heavy Artillery Car	Train	3	3	2	Six train MG, MG turret (p. 54).
75mm wz. 02/26 gun	24 760cm	2	8	3 +	Deck turret.
Firing bombardments	727180cm	-	4	5+	
100mm wz. 14/19 howitzer	24 '/60cm	1	8	2+	Deck turret.
Firing bombardments	727180cm	-	4	2 +	
Assault Car	Train	3	3	2	Four train MG (p. 54), Passengers.
Vehicle machine-guns					
Vehicle MG	16740cm	3	2	6	ROF 1 if other weapons fire.
Train MG	16 740cm	2	2	6	Retain ROF 2 ifother weapons fire.
MG turret	16740cm	2	2	6	Self-defence Anti-aircraft.
_ Polish
GUN TEAMS
Weapon	Mobility	Range	ROF	Anti-tank	Firepower	Naco
Ckm wz. 30 HMG	Man-packed	2 4”/60cm	6	Э z.	6	ROF 2 when pinned down.
81 mm wz. 4' mon.if	?‘ и	 71	-	-)	6	Smoke bombardment.
37mm wz. 36 gun	Light	24”/60cm	3	6	4+	Gun shield.
“5mm wz. 1 497 gun	Heavy	0 m	2	8	3+	Gun shield. Smoke.
Firing bombaidments		(>•< 7160cm	-	3	6	Smoke bombardment.
"^mm wz. 02/26 gun	Heavy	24’760cm	2	8	3+	Gun shield, Smoke.
Firing bombardments		64’7160cm	-	3	6	Smoke bombardment.
100mm wz. 14/1'1 how? •	Immobile	24'760cm	1	8	2+	Gun shield.
Firing bomb.ni mi nr<		727181ЮП	-	4	4+	
105mm wz. 29 gun	Immobile	24760cm	1	9	2+	Gun shield.
Firing bombardments		807200cm	-	4	4+	
i?5mm wz. 1917 howi tzer	Immobile	16’740cm	1	10	1 +	Bunker buster, Gun shield.
Firing bombardments		72’7180cm	-	5	2+	
к		INFANTRY TEAMS				
> Arsenal
Team iHe ream	Range 16’’/4 0cm	ROF 1	Anti-tank 2	Firepower 6	Notes
- He/MG team	16’740cm		2	6	
. icht Mortar ream	16’740cm	1	1	4-	Can fire over friendly teams.
Ui-tank Rifle team	16’740cm	1	4	6	lank Assault 3.
.‘".’it team			cannot shoot		Moves as a Heavy Gun team.
TRANSPORT TEAMS
	Armour
Vehicle	Mobility	Front Side Top	Equipment and Notes
. .dry limber & wagon	Cavalry wagon	-
H* r-Jrawn limber & wagon	Wagon	-
ki-FIAT 508 field car	Jeep
Г diL-FIAT 621 truck	Wheeled	-
. i iz. 222 half-track	Hal f-t racked
some of the Polish forces can be modelled with equipment from other nation's forces.
>ukol motorcycle and sidecar '5mm wz. 02/26 gun ’OOmmwz. 14/19 howitzer Polski-FIAT 621 truck PZlnz. 222 half-track Cavalry and horse-drawn limbers .avalry and horse-drawn wagons	GE400 BMW & sidecar FI570 76mm K/02 gun 1T580 100/17 howitzer SU 122 ZIS-5 truck GE273 Sd Kfz 10 (It) tractor XX651 Horse-drawn limbers XX652 Supply wagons
DOCTRINE
16 /40СМ
Pciish»SpeciAM Rule
These special rules n fleet the desperation of the Polish forces fighting for the very survival of their country.
Fate of the Nation
Every Polish soldier knows that Lierman} and the Soviet
Union seek io destroy Poland as a free nation. Despite the
desperate odd . they fight tor their scry survival, and even
aftt i die destruction of Poland seems certain, seek to escape
the ruin and fight again alongside their allies.
A Polish platoon (or company) joined by a 2iC Command team
may re-roll failed Platoon Morale Checks.
Bypassed
The German blitzkrieg smashed through the Polish front
lines and advanced deep into Poland, bypassing many Polish
units on the way. These refused to surrender and attempted
to fight their way back to the rest of the army.
At the start of the game before deployment you may declare
th tt a company has been bypassed. Use company that has been
bypassed must be a single-platoon company and can be any of
the following types:
•	a Mounted Kawalerii Company,
•	a Dismounted Kawalerii Company,
•	a Kawalerii Cyclist Company, or
•	a Piechoty Company.
lhe bypassed company counts as being deployed on the table
when determining the number of platoons (or Polish companies)
to hold in Reserve or Ambush. However, instead of deploying the
platoon on the table, bold it off the table.
At the start of your first turn, roll a die. On a score of 6 the
bypassed company arrives as if from Reserve, except that it
arrives at a random location.
ENEMY TABLE EDGE
16/40CM
POLISH TABLE EDGE
POLISH TABLE EDGE
If tm ' ... . ,	'. 	arrive on the fir,t turn, roll two
di:  i: .	' your  7	' a score of 6 on
either die to hat e the bypassed company arrtte. If the < .pany
does z at .	. on the second tu • л rod three dice on the third
th . .	ri of a 6 bringing on the company. Keep
rolling each turn, adding a die each time, until a 6 is rolled.
When the bypassed company does arrive, roll another die. On a
roll of 1 the company arrives on the table edge to the left of the
opponent’s table edge. On a roll of 2, the company arrives within
16”/40cm of the left-hand corner of the opponent's table edge.
On a roll of 3 or 4, the company arrives from the opponents
table edge. On a roll 5, the company arrives within 16”!40cm
of the right-hand corner of the opponent’s table edge. On a roll
of 6 the company arrives on the table edge to the right of the
opponents table edge.
Ihe bypassed company must arrive from a point at least 8 ”/20cm
from all enemy teams. If they cannot arrive at the rolled location,
they will delay their arrival by one turn and then roll again for
a new location.
The bypassed company cannot Launch an Assault in the turn in
which it arrives on table.
Each mission shows your and your opponent's table edge on the
mission 's diagram.
ENEMY TABLE EDGE
16V40CM
16V40CM
Night Counterattack
Many local Polish COtUirefanaCKS were launched under the
cover of darkn ; due to German air superiority. Gent al
D th Biernacki, commander of, \rmia Prusy (Army Prussia)
even issued an instruction to his divisional commanders that
ria v should use forests and built-up areas as points of resist-
ance at the rear of P.in/.er units and counterattack them at
night if the German atnioured forces broke through. As the
Polish Army had no' trained for this type of operation, the
fighting that resulted was often very confused and continued
well past dawn.
Players commanding a Batalion Piechoty may elect, prior to
their opponent's deploy v Л to make a night counterattack
и never they are attacking in a mission that is a Fair Fight
(see page 198 of the rulebook).
If tt do so, the . , r in ,,iii 1 , ••	/ uses iG Xight
Fighting rules (on page 154 of the rulebook) until mot >nrig
breaks.
•	At the start of the defender’s turn three, the defender rolls
die. On a score of 5s, morning has broken.
•	If the roll is unsuccessful, at the start of the attackers next i .. n
they roll two dice with morning breaking on any roll of 5s.
•	If it is still dark at the start of the defender’s next turn, they roll
three dice, and so on until morning breaks on any roll of 5s.
Once morning breaks the night fighting rules are no longer used,
and it is daylight for the remainder of the game.
Э? Special Rules
TRAINS AND TANKS
Deck Turret
Armoured trains feature multiple turrets on each artillery
carriage making them virtual land battleships. Although
each turret had a wide field of fire, they were limited to a
degree by the superstructure and other turrets.
Guns mounted in deck turrets have an all-round field of fire
..xcept where their rotation is blocked by the vehicle’s super
structure or other turrets.
One-man Turret
French Renault FT-17 had a one-man turret mounting either
a machine-gun or a 37mm gun. Although this was sufficient
for infantry support work, it made their tanks unsuitable for
tank-versus-tank clashes as the commander was faced with
the impossible task of finding new targets, and loading and
firing the gun, while directing the driver as well.
A tank with a one-man turret may not fire its main gun while
moving, and may not fire both the main gun and the turret
machine-gun in the same turn.
INFANTRY
Batalion Piechoty (Centralised Control)
‘«land is a poor country beset with enemies. It has little
to fight with but its brave soldiers. Fortunately, its army
.nmbines a well-educated leadership with the stoic determi-
nation of the peasant farmer.
In Flames Of War a Batalion Piechoty operates as if it is a
company. Whenever the Flames Of War rulebook talks
about a company, read that as a Batalion Piechoty (Infantry
Battalion).

Szwadron Kawalerii (Centralised Control)
In typical European cavalry fashion, the Poles fielded their
[ cavalry in battalion-sized regiments made up of company-
sized squadrons. Even this is perhaps an overstatement as
their squadrons were the same size as a Polish rifle platoon.
In Flames Of War a Pulk Kawalerii or Pulk Kawalerii
Zmotoryzowanej operates as if it is a company. This means that
• Kawalerii Zmotoryzowanej Companies,
•	Zmotoryzowanej Heavy Machine-gun Companies,
•	Mounted Kawalerii Companies,
•	Dismounted Kawalerii Companies,
•	Kawalerii Heavy Machine-gun Companies, and
•	Kawalerii Cyclist Companies
operate as if they air single platoons. Whenever the rules talk
about a platoon read that as the appropriate type of Kawalerii
or Zmotoryzowanej company. Where the Flames Of War
rulebook talks about a Company, read that as a Pulk Kawalerii
Zmotoryzowanej (Motorised Cavalry Regiment) or Pulk
Kawaterii (Cavalry Regiment).
Hurah!
While they normally fight as mounted infantry, the Polish
lancers have a long history of decisive mounted charges.
Once the oider to charge is given, nothing will stop them
short of death.
While all reams of a Mounted Kawalerii Company are mounted
as cavalry, it may re-roll all failed Motivation Tests to Rally
from being Pinned Down.
Lancers
The lance is a traditional weapon for Polish cavalry—it was
after all the Polish lancers of Napoleon’s army that reintro-
duced the lance into European warfare in the Nineteenth
Century. However, by 1934 even the Poles had to admit the
lance was rather archaic and they officially discarded it. This
didn’t stop many regiments from taking them out of storage
when they went to war and using them very effectively when
the opportunity arose. Even those who didn’t use lances,
achieved similar results with their sabres.
If there are no enemy Tank teams within 2"l5cm of a Polish
mounted Cavalry team, it hits Infantry and Gun teams on a
roll of 2+ in the first round of assault combat when it launches
an assault.
Mounted Man-packed Guns
The Poles carried many of their cavalry machine-guns on
pack horses. When the objective is reached, the machine-
guns dismount and prepare to defend their gains.
While mounted as Cavalry. Man-packed Gun teams (such as
Ckm wz. 30 HMG teams) count as Infantry reams like all other
Cai airy teams. However, they cannot shoot until they dismount,
and cannot launch assaults.
Taczanka
The taczanka (pronounced tah-chank-ah) is a horse-drawn
machine-gun cart. The concept was developed during the
Russian Civil War in 1919-1921 as a way of giving cavalry
their own mobile machine-guns. One oddity is the use of
three-horses abreast (chariot style) to pull the wagon.
/1 Taczanka is an Unarmoured Tank team and an HMG
Carrier, so the (.km wz. 30 HMG flies as an HMG when rhe
Taczanka is stationary or as a vehicle MG when moving. /!.< a
Portee mount, the crew can dismount rhe Ckm wz. 30 HMG
and send the cart to the rear. A Taczanka may start the game
dismounted. In this case replace each Taczanka with a Ckrn
wz. 30 HMG.
Horse Artillery
Polish horse artillery arc trained to gallop into action along-
side the cavalry. When their guns arc needed, they unlimbcr
and are ready to fire in less than a minute.
A Gun team rated as horse artillery that unlimbers at the start of
its movement fires its gun without any penalty to its ROFfor the
movement required to unlimber, zls it moved, a Gun team rated
as horse artillery still cannot fire an Artillery Bombardment in
the turn it unlimbers.
Cavalry
Polish cavalry arc famed through our the world. They are the
epitome that other cavalry strive to match.
Cavalry use the Cavalry rules front the rulebook including:
Moving in Buildings on page 39.
Dismounting Cavalry on page 44.
Shooting from Horseback on page 64.
Who can Assault on page 95
Cavalry Charging into Contact on page 97.
Cavalry against Tanks on page 103-
Cavalry Ride Down their Foes on page 110.
Cavalry Consolidating onpa^e 111.

POLISH
1
Armoured Train Player's Table Edge
Player picks a point
on their table edge
Railway Line passes
through woods and fields
Player places Railway Line
between the two points
Railway line diverts
around hills 1
Opponent picks
a point on their.
 table edge

Buildings are
moved aside from
Railway Line
Placing Railway Lines
*1 ihout railway lines, there are no armoured trains. Since
»t gaming tables don't have tracks laid ready for an
c lured train co use, we use the following rules to place
Я - tracks before the game begins.
It — table has been set up with railway lines, use these for the
ured Train. Otherwise, at the start of the game before any
"r’rt or fortifications arc placed on the table, the players
pu .r railway line as follows:
i opposing player picks a point on their table edge
diagram with tach mission shows you which are the
attackers and defender's table edges).
2.	armoured train player picks a point on their table edge.
r armoured train player places a railway line running
a straight line between these two points. The line cuts
-«ugh woods, fields and other flat ground, and rivers or
• .-.ints are assumed to be crossed with culverts or bridges.
buildings in the way should be mured aside by the
r; -mum necessary. The railway line is diverted by the
mum necessary to go around hills (even gentle gntdi-
-  .пт avoided by railway lines.
Bf •	 _• । tvs have armoured trains, there is only one railway
w-:	. < defending player picking their table edge first.
.WAY LINES
C	railway lines are little obstacle to troops and
*.—	.ever, railway lines arc often embanked when
Railway line bridges
streams and rivers
crossing low-lying ground. These embankments can cause
considerable difficulty for vehicles.
Normally the railway line is placed directly on the table surface
and does not change the terrain it crosses in any way.
You may place bridges where the railway line crosses a river os-
stream. Rail bridges art Difficult Going reflecting the difficulty
of driving along the tracks and the wooden sleepers or ties.
Railway Lines and Fortifications
When the enemy has armoured trains, it is important to
limit their mobility as part of an fortified defence. However,
it is risky to build a bunker across a railway line as you may
need to repair the line for your own use in the future.
Players may place Anti-tank Obstacles and Minefields across a
Railway Line to limit the movement of an Armoured Train.
They may not place Rankers across a Railway Line.
Optional Embankment Rules
If your opponent agrees, you may place the railway line on
an embankment where it makes sense to do so in terms of
the terrain on the table. Embankments can be low or high.
•	Low embankments are generally Difficult Going and
provide Bulletproof Cover for Infantry and Gun teams
sheltering directly behind them.
•	Htgh embankments ate Very Difficult Going. Some
embankments were so high that they were Impassable to
vehicles except at tunnels under the track.
ARMOURED TRAIN CARS AND PLATOONS
ARMOURED TRAINS
Armoured trains cost a fortune to build and operate, anil
they have a set way of doing things to maximise efficiency.
The Locomotive and each Artillery and Assault Car in an
Armoured Train count as a separate Tank team, with the whole
train counting as a single platoon.
An Armoured Train must always operate in the order shown
in the diagram on pages 44 and 45. It cannot uncouple cars or
change their order, but tt may travel in either direction and may
enter the table facing either direction.
Armoured Railcar Platoon
I he armoured railcar platoon has a section of tankettes on
individual self-propelled rail cars in front of the train and
another behind it. These tankettes can dismount in a matter
of a minute or so to scout ahead of the train.
Armoured Railcar Platoons operate as separate platoons with
their own command teams. Although they operate as separate
platoons for all other purposes. Armoured Railcar Platoons
deploy with the rest of the Armoured Train. For example, this
means that you treat the entire Armoured Train, unhiding the
Armoured Railcar Platoon, as a single platoon when calculating
the number of platoons held in Ambush or Reserve.
If you have Armoured Railcar Platoons, one deploys at each end
of the train adjacent to the Artillery Car. The tankettes deploy on
the railway line in the order shown on pages 44 and 45.
An Armoured Railcar Platoon moves with the Armoured Train
until it dismounts. At end of the Movement Step you may dismount
an Armoured Railcar Platoon from its milcan and mure it up to
an additional 4 "UOcm in any direction.
An Armoured Rai! Car Platoon may also dismount to
Counterattack if it is assaulted. In this case simply move the
vehicles from their current positions.
assault Car and Assault Platoon
Like the marines of a battleship, an armoured train carries
an infantry platoon in a specially-equipped assault car for
its own protection and to clear obstacles from the track. The
assault platoon travels safe under the thick armour of the
assault car, only dismounting when they are needed.
The Assault Platoon always deploys with the Armoured Train
as Passengers in the Assault Car (as if the Assault Car were a
Transport team), but operates as a separate platoon with its own
Platoon Command team. For example, this means that you treat
the entire Armoured Train, including the Assault Platoon, as a
single platoon when calculating rhe number oj platoons held in
Ambush or Reserve.
The Assault Platoon can dismount from the Assault Car in the
same way that Passengers normally dismount from a Transport
team and are treated its Passengers and need to make a Passenger
Save if the Assault Car is Destroyed by shooting. If the Assault
Car is Destroyed in an assault, the Assault Platoon is Destroyed
if it is still aboard.
Like any other passengers, the Assault Platoon can dismount
to Counterattack if the Armoured Train is assaulted, but must
dismount in the Movement Step if they wish to launch an assault
of their own.
I DEPLOYMENT
armoured Train Deployment
Armoured trains can only move along railway lines, so their
deployment options are usually very limited.
An Armoured Train is deployed on the Railway Line in the
player's deployment area.
If there is not enough room on the Railway Line in a players
deployment area for the entire Armoured Train, any part of rhe
train that does not fit starts the game off the table and conies on
when the train moves far enough onto the table to fit them.
A player may elect to hold an Armoured Train that would
normally be deployed on the table just off the table until the
start of their first turn. A train held off table voluntarily like
this, or one that could not be deployed, moves onto the table in
its first turn.
If the Railway Line does not cross the deployment area, the
Armoured Train will arrive at the point where the Railway
Line crosses the player's own table edge, or if it does not cross the
player's table edge, at the point the Railway Line crosses a table
edge closest to the player's table edge.
ARMOURED TRAIN DEPLOYMENT
Armoured Railcar Platoons
deploy in the order shown
One Armoured Railcar
Platoon deploys at each end
of the Armoured Train
Assault Platoon 7K,
deploys in Assault Car
Armoured trains must
deploy in the order
shown in diagram on 2
rages 44 and 45
Polish
ARMOURED TRAIN MOVEMENT
Armoured Train movement
The ke v to the sm ces; >1 armoured rains is rhe \ r operational
mobility. They can move rapidly to trouble spots and deliver
effective support when they arrive. In a country with Fess'
, " ' WS. 1 ') ' : i
Armuu trl I
the Liicvfnoti,
forward or backward along the railway line each turn. In the
> turn an Armoured Tram moves onto the table, it always moves
far enough to bring the entire train and its Armoured Railcar
Platoons onto the ' n this is more than 76 . -Ocm.
h my part of an Armoured Train leaves the table, the whole
A noured Train is considered to have left the table and cannot
return.
Moving Near Enemy Teams
Armoured trains are unstoppable behemoths. They are not
ss orried by mere soldiers on the track and svill push aside any
( : icmy tank that attempts to block their passage. Of course,
hey are a little more reluctant to ram a friendly tank!
Armoured Trains may not move through friendly teams. Any
о ndly team on the tracks must move off the tracks before the
ti in can pass.
. Armoured trains are not hindered by enemy teams except other
. b moured Trains. Any other enemy team is moved aside by the
opposing player by the smallest distance necessary for the train
so pass, retaining its current facing, lhe Armoured Train player
move any wreck on the tracks aside to let the train pass.
Teams must move
around an armoured
train, notthrough it
MOVING THROUGH TEAMS
armoured Train movement
Armoured trains can
move in either direction
Armoured trains
move 16740cm along
railway lines
If any part of an
Armoured Train leaves
the table, the whole
Armoured Train is
considered to have left
the table and cannot
return.
> Polish armoured 1
NO MOVING THROUGH TRAINS
Unlike a platoon of tanks or infantry, an armoured train is a
single long entity svith no gaps. There is nosvhere for tanks to
dris'e through and infantry are not foolish enough to attempt
co move between the wagons risking getting crushed if the
train should mosze.
Teams cannot move through an Armoured Train unless the
Locomotive has been Destroyed. Once the Locomotive is
Destroyed, it and other Destroyed cars in the train become
Very Difficult Going. Armoured Trains cannot move through
other Armoured Trains, even when the other Armoured Train
is Destroyed.
No moving Through armoured Trains
SHOOTING WITH ARMOURED TRAINS
Shooting from armoured Trains
By comparison with a tank moving across country, a train
provides a relatively smooth ride.
Armoured Trains do not suffer any penalty for shooting он the
move, retaining their full ROF when shooting while moving.
Artillery Bombardments from Trains
The predictable movement of a train allows it co fire a bom-
bardment on the move. The huge stocks of ready ammuni-
tion mean, they can do so at a very high rate of tire.
When firing an Artillery Bombardment. c.t, h artillery car counts
as a separate artillery battery and counts each weapon firing as
two weapons firing. This gives each Artillery Car the equivalent
of four weapons firing.
Both of the Artillery Cars in an Armoured Train can combine to
fire a single bombardment instead of firing as separate batteries.
This gives them the equivalent of eight weapons firing allowing
them to re-roll misses. If a Light Artillery Car anil an Heavy
Artillery Car combine, they both fire as Light Artillery Cars as
per the Mixed Bombardments rule on page 133 of the rulebook.
Armoured Trains can fire Artillery Bombardments while
moving.
Fields of Fire
Demolishing Railway Lines
Railway lines are remarkably hard to destroy, especially as
the train carries spare rails and wooden sleepers or ties to
allow its track-repair team to repair minor damage.
The only way to damage a Railway Line during a game is for
a Pioneer team to place charges on the tracks. A Pioneer team
must start the turn adjacent to the Railway Line and not be
Pinned Down to place charges. The team cannot move in the
Movement Step, although they do count as moving and cannot
claim to be Concealed in the open or Gone to Ground.
TRAIN MACHINE-GUNS
A trains machine-guns are manned by separate machine-gun
sections leaving the gun crews free to fire their own guns.
Artillery and Assault Cars fire all of their machine-guns at
ROF 2, even tvhen other weapons arc firing, including if they
arc firing an Artillery Bombardment.
The field of fire of a train M G mounted on the side of an Artillery
or Assault Car includes everything to the side of a line drawn
along the side of the car. The field of fire of a train M G mounted
on the end of an Artillery Car includes everything to the front
of a line drawn across the end of the car.
MACHINE-GUN TURRET
Each artillery car has an anti-aircraft machine-gun mounted
in a turret on the top to protect against aircraft.
An Artillery Car's MG Turret has a ROF of2 and an all-round
field of fire, except where the line offire is blocked by another
turret or the superstructure of the Artillery Car.
When firing at aircraft, an MG Turret is a self-defence anti-
aircraft weapon and has an all-round field of fire. Firing the
MG Turret at aircraft does not prevent the other weapons on the
Artillery Car from firing next turn.

Instead of Shooting, roll a Skill lest at the end of the Shooting
Step.
•	If they pass the Skill lest, the section of Railway Line
adjacent to the team becomes Difficult Going to trains.
•	Otherwise the railway line is undamaged.
Only the Locomotive needs to take a Bog Check when crossing
damaged Railway Lines, but it does so whenever the train
reaches the damaged section, or if the train starts the turn
straddling a damaged section of railway line. If a train Hogs
Down, only the Locomotive is considered Bogged Down.
54
POLISH
SHOOTING AT ARMOURED TRAINS
Shooting at armoured trains
Armoured trains arc remarkably tough unless hit w ith hcavy-
calibre guns. Lvcn if the locomotive is disabled and the train
halted, the gun cars will still tight on in place.
The Gun Tank rule (see page of rhe rulebook) can Ise used io
distinguish between different types of car and the l.ocumotiur
If a car is Destroyed. it ceases to function dong with all of its
weapons, but otherwise has no effect on the train. Пи- train
moves with the Destroyed car still in plan.
If the Locomotive is Destroyed, the train can no longer move.
If the train Jails a Platoon Morale Check after the Locomotive
is Destroyed, the whole tram is Destroyed in place. If the train
Jails a Platoon Morale Check while the Locomotive is still opera-
tional. the whole train is removed from the table instead.
Once the Locomotive is Destroyed, a Destroyed Locomotive or
Artillery or As ,iult Car is Very Difficult Going. It still Conceals
any team on the far side of it.
— - — _ --------------- — _ - ----------------_
SHOOTING AT ARMOURED TRAINS
The Locomotive and each Artillery or Assault Car are
separate teams in the same platoon.
Destroyed cars move with the train. If Locomotive is
Destroyed, train cannot move and Destroyed cars become
j Very Difficult Going.
Mi
SHOOTING ACROSS ARMOURED TRAINS
No one is going to risk taking a shot that might hit their own
armoured train, hut the enemy doesn’t care.
In the same way that teams cannot shoot through any other
type of Friendly team, Friendly teams cannot shoot through an
Armoured Thun.
Enemy teams«.in -hoot through an Armoured Train, hut reams
.it least half obscured by the Armoured Train count as being
Concealed.
POLISH ARMOURED TRAIN SPECIAL RU
SHOOTING ACROSS ARMOURED TRAINS
ARMOURED TRAINS IN ASSAULTS
Armoured trains ate difficult to assault with machine-guns
bristling from every aperture. These fearsome beasts arc not
worried by mere infantrymen and can ignore them at will.
Armoured Trains cannot Launch an Assault or Charge into
Contact, so they do not move when Counterattacking.
ARMOURED TRAINS IN ASSAULTS
If the Locomotive is operational when an Armoured Train Freaks
Offfrom an assault, the train may move through or past any
enemy teams without hindrance and the train does not need to
be more than 4 TlOcm from enemy teams for the w -anlt to end.
It will not surrender, and Locomotives and Assault and Artillery
Cars are unaffected by proximity to the Assaulting Platoon
If the Locomotive is Bailed Out, Bogged Down or Destroyed
when an Armoured Train Breaks Off from an assault, the
Locomotive and any Assault or Artillery Car within 4"/10cm of
the Assaulting Platoon are captured and Destroyed as usual.
The Assault Platoon and Armoured Rail Car Platoons art separate
platoons from the Armoured Train. If the Assault Platoon is still
mounted in the Assault Car when the Assault Car is Destroyed
in an assault, the whole Assault Platoon will be Destroyed. The
Assault Platoon and Armoured Rail Car Platoons can dismount
Armoured trains cannot
launch an assault or move to
counterattack
Armoured trains will 
>'not surrender if within
4710cm when Breaking
Off if the locomotive is still
^operational J|
armoured Trains in Assaults
to Counterattack if they are assaulted.

German^
Bv 5 September 1939. alter five days of war. the plans of
both sides were falling apart. Marshal Rydz-Smigly's plan
was to avoid decisive battles, buying time until Britain and
France's intervention forced Germany to pull troops out of
Poland. However, Poland's border defences had collapsed and
a full-scale retreat to a new defensive line behind the Vistula
River was under way. Worse, the retreating infantry divisions
were being overtaken by the fast-moving German armoured
spearheads, making a stand on the Vistula look more and
more difficult. In addition, the German General Guderian's
armoured corps was already on the road to Warsaw and there
was little to stop it short of the capital.
On the German side, Field Marshal von Brauchitsch was
concerned. Ihe Polish Army was not standing to fight.
Instead it was escaping the planned encirclement west of the
Vistula. To destroy rhe Poles would require a deeper encir-
clement into eastern Poland. This however, would commit
Germany’s armoured forces at the end of a long supply line
far from Germany’s borders. If France attacked, it would be
difficult to bring them back to Germany and then pir them
against France to defend Germany's western borders. With
the French reaction as yet unknown, this was a risk he could
not take.
Ihe British and French had declared war on 3 September,
but neither had any plans for an attack on Germany. Britain’s
Army was tiny, making it subordinate to the French in any
land battle. The French were convinced that the main lesson
of the First World War was that the defensive was stronger
than the offensive. With this in mind, they expected the
Poles to hold out for three or four months while they or-
ganised a proper offensive against Germany. Meanwhile, the
French launched a limited attack in the Saar opposite the
Maginot Line to bring their front line up ro Germany’s West
Wall fortifications. This advance began on 7 September, and
halted after an advance of 5 miles (8 km) on 12 September.
On the same day that the French started their attack, the
lead elements of Guderian’s 19’1' Armoured Corps reached
the outskirts of Warsaw. To avoid being surrounded in
Warsaw, Rydz-Smigly evacuated his headquarters to Brzesc.
Unfortunately, this put him out of touch with his armies
at a critical time. He did however, order General Kutrzcba’s
Poznan Army to attack southwards into the flank of the
advancing German Eighth .Army. The attack was to be
carried out as soon as possible to relieve rhe pressure on rhe
retreating E6dz Army. Unable to wait for assistance from rhe
Pomorzc Army, the Poznan Army attacked along the Bzura
River on 9 September. Initially the attack went well, routing
two German divisions and capturing over 1500 prisoners.
While the Eighth Army struggled to withstand the Polish
onslaught, the German commander of Army Group South,
Field Marshal von Rundstedt. saw the opportunity to
bring on the decisive battle the Poles had been seeking to
avoid. Guderian svas ordered to turn west from Warsaw
and encircle the Poles, blocking the route to Warsaw. Every
available German division was thrown into the battle and
by 11 September the Polish offensive had been blocked.
The remains of the three Polish Armies could muster just
nine infantry divisions and two cavalry brigades, and they
now faced two Panzer divisions, three light divisions, and
fourteen infantry divisions.
JOO	ISO
b “°
General Kutrzeba ignored orders to attempt to break out
towards Radom through the main German force, and took
the more realistic route of breaking out eastward towards
Warsaw. Only the two cavalry brigades and two infantry
divisions managed to break out through the Kampinos
Forest before the remaining forces in the Bzura pocket were
destroyed on 18 September. By 21 September over 120,000
Polish troops had been captured.
Tire Bzura counteroffensive drew off Guderian’s tanks and
gave Warsaw an additional week to prepare for what must
inevitably come. Two new armies, the Lublin and Warsaw
Armies were formed from reserves, and defences constructed
around the city. The German Third Army attacked Warsaw
from the north on 15 September, but made little headway.
It wasn’t until 22 September that the forces occupied by the
Bzura fighting completed encircling the city in the south. Tire
first attack on 23 September, supported by a thousand artil-
lery pieces, was repulsed. On 25 September, ‘Black Monday’
the German Air Force bombed Warsaw with
1200 aircraft (repeated four years later by
the RAF in their ‘Thousand Bomber
Raids’ on Germany). Tire raid left
much of the city burning, but
inaccurate bombing also caused
extensive casualties in Third
Army to the north. This
and other air attacks on
Poland used up half
of the German Air
Force’s entire prewar
stockpile of bombs.
Lubelski between 18 and 20 September. Tire German 4th
Light and 2"J Panzer Divisions blocked the thrust isolating
Lvov. Polish forces continued to fight their way towards the
Romanian border until 6 October, but the Polish campaign
was largely over.
The Germans attacked again capturing key Polish fortifica-
tions on 26 September. On 28 September Warsaw surren-
dered, putting another 140,000 Polish troops into captivity.
By this time events elsewhere had made continued Polish
resistance impossible. On 17 September the Soviet Union
invaded Poland from the east, eager to seize the share of the
spoils promised by Germany in the Molotov-Ribbentropp
Pact. With the Polish Army fighting in the west of the
country, they faced little opposition.
Faced with the impossibility of forming a new front against
the Germans, Rydz-Smigly ordered the remaining Polish
field armies to break out southwards to Romania where
they could be evacuated to France to continue the war.
The Krakow Army spearheaded its thrust with the Warsaw
Armoured-Mechattised Brigade and the 1“ Tank Battalion,
leading to the biggest tank battle of the war at Tomaszow-
German

fighting in Poland cost the Germans heavily. They lost
casualties (enough soldiers to man an entire corps),
. ks (equivalent to two Panzer divisions, nearly a quarter
links committed to the campaign), 319 armoured
artillery pieces, and 285 aircraft. Ihese losses meant
и •icn was no possibility of launching an attack against
. .. util the army had rested and rebuilt its strength.
tnd defeated, any urgency for an attack by France
rated. The British and French planned to stand on the
..•r - '.-c tor several years as they used their advantage in
might to rearm and prepare. The result was the
; ir as the British and French faced the Germans
. Maginot Line, sending out patrols and engaging
I и al artillery duels.
Krd th Britain's naval blockade and the reality of fighting
' the  arid s biggest industrial powers alone, Germany
. choice but to attack soon while they still could. By
- (.imany's forces were rebuilt and ready for the
. gn. The difficult}'they faced was that the French
> • kJ defended by the heavily-fortified Maginot
way around was through neutral Belgium,
a! - id fortifications along its border, although not
ug: .> t - Maginot Line.
vtt- • aliry was of little concern, Germany had
-. • ’ ле to invade France at the start of the First
World War. The real problem was how co fight a battle of
encirclement with only one way to attack. A frontal assault
against the well-equipped French armies would lead to heavy
casualties, but there appeared to be little alternative. That is
until (ieneral von Manstein came up with a plan to draw
the French and British armies north into Belgium and the
Netherlands (collectively known as the Low Countries) with
an attack from the north, then slash through the Ardennes
Forest in Luxembourg, just north of the Maginot Line and
cut them off with a ‘sickle stroke’. The reason this might
work was that the Ardennes were generally considered to be
totally unsuited to die use of tanks, and thus were likely to
be lightly defended. A fast enough thrust here might get the
German tank forces through the Ardennes before the Allies
could react and block them. It was a risky plan, but one that
promised great success.
Fortunately for the Germans, the French plan played right
into their hands. The French, preferring to fight the war in
someone else's country, planned to move their mobile forces
northwards into Belgium and dig in along the Dylc Riser
(the so-called Dyle Line). The hinge between the Maginot
Line and the main forces in Belgium facing the Ardennes
would be held by reserve divisions, since a German thrust
through the forest was unlikely, and if it happened, the time
it would take would allow countermeasures to be taken.
KEY
Front Lines
National Borders
Germany

FOURTH
EIGHTEENTH
loire Rirrr
ANOTHER BEF
After the British evacuated the
BEF from Dunkirk, they scraped
together a new BEF to help the
French. The 52nd (Lowland)
Division was sent to Cherbourg
and part of the I" Canadian
Division to Brest, but they arrived
too late to save the I" Armoured
Division and the 51“ (Highland)
Division from being destroyed
in the lighting around Abbeville.
When Paris fell, they were
evacuated back to Britain.
German Armies
Case Yellow Attacks
Case Red Attacks
SPAIN
KLEIST
Cities
Rivers
Maginot Line
60
German
МТИЕЯ1Л1
TWELFTH
E
Г
Strasbourg
I seventh:
Brussels
[eighteenth}
Duttcldorf
ninth |
TWELFTH |
URC
FOURTEENTH
Ditrrbuirrn
FIRST
GUDSUANl

Adopting von Manstein’s plan as Case Yellow, the Germans
invaded the Low Countries at 0430 hr on 10 May 1940.
Knowing that they could not afford to be delayed by the
Dutch and Belgian border fortifications or the numerous
rivers and canals, the Germans landed assault parties by
glider and parachute to seize key positions. The Dutch and
Belgians did their best to resist but their plans were badly
dislocated by the loss of the border fortifications, which
they were expecting to buy time for their troops to deploy.
One mechanised French army and the British Army swung
north from the French border heading for the Dyle Line to
assist the Belgians. Another mechanised French army crossed
Belgium racing to aid the Dutch. The Meuse River opposite
the Ardennes was covered by reserve divisions of a second-
line French army. The German plan was working perfectly.
While the Allies were distracted by the attacks in the Low
Countries, the bulk of the German armoured divisions were
racing through the Ardennes almost unopposed, reaching the
Meuse River on 12 May. The French reserve divisions barely
slowed the German thrust, and by 1 5 May the Germans had
a large bridgehead across the river. A day later the German
spearhead was through the French defences and far behind
the Allied front line. The German tanks reached the coast at
the mouth of the Somme River on 20 September, cutting the
British and French armies off from their supplies.
Marching on half rations, the British and French fell back,
mounting a fighting withdrawal as they tried to close their
wide-open flank. Sporadic attempts to re-establish contact
with the rest of the French Army failed, leaving evacuation
the only alternative. Between 27 May and 4 June the Royal
Navy evacuated 200,000 British troopsand 140,000 Belgian
and French troops from Dunkirk, leaving 30,000 French
behind holding the beachhead to the end.
With Case Yellow completed more successfully than anyone
could have imagined, the time had come to take Paris and
subdue France in its entirety. The plan for this was Case Red.
With half of the French Army and 90% of the British Army
destroyed, Case Red was much simpler than Case Yellow’s
sickle stroke. All that was required was simultaneous attacks
along the entire front line to secure crossings over the Somme
River, then an all-out pursuit to ensure that the French could
not form another defensive line.
The German success in executing this plan conceals the
determination with which the French and British opposed
them. Stunned by the defeat in Belgium, many French
soldiers felt they had been sucker punched in Belgium and
were determined to stop the Germans from going further.
Most of the French troops evacuated from Dunkirk were
reformed into divisions, re-equipped with the latest weapons
rolling off the production lines and sent back to the front
eager for vengeance. The British sent divisions to France as
fast as they could be prepared for combat.
When the Germans crossed the Somme on 5 June, they were
initially stopped cold. The French were fighting their type of
battle and were determined to win. Unfortunately they were
badly outnumbered and no longer had a reserve, so when the
Germans finally broke through they were unstoppable. Paris
fell on 14 June, and a week later France surrendered.
Continued on path 112


SefWjoW
Germany took on the world in the First World War and lost,
losing much of its territory, army and navy under the terms
ot the Treaty of Versailles. Many Germans voted for Hitler
in part for his vow to restore Germany to its former glory.
Within two years of taking power Hitler was openly rearming
Germany ready to reverse the 'unjust* Treaty of Versailles.
Tlie manufacture of armaments ensured full employment in
the middle of a world-wide depression.
Hitler regained control of the Rhineland and Saar industrial
areas, incorporated Austria into his new German Empire,
and dismantled Czechoslovakia unopposed, increasing his
popularity still further. By the time Britain and France guar-
anteed Polands borders, lew believed that they would light.
The outstanding successes of the German Army first against
the Poles and then against the British and French led many
to think them invincible.
PANZER TROOPS
When Germany began its rearmament
in 1933, one of the top priorities was
forming Panzer (armoured) divisions. As
new training tanks like the Panzer I and
Panzer II became available in sufficient
quantity, the number of armoured divisions steadily grew
reaching a total of six Panzer and four Leichie (light) divi-
sions at the start of the war. As Germany's elite troops, these
divisions were given the best recruits and newest equipment
Ihey trained hard in a new style of warfare
that would literally take Europe by storm—•
Blitzkrieg ы Lightning War.
Their revolutionary tactics give the tank crews,
riflemen and gunners of the Panzer and Leiehtt
divisions a Skill rating of Veteran. Their certainty in a quick
victory gives them a Motivation rating of Confident.
HEER TROOPS
While the Panzer troops were Germany’s
elite, the bulk of the Heer (Army) was
old-fashioned foot-slogging infantry sup-
ported by horse-drawn artillery. The need
lor vast numbers of divisions to hold one
of Germany's borders and fight on the other meant that
divisions were constantly being stripped of experienced per-
sonnel to form new divisions. These were replaced by older
recruits recalled to service and troops from
home defence units.
Heer units (marked with the German helmet
decal jf) arc confident that Germany will
win the war, so have a Confident Motivation
rating. Their lack of time to properly train makes them less
combat effective than the elite Panzer troops, so they have a
Trained Skill rating.
MOTORISIERT TROOPS
These troops are made up of high-quality
recruits led by the best officers and arc as
they support Motorisiert units (marked with
their wheeled infantry symbol e ) are have a
Panzer corps has a motorised infantry division to support its Motivation rating of Confident and a Skill rating of Veteran
Panzer divisions.	just like the Panzer troops.
\ff\
WAFFEN-SS TROOPS
FEARLESS
'Hie Nazi Party did not trust the German
Army, so formed a politically-reliablcarmy
of its own. Known as the Waffen-SS. the
armed branch of the SS (Schutzstaffeh,
Hitlers Protection Squad were there to
fight both Hitler s external and internal enemies, in 1939, the
Waffen-SS fielded four regiment-sized Standarten (Standards
or Banners). In 1940, these had been expanded into two
motorised infantry divisions and one Standarte.
TRAINED
The Waffen-SS (marked with the SS helmet
decal ff ) arc all volunteers lighting for the
Nazi cause. Their commitment to Hitler's
----------' rating Fearless. However, they have been
rapidly expanding and lack experienced leaders, so their
tactical performance is not always as good as it could be.
Waffen-SS units have a Skill rating ofTraincd.
64
ral Erwin Rommel is most famous for hts exploits as
. Desert Fox’ commanding the Deutsches Afrikakorps. in
'. stern Desert in 1941 and 1942. He began the Second
a -Id War commanding Hitler's bodyguard. Despite his
m i .tience with armoured forces, Hitler supported his
rxxji -t to command 7. Panzerdivision in France. The speed
mniel’s advance led to the division being nicknamed
r 1 host Division' as neither the enemy nor his own com-
xr . •' had any idea svhere ir would be next.
<n • May 1940, three days into the campaign, Rommel
is cd to make an assault crossing of the Meuse River
i against a stout defence by French forces in bunkers
- cd bv artillery. Rommel personally led the attack,
. vith the second wave of boats before getting into
th the engineers to build a bridge. As a senior
had no place leading such an assault, but news
t.i> ding from the front endeared him to his men and
. . firrec loyalty.
ii . .ntinued to demonstrate his fearlessness in battle.
• _ ’.he Meuse crossing, Rommel led the charge
nw. and was nearly killed when he drove his tank
i' ri-rank fire at a sand quarry. Injured in the face
• .i:k v. , knocked out. Rommel was saved only by
Characteristics
Erwin Rommel is a Warrior and a Higher
I in r.ii.d a» Fearless Veteran Rommel is
.•3't tank.
*> r Somme for -130 points tn any Czech
- r :r,'.in-;	r KradwhiitZcn-
tfut include-. * Czech Parmer Platoon equipped
the timely intervention of Colonel Rothenburg, commander
of the 25th Panzer Regiment. On 15 May, Rommel and his
command group overran a French artillery battery that was
setting up. believing itself to be far behind the front lines.
The next day. on his own initiative, Rommel launched the
‘Ghost Division’ west to reach the Sambre River and secure a
bridgehead without waiting to clear his Hanks. It was a risky
move which paid oif, and Rommel was awarded the Knights
Cross, recognising his extreme battlefield bravery and suc-
cessful leadership.
After Dunkirk when the German Army turned south across
the Somme. Rommel personally led a reconnaissance before
ordering an attack on St. Valery-cn-Caux on the French
coast. His bold attack caught the defenders by surprise
and on 12 lune 12,000 men of the British 51" (Highland)
Division and French 70'1' Alpine Division surrendered to
Rommels division. 7. Panurdivision continued west, cap-
turing Cherbourg on 18 June, only days before the signing
of rhe armistice with France. Although Rommel's daring
thrusts were seen as reckless by some German command-
ers, his personal bravery and tactical skill further enhanced
his reputation with Hitler and led to his appointment with
the Deutsches Afrikakorps where he became internationally
renowned and respec ted as a general of the highest ability.
Special Rules
Fingertip Feeling: Rommel is said to have Fingerspitzengefiihl,
a fingertip feeling for battle. One German platoon within
8”/20cm of Rommel may make a normal move within its
deployment area after both sides have deployed but betbre any
Reconnaissance Deployment moves.
Rommel at the Point: Romm.'l 1.-. !- fr. n	
German platoon that Rommel fotnc pa*to ail Mottvarinta
Гог» i*i a roll ot h and mas re-rcG all Lsdxd bCll Гох» tu

LICHT ARMOURED COMPANY
(Tank Company)
HEADQUARTERS
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
A Leichte Panzerkompanie can have luttwafte platoons (marked as support options.
Remember that Luftwaffe platoons retain their own ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see
page 183 of the rulebook).
ARMOUR
AIRCRAFT
1’iinzrr IV huik*
RECONNAISSANCE
INFANTRY
ANTI-TANK ......
ii.itr.o-.
ARMOUR
ARTILLERY
Motors Light Artlitay Baftnv
Param II Ratoon
RECONNAISSANCE
ARMOUR
INFANTRY
ANTI-AIRCRAFT
Light Anti-aotratt
Gun Platoon
ARMOUR
ARMOUR
German
Leichte Panzer platoon
Panzer I
Tank
Tank
HEADQUARTERS
Lunteroffizier?
Company Command
Panzerbefehlswagen
2iC Command
Panzer II C
Company HQ
Headquarters
Platoon
Platoon
Command Panzer II C
HAUPTMANN
L HQ SECTION]
Lunteroffizier?
Lunteroffizier
L PANZER SECTION ?
L PANZER SECTION ?
Panzer II C Panzer II C
Panzer II C Panzer II C
LEUTNANT
Leichte Panzerkompani
1 Panzerbefehlswagen and 1 Panzer II C (early)	75 points
Options
•	Replace Panzerbefehlswagen tank with Panzer III E
tank for +85 points. You must field a Panzer III
Platoon if you do this.
•	Add Panzer II C (early) tank for +45 points.
•	Replace all Panzer II C (early) tanks with Panzer II C
(late) tanks for +10 points per tank.
•	Add Panzer I tank for +35 points.
•	Add Sd Kfz 9 (181) recovery half-track for +5 points.
Panzer 11 Platoon
L HAUPTMANN 1
L COMPANY HQ
L LEICHTE panzerkompanie HQ
Germany built the Panzerbefehtswilgen (pronounced pant-serr
be-fails vah-gen) command vehicle on rhe Panzer I chassis.
COMBAT PLATOONS
1 Panzerbefehlswagen, 2 Panzer 1! C (early) and 2 Panzer 1 1 Panzerbefehlswagen. 1 Panzer II C (early) and 1 Panzer 1	200 points 115 points
1 Panzer II C (early) and t Panzer 1 1 Panzer II C (early) and 2 Panzer 1	195 points 120 points
3 Panzer II C (early) and 2 Panzer 1 2 Panzer II C (early) and 1 Panzer 1	215 points 130 points
Option
• Replace all Panzer II C (early) tanks with Panzer II C
(late) tanks for +10 points per tank.
5 Panzer II C (early) 1 Panzer 11 C (early) 3 Panzer II C (early)	225 points 180 points 135 points
5 Panzer 11 C (late)	280 points
t Panzer II C (hie)	225 points
3 Panzer 11 C (late)	170 points
LEUTNANT
LjtutnanH
Command tank
L HQ SECTION
Lunteroffizier
Panzer I
. PANZER SECTION ?
L PANZER SECTION 1
LEICHTE PANZER PLATOON
PANZER II PLATOON
67


MEDIUM ARMOURED COMPANY
(Tank Company)
Small Elite
A Mittlere Panzerkompanie must have either Panzer III E
or Panzer IV D tanks, but cannot have both. Units with
both types are organised using the Leichte Panzerkompanie
organisation on page 66.
Although ideally every Panzer battalion should have three
Panzerkompanien equipped with Panzer III light tanks and
a Mittlere Patizerkompanie of Panzer IV medium tanks,
only the Panzer Lehr battalion attained anything like that
ideal. .Most battalions had four Leichte Panzerkontpanien
with a mixture of tank types.
HEADQUARTERS
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
ARMOUR
RECONNAISSANCE
RECONNAISSANCE
ARMOUR
ARTILLERY
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
ANTI-TANK
ARMOUR
ANTI-AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
A Mittlere Panzerkompanie can have Luftwaffe platoons (marked ) as support options.
Remember that Luftwaffe platoons retain their own ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see
page 183 of the rulebook).
34 34 $4 Ц 24 34 34
Germanтг
Motivation and Skill
The elite Mittlere Panzerkmnp/tnie (pronounced ntit-Ier-er pant-я • kom-pan-ec)
equipped almost entirely will) the latest Panzer HI or IV tanks have considerable confi-
dence in their equipment and are very well trained, and is rated as Confident Veteran.
Company HQ
HEADQUARTERS

*

Headquarters
1 Panzcrbefehlswagen and
2 Panzer 11 C (early)	120	points
2 Panzer HIE	260	points
1 Panzer IV D and 1 Panzer II C (early)	195	points
2 Panzer IV D	300	points
Options		
• Replace all Panzer II C (early) tanks wi	th Panzer IIC	
(late) tanks for +10 points per tank.		
• Add an Sd Kfz 9 (18t) recovery	half-track for	
+ 5 points.		
Panzer III Platoon —*
Platoon
5 Panzer III E
4 Panzer III E
3 Panzer III E
CONFIDENT
VETERAN
HAUPTMANN 1

Company Command tank
2iC Command tank

COMBAT PLATOONS
lie the Panzer 111 would eventually b.-.uim- i u primary
tie . of he <' rman Army, in tin r . campaigns
stere still quite rare. In Poland in 1939, only 87 were
Iihihle out of ticarh 3000 tanks and almost all were in
r , г а с id the Pavat'f Lehr Abteilung. However,
t  st ' . J rhe Battle ol I i. inc, there were 349 with the
у it It icy were distributed more evenly with most com-
. having at least one or two platoons.
mittlere Panzer Platoon
Platoon
4 Panzer IV D
3 Panzer IV D
2 Panzer IV D
Panzer IV gises fire support n> the lighter tanks,
hough its role would ch urge as the war progressed, it was
the on'i. German rank CO stay in continuous production over
Ilu course cd the war. It too was relatively rare in Poland
1 939 with oi I : oik platoon in , nit Panzer battalion
(although once again I. Pnnzerdivition and Panzer Lehr
d more). Bv the B, ttle • ! It .nee each b tt. ion I .id a full
rtlere Panzerkompanie equipped with Panzer IV tanks.
:mittlere Panzerkompanie
__________<
600 point.*
450 points
300 points
650 points
520 points
390 points
UNTEROFFIZIER
HQ SECTION
Panzer IV D

Command Panzer HIE
ТП1 h ddЛ q i"7/"i II eH




Panzer IV D
Panzer IV D
в PANZER SECTION

Panzer IV □
L MITTLERE PANZER PLATOON I
69
Trucked armoured Company
(Tank Company)
HEADQUARTERS
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
A Verlastete Panzerkompanie can have Luftwaffe platoons (marked '•*<* ) as support options.
Remember that Luftwaffe platoons retain their own ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see
page 183 of the rulebook).
armour
INFANTRY
Г RECONNAISSANCE
RECONNAISSANCE

INFANTRY
RECONNAISSANCE
*m
ARTILLERY
ANTI-AIRCRAFT
Gun Platoon
Truck-borne Tanks
Tanks were still new technology in the Second World
War. Their engines, transmissions, tracks and suspen-
sion tended to break down with monotonous regularity.
This made long, road marches difficult as tanks would
not arrive in good shape. As part of the Light Divisions
that invaded Poland, the Verlastete Panzerkompanie got
around this problem by having trucks and trailers to
carry its entire complement of tanks. When the recon-
naissance elements were held up by the enemy, the tanks
dismounted and went into action.
AIRCRAFT
Alt Support
A Verlastete Panzerkompanie is always the attacker in
any mission that uses the Defensive Battle special rule or
requires a die roll, to determine who is the attacker.
When they are the attacker in a mission, the Company HQ
and Combat Platoons of a Verlastete Panzerkompanie may
make a Reconnaissance Deployment move (see page 194 of
the rulebook) provided that the Reconnaissance Deployment
move takes the whole platoon out of its deployment area.
German т г
Company HQ
Headquarters
Verlastete Panzer II platoon
HEADQUARTERS
L HQ SECTION;
L UNTEROFFIZIER~|
L PANZER SECTION
Company Command
Panzerbefehlswagen
2iC Command
Panzer II 0
220 points
190 points
150 points
Panzer II D Panzer II 0
Panzer I Panzer I
Panzer I Panzer I
Command Panzer I Panzer
Command Panzer II 0
L HQ SECTION
L UNTEROFFIZIER 1
[ PANZER SECTION
VERLASTETE PANZER 11 PLATOON
Panzer II D or E tanks are rated as Half-tracked to reflect
tbeir high speed on roads and low speed in rough terrain.
Panzer II D Panzer II D
LEUTNANT 1
jJEUTNAN^
VERLASTETE PANZERKOMPAN
Verlastete Panzer I platoon
Platoon
Platoon
6 Panzer I
5 Panzer I
4 Panzer I
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
As the new mechanised cavalry of the 1930's, the Light Divisions embodied the cavalry
spirit, epitomised by their combining trucks and light tanks. A Verlastete Panzerkompanie
(pronounced fer-las-tet-erpant-serr kom-pan-ee) is rated as Confident Veteran.
CONFIDENT TRAINED
HAUPTMANN
1 Panzerbefehlswagen and 1 Panzer II D or E	85 points
L HAUPTMANN]
OPTIONS
•	Add Panzer 11 D or E tank for +55 points.
•	Add Panzer I tank for +35 points.
•	Add an Sd Kfz 9 (18t) recover}' half-track for
+5 points.
COMBAT PLATOONS
Llie Panzer I light tank (also known as the MG Panzer for
r inn iment), was only intended as a training tank. Despite
is, thet made up nearly a third of the entire German tank
.r for the invasion of Poland, The number of Panzer I
ks in front-line service actually increased for the Battle of
. ice, although the proportion dropped slightly as the light
visions were expanded to full Panzer divisions.
5 Panzer II D or £	275 points
4 Panzer II D or E	220 points
3 Panzer II D or E	165 points
.he most common German tank was the Panzer II light
tank. There were two main types in service in Poland (both
m 1 with 2cm guns), the standard Ausf a to C models
iih conventional semi-eliptical springs, and the new
I s/ 9 and E models with a new experimental high-speed
ir ic'n-bar suspension. The Ausf D and E models serving
itlt 2. and 4. Leichte Division in Poland proved to have
,x>or cross-country performance, and t etc Ji .carded to the
. attle <.! i rance. The . I f : to С uu dels were in. ,te  . tess-
1, if lightly armoured. They served on in France where 70%
ere fitted with additional armour.
COMPANY HQ
VERLASTETE PANZERKOMPANIE HQ
LEUTNANT 1
[MEUTHAN^
L UNTEROFFIZIER
L PANZER SECTION
L VERLASTETE PANZER I PLATOON
[UNTEROFFIZIER
L PANZER SECTION 1
71
HEADQUARTERS
ARMOUR
ARMOUR
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
RECONNAISSANCE
RECONNAISSANCE
ARMOUR
ARTILLERY
***&&
INFANTRY
ANTI-TANK
ARMOUR
•aircraft
ANTI AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT
Light Anti-aircraft
Gun Platoon
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
A Czech Panzerkompanie can have Luftwaffe platoons (marked ) as support options.
Remember that Luftwaffe platoons retain their own ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see
page 183 of the rulebook).

German
Headquarters
Company Command tank
CONFIDENT
HEADQUARTERS
Option
• Add an Sd Kfz 9 (18t) recovery half-track for
+ 5 points.
A Czech Panzerkompanie may not have both
Panzer 35(t) and Panzer 38(t) В tanks.
CZECH PANZER PLATOON
Platoon
Funteroffizier
L PANZER SECTION ]
CZECH PANZER PLATOON
The Germans also took over the CKD (Praga) factory,
which had been gearing up to build its newTNH-P light
tank. The Germans ordered this into production with
provision for a fourth crew member as the LTM 38, later
renaming it the Panzerkampjwagen 38(t).
Czech Panzerkompanie
Motivation and Skill
Although they are equipped with ( ech rather than German tanks, the skill and motiva-
tion of the German crews mantling a Czech Panzerkompanie is second to none. A Czech
Panzerkompanie is rated as Confident Veteran.
TRAINED J
VETERAN ’
2 Panzer 35(t)	165 points
2 Panzer 38(0 В	175 points
Company HQ

COMBAT PLATOONS
5 Panzer 35(0 4 Panzer 35(0 3 Panzer 35(0	420 points 335 points 250 points
5 Panzer 38(t) В 4 Panzer 38(0 В 3 Panzer 38(t) В	440 points 350 points 260 points
3 Panzer 38(0 В and 2 Panzer 1 2 Panzer 38(0 В and 1 Panzer 1	335 points 210 points
LEUTNANT 1
Command tank
L HQ SECTION^
L UNTEROFFIZIER1
PANZER SECTION
In 1938 Germany occupied Czechoslovakia without
tiring a shot and eagerly took its armaments, including
300 Skoda Lehky Tank vzor 35 (Light Lank Model 35) light
tanks into its arsenal. In German service it was known as
the LTM 35 until January 1940 when it was redesignated
.is the Panzerkampjtvagen 3h(t) (Panzcrkainpfwagen means
Xrmoured Fighting Vehicle with the '(t)’ standing for
ischechisch or Czech). Although well-armed and armoured,
the Panzer 35(c) was mechanically complex and unreliable,
ihe Germans refurbished them in an attempt to minimise
rhe problems, and added a fourth crewman to load the
gun and reduce the workload of the tank’s commander.
HAUPTMANN
L HAUPTMANN,
2iC Command tank
COMPANY HQ]
CZECH PANZERKOMPANIE HQ |
Both tanks were used as substitutes for the scarce Panzer 111.
120 Panzer 35(t) tanks were assigned to 1. Leichte Division
(I'1 Light Division) for the invasion of Poland. Of these
only seven were destroyed, but another 70 were damaged
or lost to mechanical failure. Just 55 Panzer 38(t) tanks
were available for 3. Leichte Division. These proved much
more reliable and just seven were lost.
During the Battle of France, 106 Panzer 35(c) light tanks
fought in 6. Panzerdi vision (the old 1. Leichte Division)
while 99 Panzer 38(t) were used by 7. Panzerdivision (the old
2. Leichte Division) and another 131 by 8. Panzerdivision
(the old 3. Leichte Division).
After its performance in France, the Panzer 38(c) was recog-
nised as one of the most reliable tanks of its day, making
it popular with its crews during campaigns where tanks
travelled long distances under their own power.
73
виивьяииияиииии—и
ДЙепКбШрв
____Rifle Company_

HEADQUARTERS
МЫ
2
DIVISIONAL SUPPORT PLATOONS
INFANTRY
О
О
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
2
Heavy AiiU-Unk Gun
Platoon
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
A Schiitzenkompanie can have Luftwaffe platoons (marked as support options.
Remember that Luftwaffe platoons retain their own ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see
page 183 of the rulebook).
MACHINE-GUNS

INFANTRY
IlftU
MACHINE-GUNS

Platoon
ARTILLERY
4aa
RECONNAISSANCE
ARTILLERY

Sdtotnn
AnU-tank Gun Plrtxai
Senior titnki ana Kijle
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
Ржш» n Platoon
» HI Platoon
Czech Panzer Pittoon
JUsault Gun Platoon
ARMOUR
ANTI-TANK

ANTI-TANK

Tank-nuirtor Platoon
ANTI-TANK
Bunks Ftok Platoon
RECONNAISSANCE
PfAtOCW)
Hetty Ряпл?гм>бП
PlRlDOO
ARTILLERY
5ЖЙХ1
wKXOvMrtJ LHJnl
Artillery Battr-ry
Motorised Heavy
Artniery Battery
ANTI-AIRCRAFT
Light Anti-aircraft
Gun Platoon
AIRCRAFT
German
ANT
CONSCRIPT
CONFIDENT
TRAINED
VETERAN
HEADQUARTERS
Motivation and Skill
A Panzer division had fust two battalions of Schiitzen in Poland, increased to four in
Gance. These riflemen were the best infantry in the German Army. A Schiitzenkompanie
pronounced shyoot-sen kom-pan-ee) is rated as Confident Veteran.
Kfz 15 field car
SCHUTZENKOMPANIE
COMPANY HQ
HEADQUARTERS
Company HQ
45 points
HAUPTMANN
Hauptmann*!
thev earned the more famous name Panzergrenadier in
in 1942, the Panzer divisions’ infantry were known as
z. a. or riflemen, and wore the same pink Waffenfarbe
^ir epaulettes as the Panzer crews. The connotations of
' are of mobile light infantry or dismounted c.iv dry.
Schutzen Platoon -
Platoon
Q Section with:
COMBAT PLATOONS
5 Schiitzen Squads
2 Schutzen Squads
I KO points
135 points
Options
• Replace Command Rifle/MG team with a Command
SMG team at no cost.
Replace all Rifle/MG teams with MG teams for
-10 points per Schutzen Squad.
Add an Anti-tank Rifle team for +20 points.
Add a second Kfz 70 truck to each squad at no cost.
. i platoon is smaller than the standard German
platoon bs Tout ten men. More importantly, unlike
el the German .Arm} tl entire Schiitzen Bataillon is
OOnUXUUldcr is provided with .1 light Kf z 1 5 field
Ji G;,	, or squad, is tran :rted in kt.- 70
.vith another lor the light mortar team, litis degree
.  th>n -.ilkгл - the newer P.i . r dtvisioiis to - pup
T ' .bin < и u irh rwо machine-guns pt r Gru,<pe tn-1 <d of
.e like norm7. infantry.
’All
Company Command
SMG team
«М ’All
Motorcycle
and sidecar
2iC Command
SMG team
Motorcycle
and sidecar
L COMPANY HCfl
SCHUTZENKOMPANIE HQ i
’All
Command
Rifle/MG team
LEUTNANT
L LEUTNANT ।
Light mortar
team
Kfz 70 truck
L HQ SECTION]

Lunteroffizier!
L UNTEROFFIZIER
Rifle/MG team Kfz 70 truck
nim
Rifle/MG team
Rifle/MG team Kfz 70 truck
nim
Rifle/MG team
L SCHUTZEN SQUAD
L SCHUTZEN SQUAD
Lunteroffizier!

Rifle/MG team Kfz 70 truck Rifle/MG team
SCHUTZEN SQUAD !
SCHUTZEN PLATOON
WEAPONS PLATOONS
SCHUTZEN MACHINE-GUN PLATOON -
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
LEUTNANT 1
. LEUTNANT
2 Machine-gun Sections
I Machine-gun Section
135 points
75 points
-m
Command SMG team
Option
• Add Kfz 15 field car and Kfz 70 trucks for +5 points
for the platoon.
. HQ SECTION I
. UNTEROFFIZIER 1
i. UNTEROFFIZIER 1
Schiitzen Machine-gun Platoons may make Combat
Attachments to Schiitzen Platoons.
MG34 HMG
MG34 HMG
The Panzer divisions arc all unique in their composition and
equipment. Most Schiitzen battalions have twelve sMG34
heavy machine-guns, but they differed wildly in how they
were allocated.
MG34 HMG
MG34HMG
MACHINE-GUN 1
SECTION I
I MACHINE-GUN I
L SECTION I
. SCHUTZEN MACHINE-GUN PLATOON
SCHUTZEN MORTAR PLATOON
Platoon
LEUTNANT
HQ Section with:
I LEUTNANT
3 Mortar Sections
2 Mortar Sections
180 points
125 points
Option
• Add Kfz 15 field car and Kfz 70 trucks for +5 points
for the platoon.
Command
SMG team
. UNTEROFFIZIER
Observer
Rifle team
SECTION
Motorcycle
and sidecar
UNTEROFFIZIER
8cm GW34
mortar
8cm GW34
mortar
MORTAR SECTION 3
8cm GW34
mortar
8cm GW34
mortar
8cm GW34
mortar
MORTAR SECTION
FlINTEROFFIZIER'
8cm GW34
mortar
I. MORTAR SECTION
SCHUTZEN MORTAR PLATOON
Most Schiitzen battalions have a weak machine-gun platoon
in each company and a further company of two machine-
gun platoons and a batter}’ of six 8cm sGW34 schivere
Granatwerjer heavy mortars. However, some Panzer divisions
have a full machine-gun platoon in each Schiitzenkompanie.
These divisions place their mortar platoon in the battalion’s
heavy company instead.
Regardless of where in the battalion the mortars are found,
their role is the same—they give the Schiitzen heavy firepower
at their beck and call. When the infantrv run into machine-
guns, the mortars pin them down or blind them with sniol e
the infantry assaults.
schutzen Anti-tank Gun platoon

Platoon
LEUTNANT 1
Q Section with:
3 З.’ст PaK36
’ 3 "cm PaK36
110 points
75 points
Option
 \dd motorcycle and sidecar and Kfz 70 trucks to the
. latoon for +5 points.
ten battalion has a Scbwere Kompanie, or heavy
. w ith anti-tank, infantry gun, and pioneer platoons,
-tank platoon consists of three light-weight and
. .'em PaK36 guns towed by Kfz 70 light trucks.
-reparing for a counterattack, the anti-tank platoon
to the area most vulnerable to tank attack. As
onlv effective against the heavily-armoured French
. Sort ranges, the guns are positioned to protect the
rher than to engage the tanks at long range.
Schutzen Infantry Gun platoon
;.atoon
section with:
2 7.5cmlelG18	I 65 points
Cation
• d Kfz 15 field car and Kfz 70 trucks for +5 points
the platoon.
nrv gun platoon of the Scbwere Kompanie is
with two 7.5cm leIG18 light infantry guns. These
able guns provide both direct fire and light artillery
j a Schiitzenkompanie. Fite guns are quite mobile
:n pushed forward in attacks by their crews. When
whine-gun nests open fire, the infantry guns’ task
. we them and get the attack moving again.
L LEUTNANT '
[ HQ SECTION 1
Command
SMG team
LSCH UTZEN ANTI-TANK GUN PLATOON
77
RECONNAISSANCE
INFANTRY
RECONNAISSANCE
atdi
KraftcMttnn Putoer
ANTI-TANK
ARMOUR
Heavy АлО-лйсгаП
[ Gun Platoon
ARTILLERY
ARMOUR
ARTILLERY
ANTI TANK
INFANTRY
_________ARMOURED RIFLE COMPANY_______
ARTILLERY
ANTI-TANK
АгФ-lank Gun Platoon
INFANTRY
DIVISIONAL SUPPORT PLATOONS
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
MACHINE-GUNS
HEADQUARTERS
C^pWHO g
...................
(MECHANISED COMPANY)
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
A Panzerschutzenkompanie can have Luftwaffe platoons (marked ) as support options.
Remember that Luftwaffe platoons retain their own ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see
page 183 of the rulebook).


Motor i«ed light
*rtl!ier> Bittery
German^
n
VETERAN
s
HEADQUARTERS
—I
Nl
Motivation and Skill
While 1. Panzerdivision had two battalions of Panzerschutzen (pronounced pant-
sere shyoot-sen) in France, the other divisions had to make do with a single company.
.4 Panzerschiitzenkompanic is rated as Confident Veteran.
RELUCTANT | CONSCRIPT
CONFIDENT [ TRAINED"*
Panzerschutzen Platoon
Platoon
HQ Section with:
HAUPTMANN
FhauptmannT
L HQ SECTION
L UNTEROFFIZIER^
L SCHUTZEN SQUAD
L UNTEROFFIZIER"
SCHUTZEN SQUAD
L PANZERSCHUTZEN PLATOON
3 Schiitzen Squads
2 Schiitzen Squads
245 points
185 points
AA
Light mortar
team
ши-тн
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
Command
Rifle/MG team
LEUTNANT
рНЛКАяП
Company HQ
Headquarters
Company HQ
60 points
Option
• Add Machine-gun Section for +80 points.
Sd Kfz 25111 halftrack in the Company HQ of a
.zerschiitzenkompanie may use the Mounted Assault
'a! ride on page 111.
ugh a small number of Sd Kfz 251 armoured half-
. . were used as command vehicles during the Invasion of
1, it wasn’t until the campaign in France that they were
carry infantry into battle. Tire Panzer divisions of ten
cd cross-country to avoid defended towns and toads
Jed with refugees. Infantry mounted in armoured half-
could keep up with the Panzer spearhead and quickly
ise on the Panzer's successes protected by armour as
, that of a Panzer I light tank.
COMBAT PLATOONS
Options
•	Replace Command Rifle/MG team with a Command
SMG team at no cost.
•	Replace all Rifle/MG teams with MG teams for
+ 10 points per Schiitzen Squad.
•	Add Anti-tank Rifle team for +20 points.
luzerschiitzen platoon is mounted in half-tracked
re Gepanzerte Mannschaftskraftwagen (Sd Kfz 251)
A medium armoured personnel carriers. While the
z. rwhiltzen of 1., 2. and 10. Panzerdivision are still only
; ped with a single MG 34 per squad, their Sd Kfz 251
-track mounts an additional MG34 machine gun to give
covering fire once they dismount. The other Panzer
i. ns have nearly twice the firepower, with two MG34
line-guns per squad in addition to the one mounted on
• h If-track.
Company
Command
SMG team
2iC Command
SMG team
Sd Kfz 251/1
half-track
Motorcycle
and sidecar
L COMPANY HQ]
PANZERSCHUTZENKOMPANIE HQ
The first batch were issued to the two Schiitzen battalions
of 1. Schiitzenregiment of 1. Panzerdivision in late 1939.
This was quickly completed and by the time the campaign
in France began in May 1940, every Panzer division had
been issued enough half-tracks to mount at least one
Panzerschutzen, or armoured rifle, company.
Sd Kfz 251/1
half-track
L UNTEROFFIZIER 1
Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track
L SCHUTZEN SQUAD
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track
Panzerschutzen Platoons may use the Mounted Assault
special rule on page 111.
79


COMBAT PLATOONS M HEADQUARTERS
Ql
(MECHANISED COMPANY)
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
МоСлтКаЮ Heavy Arfthory Battery
AIRCRAFT
toured cars
§
3
HEADQUARTERS
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
Any platoons with variants must be Motorisiert (marked Щ). Your company can also be sup-
ported by unmarked platoons.
A Kradschutzenkompanie can have Luftwaffe platoons (marked 'v') as support options.
Remember that Luftwaffe platoons retain their own ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see
page 183 ol the rulebook).
RECONNAISSANCE
ARTILLERY
ANTI-TANK
MACHINE-GUNS
ANTI-TANK

ARTILLERY
Air Support
MOTORISIERT
VETERAN
HEADQUARTERS
f RELUCTANT CONSCRIPT
* CONFIDENT | TRAINED
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
In every German advance you’llfinda Kradschiitzenkompanie (pronouncedkrabt shyoot-
sen koni-pan-ce), or motorcycle rifle company, in the lead. With eager and well-trained
troops, a Kradschiitzenkompanie is rated as Confident Veteran.
COMPANY HQ
learns in a Kradschiitzenkompanie HQ use the Blitzkrieg
Motorcycle Reconnaissance rules on page 13 and are Recce
к -earns white mounted.
COMBAT PLATOONS
KRADSCHUTZEN PLATOON
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
3 Schiitzen Squads
2 Schutzen Squads
romsitirr
255 points
190 points
Options
Replace Command Motorcycle Rifle/MG team with
a Command Motorcycle SMG team at no cost.
Replace all Motorcycle Rifle/MG teams with Motor-
cycle MG teams for +5 points per team.
Add Motorcycle Anti-tank Rifle team for +20 points.
sradscbiitzen Platoons use the Blitzkrieg Motorcycle
Reconnaissance rules on page 13 and are Reconnaissance
‘latoons while mounted.
I LEUTNANT 1
^ЦТНАНП
Lunteroffizier 1
Command Motorcycle
Rifle/MG team
Motorcycle
Light Mortar
team
L HQ SECTION,
Lunteroffizier 1
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
. SCHUTZEN SQUAD
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
L SCHUTZEN SQUAD
Lunteroffizier^
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
L SCHUTZEN SQUAD
KRADSCHUTZEN PLATOON |
Kradschiitzenkompanie

81
RADSCHUTZEN MACHINE-GUN PLATOON -*=
*
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
L HQ SECTION,
Lunteroffizier^
lUNTEROFFIZIERl
lKRADSCHUTZEN machine gun platoon
Kradschiitzen Machine-gun Platoons use the Motorcycle
Reconnaissance rules on page 13 and are Reconnaissance
Platoons while mounted.
2 Machine-gun Sections
1 Machine-gun Section
MACHINE-GUN 1
SECTION
MACHINE-GUN 1
SECTION I
205 points
120 points
Command Motorcycle
SMG team
A A
Motorcycle HMG team
Motorcycle HMG team
Motorcycle HMG team
Motorcycle HMG team
LEUTNANT 1
^UTNAN^
Platoon
HQ Section with:
Light Panzerspah Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
WEAPONS PLATOONS
L LIGHT PANZERSPAH PATROL
L LEUTNANT 1
▲ Motorcycle
Light Mortar team
▲ Motorcycle
Anti-tank Rifle team
6 Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
3 Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
200 points
100 points
Command Sd Kfz 221 (MG) Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
Command Sd Kfz 221 (MG) Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
▲ Command Motorcycle	Command Motorcycle
Rifle/MG or MG team	SMG team
Command, Anti-tank Rifle, and Light Mortar Motorcycle teams are mounted on a medium base.
Other motorcycle teams are based on large bases. See page 13 for details.
LEUTNANT
UTUTNAN^
^JG^WANZERSPA^^O^ ’
lLIGHT PANZERSPAH PLATOON
Kradschiitzen battalions have a machine-gun company of two
platoons of four sMG34 heavy machine guns on sustained
fire mounts and a mortar platoon. While mounted, these
machine-gunners operate much like a regular Kradschiitzen
platoon, when they dismount and set up their machine-guns
they can support the Kradschiitzen with serious firepower.
Motorcycle HMG teatn
Motorcycle Rifle/MG or MG team
Light Panzerspah platoon

Light Panzerspah Patrols operate as separate platoons,
each with their own command team. Although its patrols
operate as separate platoons for all other purposes, a Light
Panzerspah Platoon deploys all of its patrols at the same
time as a single platoon. For example, this means that
you treat the entire Light Panzerspah Platoon as a single
platoon when calculating the number of platoons held in
Ambush or Reserve.

82
German
MIXED PANZERSPAH PLATOON
PLATOON
4 Sd Kfz 222 (2cm) and
4 Sd Kb 221 (MG)
.3 Sd Kfz 222 (2cm) and
5 Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
2 Sd Kfz 222 (2cm) and
2 Sd Kb 221 (MG)
1 Sd Kfz 222 (2cm) and
1 Sd Kb 221 (MG)
Я MOTOttlSIERT
500 points
225 points
150 points
75 points
L LEUTNANT ।
LEUTNANT
Command Sd Kfz 222 (2cm)
Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
I MIXED PANZERSPAH
L PATROL
LUNTEROFFIZIER)
Command Sd Kfz 222 (2cm)
Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
MIXED PANZERSPAH 1
PATROL
LUNTEROFFIZIER)
L UNTEROFFIZIER^
Mixed Panzerspiih Patrols operate as separate platoons,
, •/> with their own command team. Although its patrols
iterate as separate platoons for all other purposes, a Mixed
inzerspiih Platoon deploys all of its patrols at the same
-:"ie as a single platoon. For example, this means that
• treat the entire Mixed Panzerspdh Platoon as a single
:.' toon when calculating the number of platoons held in
. abash or Reserve.
Command Sd Kfz 222 (2cm)
Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
I MIXED PANZERSPAH
L PATROL
Command Sd Kfz 222 (2cm)
Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
MIXED PANZERSPAH 1
PATROL
MIXED PANZERSPAH PLATOON
. lixed Panzerspiih Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
The mixed platoon backed up the light, machine-gun-armed
Sd Kfz 221 with the Sd Kfz 222 armed with a 2cm KwK38
cannon and a co-axial MG34 machine-gun.
HEAVY PANZERSPAH PLATOON-----+
PLATOON
6 Sd Kb 231 (6-rad)
4 Sd Kb 231 (6-rad)
2 Sd Kb 231 (6-rad)
fZJ MOTOttlSIERT
250 points
165 points
80 points
LEUTNANT)
LEUTNANT
Command Sd Kfz 231
Sd Kfz 231
6 Sd Kb 231 (8-rad)
4 Sd Kfz 231 (8-rad)
2 Sd Kfz 251 (8-rad)
285 points
190 points
95 points
HEAVY PANZERSPAH PATROL
UNTEROFFIZIER
Command Sd Kfz 231
Sd Kfz 231
•ivy Panzerspiih Patrols operate as separate platoons,
h with their own command team. Although its patrols
eate as separate platoons for all other purposes, a Heavy
zerspah Platoon deploys all of its patrols at the same
.e as a single platoon. For example, this means that
. treat the entire Heavy Panzerspdh Platoon as a single
•toon when calculating the number of platoons held in
, bush or Reserve.
HEAVY PANZERSPAH PATROL
UNTEROFFIZIER
Command Sd Kfz 231
Sd Kfz 231
HEAVY PANZERSPAH PATROL
HEAVY PANZERSPAH PLATOON
у Panzerspiih Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
Sonderkrafifahrzeug (Sd Kfz), or special purpose vehicle,
numbers indicate the role of a vehicle rather than its specific
ivpe. The first Sd Kfz 231 was the 6-rad, or six-wheeled,
version, followed by an eight-wheeled 8-rad model.
RECONNA SSANCE
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
RECONNAISSANCE
RECONNAISSANCE
Wehrmacht & Luftwaffe allies
box shaded grey.
Any platoons with variants must be SS (marked ). Your company can also be supported by
unmarked platoons.
Heavy SS-
Panzerspah Platoon
SS MOTORCYCLE RIFLE COMPANY
HEADQUARTERS
Company НО
SS-Kradschiitzen ryi
rldioon	V
INFANTRY
SS-Kradschiitzen ns
Platoon	Ж
INFANTRY
SS-Kradschiitzen rn
Platoon
MACHINEGUNS
SS-Kradschutan R]
Machine gun Platoon
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
Light SS-	m
Panzerspah Platoon
Mixed SS- И]
Panzerspah Platoon
SS Panzer Platoon Щ
SS-Panzer Platoon
INFANTRY
Pionier Platoon

ANTI-TANK
ARTILLERY
ARTILLERY
Heavy Artillery Battery
ANTIAIRCRAFT
Infanlerle Anti-tank Gun Ri Wfe
Platoon	Ж
Light Artillery Battery
®Ж
®1
SS-Antt-aircratt Gun Platoon
Light Anti-aircraft Gun
Platoon	Ж
The Wfffrn-SS if was still expanding rapidly in 19.39 and 1940
and did not yet include many Supporting weapons. These were
all provided by the regular army.
55 companies can bare unmarked support platoons from the army,
and support platoons from the Luftwaffe (marked " ). These
platoons retain their own ratings, counting as Allied Platoons (see
page 183 of the rulebook).
ANT
HEADQUARTERS
COMPANY HQi
SS-KRADSCHUTZENSTURM HQ |
Company Command
Motorcycle SMG team
2iC Command
Motorcycle SMG team
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
the SS-Standarten 'Standards' or regiments) and divisions were well supplied with fast-
moving motorcycle troops. These daredevils considered themselves an elite within an elite. An
SS-Kradscbiitzensturm is rated as Fearless Trained.
COMPANY HQ
Headquarters
SS-Kradschutzen Platoon
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
Motorcycle Rifle/MG team
Company HQ
UNTERSTURMFUHRER
L UNTERSTURMFUHRER 1
Lunterscharfuhrer
1
I
L SCHUTZEN SQUAD'
L HQ SECTION]
Lunterscharfuhrer^
L SCHUTZEN SQUAD
L SCHUTZEN SQUAD
LSS-KRADSCHUTZEN PLATOON
Lunterscharfuhrer
Motorcycle
Light Mortar
team
3 Schutzen Squads
2 Schutzen Squads
Command Motorcycle
Rifle/MG team
iet-KradscbutzcH Platoons use the Motorcycle Reconnaissance
-ides on page 13 and arc Reconnaissance Platoons while
. ninted.
Щ SS
235 points
175 points
SS-Kradschutzensturm
Щ SS
60 points
 i most a revolutionary military forces, the Waffen-SS
i< ted conventional military ranks and formation names,
in her than calling a company Kompanie like the army, they
. ,ILd it a Sturm (Storm, as in to storm or assault a castle) and
ed its leader a Hauptstiirnffiihrer (Senior Storm Leader).
. ' motorcyclists of the Waffen-SS were organised into
- adschiitzensturm (SS Motorcycle Rifle Company, pro-
uni ed css-ess kraht shyoot-sen shtoorrm).
COMBAT PLATOONS

Options
•	Replace Command Motorcycle Rifle/MG team with
a Command Motorcycle SMG team at no cost.
•	Replace all Motorcycle Rifle/MG teams with Motor-
cycle MG teams for +5 points per motorcycle.
•	Add Motorcycle Anti-tank Rifle team for +20 points.

c Waffen-SS fielded three formations in Poland and France.
e most senior and smallest was the regimental-sized LSSAH
arte (LSSAH is an abbreviation for Leibstaudarle SS
f Hitler meaning Adolf Hitler's SS Bodyguard). The next
: senior was the SS-Verjugungsdivision (which roughly
. . dates as SS Division under Hitler's orders, pronounced
. . fer-fyook-oongs di-vis-yon) which would later become
: Das Reich division. This division had originally been the
' ' iops at Hitler’s personal disposition for quelling opposi-
on w ithin Germany. The third and final formation was the
roi ious SS-Totenkopf Division (SS Death’s Head Division,
o; ounced ess-ess tote-en-kopf di-vis-yon) recruited from
incentration camp guards.
CONSCRIPT )
TRAINED
VETERAN J
HAUPTSTURMFUHRER
к HAUPT5TURMFUHRET
[earns in an SS-Kradscbiitzeiistiirin HQ use the Motorcycle
Reconnaissance rules on page 13 and are Recce teams while
mounted.
Both LSSAH And the three Standarten (infantry regiments)
of the 55-1 L/w.bion have a 13th Kradsci cn
company. Additionally, the 55-L • iiigtingsdivision has i
reconnaissance battalion with three Az. (schutzen comp.i
nies and an armoured car company, while the SS-Totenkopf
Division has a smaller reconnaissance battalion with two
Kradschiitzen companies and two tank platoons. I  >t
armoured support LSSAH has to make do with a single
mixed armoured car platoon and an assault gun batt. y.
85
S-KRADSCHUTZEN MACHiNt-GUN PLATOON »
*
PLATOON
SS-Panzer Platoons are not Reconnaissance Platoons.
L HQ SECTION;
Lunterscharfuhrer
Lunterscharfuhrer
WEAPONS PLATOONS
3 Panzer 35 (t)
210 points
Lunterscharfuhrer
L panzer section
2 Machine-gun Sections
1 Machine-gun Section
MACHINE-GUN 1
SECTION
MACHINE-GUN 1
SECTION |
SS-Kradschiitzen Machine-gun Platoons use the Motorcycle
Reconnaissance rules on page 13 and are Reconnaissance
Platoons while mounted.
Command Motorcycle
SMG team
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
«МА
Motorcycle HMG team
Motorcycle HMG team
Motorcycle HMG team
Motorcycle HMG team
UNTERSTURMFUHRER
nJHTERSWRMFUHREM
UNTERSTURMFUHRER^
^JNTERSWRMFUHRER^
Щ SS
180 points
105 points
Each SS-Kradschiitzensturm has a platoon of two (in the case
of LSSAH in France and all SS in Poland) or four (for the
two divisions in France) sMG34 machine guns on sustained
fire mounts. While mounted, these machine-gunners operate
much like a regular SS-Kradschiitzen platoon. However,
when the machine-gunners dismount and set up their heavy
machine-guns, they add significantly to the firepower of the
Kradschiitzen.
SS-PANZER PLATOON
щ ss
The SS-Totenkopf Division (SS Death’s Head Division) was
unusual in having no armoured cars at all. Instead it had two
pl. oons of Czech-built Panzer 35(c) tanks in its reconnais-
sance battalion. This is less surprising when you realise that
th: division had mainly Czech artillery and that many of its
m ichine-guns were also Czech designs.
LSSKRADSCHUTZEN MACHINEGUN PLATOON I
O Rrnauh
Panzer 35 (t)
Command Panzer 35(t)
L HQ SECTION]
Lunterscharfuhrer
Panzer 35 (t)
L PANZER SECTION 1
SS-PANZER PLATOON
- 2^
German
LIGHT SS-PANZERSPAH PLATOON
. imbush or Reserve.
SS-Kradschutzensturm
MIXED SS-PANZERSPAH PLATOON
Light SS-Panzerspdh Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
'------------,-------------------------------------------’J
Platoon
Щ ss
UNTERSTURMFUHRER 1
4 Sd Kfz 222 (2cm) and
4 Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
3 Sd Kfz 222 (2cm) and
3SdKfz221 (MG)
2 Sd Kfz 222 (2cm) and
2 Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
1 Sd Kfz 222 (2cm) and
1 Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
260 points
195 points
130 points
65 points
L UNTERSTURMFUHRER
Lunterscharfuhrer
Command Sd Kfz 222 (2cm)
Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
MIXED PANZERSPAH
PATROL
Command Sd Kfz 222 (2cm)
Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
MIXED PANZERSPAH
PATROL
Lunterscharfuhrer 1
Lunterscharfuhrer
Mixed SS-Panzerspiih Patrols operate as separate platoons,
’.ch with their own command team. Although its patrols
terate as separate platoons for all other purposes, a Mixed
> S-Panzerspiih Platoon deploys all of its patrols at the same
time as a single platoon. For example, this means that you
treat the entire Mixed SS-Panzerspiih Platoon as a single
' ’toon when calculating the number of platoons held in
ibush or Reserve.
Command Sd Kfz 222 (2cm)
Command Sd Kfz 222 (2cm)

Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
MIXED PANZERSPAH 1
PATROL
Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
MIXED PANZERSPAH
PATROL
MIXED SS-PANZERSPAH PLATOON
Mixed SS-Panzerspiih Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
HEAVY SS-PANZERSPAH PLATOON—*—
PLATOON

6Sd Kfz 231 (8-rad)
4 Sd Kfz 231 (8-rad)
2 Sd Kfz 231 (8-rad)
Ц) SS
240 points
160 points
80 points
UNTERSTURMFUHRER
nJNTLRSWRMFUHREM
Command Sd Kfz 231
L HEAVY PANZERSPAH PATROL
Sd Kfz 231
Heavy SS-Panzerspiih Patrols operate as separate platoons,
each with their own command team. Although its patrols
operate as separate platoons for all other purposes, a Heavy
SS-Panzerspdh Platoon deploys all of its patrols at the same
time as a single platoon. For example, this means that you
treat the entire Heavy SS-Panzerspdh Platoon as a single
platoon when calculating the number of platoons held in
Ambush or Reserve.
Lunterscharfuhrer
Command Sd Kfz 231
Sd Kfz 231
Sd Kfz 231
L HEAVY PANZERSPAH PATROL

Lunterscharfuhrer
Command Sd Kfz 231
Heavy SS-Panzerspdh Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
L HEAVY PANZERSPAH PATROL
HEAVY SS-PANZERSPAH PLATOON
87

HEADQUARTERS
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
ANTI-TANK
ARMOUR
ANTITANK
ANTITANK
ARTILLERY
ANTI AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT
Anti-aircraft
la loon
iKjtit Antl-arcralt
Gun Platoon
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
A Leichte Pionierkompanie can have Luftwaffe platoons (marked *=*<•') as support options.
Remember that Luftwaffe platoons retain their own ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see
page 183 of the rulebook).



German n
Kfz 15 field car
Kfz 15 field car
Kfz 70 truck
Kfz 70 truck
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer
Rifle team
HAUPTMANN 1
LEUTNANT
к LEUTNANT
i UNTEROFFIZIER
L PIONIER SQUAD
^CONFIDENT- TRAINED
Company HQ
Headquarters
Kfz 15 field car
Kfz 70 truck
Motorcycle
and sidecar
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer
Rifle team
Command Pioneer
Rifle team
Leichte Pionier Platoon* -
Platoon
HQ Section with:
HEADQUARTERS
i HAUPTMANN
ШМИДI PI
i COMPANY HQ
LEICHTE PIONIERKOMPANIE HQ I
I HQ SECTION
к UNTEROFFIZIER i
i. PIONIER SQUAD ’
i. UNTEROFFIZIER
L PIONIER SQUAD 1
220 points
155 points
3 Pionier Squads
2 Pionier Squads
45 points
Company HQ
Leichte Pionierkompanie
OTIVATION AND SKILL
izer and motorised divisions relied on their pioneers to cross rivers and other obstacles
heir path. The Pioneers didn't let them down. A Leichte Pionierkompanie (pronounced
ht-er pi-o-neerr korn-pan-ee) is rated as Confident Veteran.
Option
•	Replace Company Command SMG team and
motorcycle and sidecar with Company Command
Panzer I tank for +15 points.
Options
•	Replace Command Pioneer Rifle team with a
Command Pioneer SMG team for + 5 points.
•	Add second Kfz 70 truck to each squad at no cost.
•	Add Pioneer Supply truck for +25 points.
Panzer divisio is need highly mobile pioneers so that
e is no delay when they reach a river or ocher obstacle.
- motorised Let bte Pionierkompanie follows behind the
ling echelons, ready to get to work on any engineering
1ИП.
Leichte Pioniere л\ . organic .I like the normal pioneers,
pt that each squad has • । u. ।. carry the pioneers and
tools, as well as a field cai <n i intorcyde for the squad
ler so th и the) . .in mot: -щк ly around the v -.rl; site,
pl noon also has an extra supply truck carrying ad-
ш ш
Company Command Motorcycle 2iC Command Motorcycle
SMG team and sidecar SMG team and sidecar
Gepanzerte pionier platoon
*
Platoon
LEUTNANTi
HQ Section with:
L LEUTNANT 1
3 Pionier Squads
2 Pionier Squads
280 points
195 points
Options
•	Replace Command Pioneer Rifle team with a
Command Pioneer SMG team for +5 points.
•	Replace all Sd Kfz 251 (Unarmoured) half-tracks
with armoured Sd Kfz 251 half-tracks for + 15 points
per Pionier Squad.
•	Add Pioneer Supply truck for +25 points.
Command Pioneer
Rifle team
L HQ SECTION,
L UNTEROFFIZIER
L UNTEROFFIZIER
The HQ Section rides in one of the squad half-tracks.
Gepanzerte Pionier Platoons equipped with armoured
halftracks may use the Mounted Assault special rule on
page 111.
In early 1940, when the Panzer divisions formed their
Pdiittrschiitzenkompanien, they were also ordered to form
a Gepanzerte Pionierzug, Armoured Pioneer Platoon, for
tl <ir light pioneer battalion. Of the 537 Sd Kfz 251 half-
tracks built in 1939, 232 were built with mild steel instead
of armour plate. As the Panzerschutzen took up most of
the armoured chassis, some pioneer battalions received the
un irmoured version instead. While this didn’t give them any
additional protection over their old Kfz 70 trucks, it did give
them much more cross-country mobility.
Pioneer
Rifle team
TrtHT
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer
Rifle team
Sd Kfz 251/1
(unarmoured)
half-track
Sd Kfz 251/1
(unarmoured)
half-track
PIONIER SQUAD 1
Pioneer
Rifle team
aMM
Pioneer
Rifle team
-aMM
Pioneer
Rifle team
Sd Kfz 251/1
(unarmoured)
half-track
Sd Kfz 251/1
(unarmoured)
half-track
PIONIER SQUAD
L UNTEROFFIZIER
aMM aAW /aAW
Pioneer
Rifle team
Sd Kfz 251/1 (unarmoured)
half-track
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer
Rifle team
Sd Kfz 251/1 (unarmoured)
half-track
L PIONIER SQUAD
.GEPANZERTE PIONIER PLATOON
German Armoured Half-tracks
The need for an armoured personnel carrier to accompany
the tanks of the Panzer divisions was well recognised, and
in 1935 the idea of a half-tracked carrier based on the range
of standard half-tracks being developed was put forward.
Design work for the Sd Kfz 251 Mittlere Gepanzerte
Mannschaftskraftwagen (Medium Armoured Personnel
Vehicle) began in 1937 and production began in 1939.
The initial production run of 232 half-tracks was built with
mild steel instead of armour plate. Once the armoured plate
became available, production switched to the standard
version. 305 armoured Sd Kfz 251 half-tracks were built in
1939, followed by another several hundred in the first half
of 1940. These gave each Panzer division enough to mount
a company of infantry and a platoon of pioneers.
Weight:	7.81		Sd Kfz 251 AuzfA 5.80m (19’0.3")			Engine:	Оке Ma.yba.ck HL42
Length:	5.80м (19’)	j Width:	2.10 м (6' 1 Г)	£ Height:	1.75 м. (5 ’ 9 ”) Crew:	12 (мейиклмд pa&engers) Агмяиг”	6-14.5 мм (0.24”-0.57')	|				—	6-cylinder pdrd engine 100 bp (74.6 kW) Power/Weight:	12.8 kp/tonne Suspension:	Halt-track Operational range:	300км (186 Miles) Speed:	53 км/h (33 мркг)
Drawing Scale 1:106		Sd Kfz 251/1 Ausf A PIok			
Sd. Kfz 251 Ausf A. Frmt EUva.ti<m.
Sd Kfz 251 Ausf A Leftside Elevation
Sd Kfz 251 Ausf A Bazk EUvatim.
German
struction Platoon
Platoon
5 Panzer 1	190 points
4 Panzer 1	150 points
3 Panzer 1	110 points
OPTION
• Equip any or all Panzer I tanks with Demolition
Charges for +10 points for the platoon.
„ante each Panzer I tank with a Demolition
nay place their demolition charge against an
Bunker or Barbed Wire Obstacle instead о/
roll of 4+, a Bunker is Destroyed and a Barbed
< Obstacle is removed as if a Fully-tracked tank had
' it.
. ise a Bunker is Pinned Down and an Obstacle
intact.
...... ion of 2. Panzerdivision experimented with
J.molition charge carriers late in 1939. By the
. '.car their Abwurfvorrichtung (dropping device)
m a Panzer I light tank had demonstrated its capa-
i '.c general in charge of pioneers and fortifications
t every Panzer division should have ten of them
.  paign in France.
LEUTNANT 1
Seutnan^
Command Panzer I
L HQ SECTION
Lunteroffizier?
Lunteroffizier
Panzer I Panzer I
Panzer I Panzer I
L PANZER SECTION ?
L PANZER SECTION
DESTRUCTION PLATOON
On 6 March 1940, just two months before the start of the
campaign, the Panzer divisions were ordered to organise
two pioneer platoons with the new equipment. Each
Zerstdrungszug, or Destruction Platoon (pronounced tserr-
shter-roongs tsook), had five Panzer I tanks equipped with
t h e A b wu rfvo rrichtu ng.
This device carried a 110 lb. (50kg) charge in an armoured
box suspended on an arm behind the tank. When the tank
reached the obstacle, it backed into position, opened the
box and dropped the charge into place.
ЖаМетШфШ
Infantry Company
(Infantry Company)
WEAPONS PLATOONS 	COMBAT PLATOONS	HEADQUARTERS
HEADQUARTERS
AH
MACHINE-GUNS
INFANTRY
AtU
Divisional support platoons
armour
3
о
INFANTRY
ANTI TANK
*****
Wehrmacht & Luftwaffe Allies
£
SS-Kradschutzen
Platoon
ANTI TANK
*****
ARTILLERY
*****
INFANTRY
RECONNAISSANCE
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
Your Company HQ must be either Heer (marked Z). Motorisiert (marked R) or SS (marked Ц}).
All other platoons with variants must be of the same type as your Company HQ.
An Intanteriekompame can have unmarked platoons and Luftwaffe platoons (marked )
as support options. Remember that Luftwaffe platoons retain their own ratings, and count as
Allied Platoons (see page 183 of the rulebook).
INFANTRY
AtU
INFANTRY
AtU

reconnaissance
•7я***
MACHINE-GUNS

ARTILLERY
atU

SSPanzer Platoon



ARTILLERY
ARTILLERY
ANTI-AIRCRAFT

SSMm-air craft
Gun Platoon
t Gun Piatoon
92

тг?7Т
TRAINED
CONFIDENT
4=
*
Infanteriekompanie can have either Old Infanterie
oons or New Infanterie Platoons, but not both.
COMPANY HQ
Old Infanterie Platoon
Platoon
MOTORISIERT
VETERAN
FEARLESS
HEADQUARTERS
L COMPANY HQ 1
INFANTERIEKOMPANIE HQ I
COMBAT PLATOONS
Lunteroffizier^
2IC Command
SMG team
Option
ff Add 3-ton trucks for +5 points for the platoon.
Option
Add motorcycles and sidecars for Company HQ
for +5 points for the platoon.
A.H
Company Command
SMG team
Infanteriekompanie

Motivation and skill
Germany has a handful of Motorisiert (Motorised) infantry divisions and SS infantry divisions in addition to the mass offoot-
'gging Heer (Army) infantry divisions. Ihe ratings of an Infanteriekompanie (pronounced in-fan-ter-ree korn-pan-ee) vary
pending on type. A Heer Infanteriekompanie (marked ) is rated as Confident Trained. A Motorised Infanteriekompanie
larked ) is rated as Confident Veteran. An SS Infanteriekompanie (marked ff) is rated as Fearless Trained.
HEADQUARTERS		РЦ MOTORISIERT	Щ SS
Company HQ	30 points	40 points	35 points
HAUPTMANN 1
^dAUPTMAN^
	X Heer	MOTORISIERT	SS
' Infanterie Squads	145 points	190 points	175 points
2 Infanterie Squads	105 points	140 points	125 points
Add Anti-tank Rifle team	+ 15 points	+20 points	+20 points
1 LEUTNANTl
ПнлнанЯ
-AH
Command Rifle team
Light Mortar
team
L hq section]
UNTEROFFIZIERl
-AW nW*
Rifle team Rifle team
nW
Rifle team
infanterie squad 1
-AW nW*
Rifle team Rifle team
nW
Rifle team
INFANTERIE SQUAD 1
Lunteroffizier 1
*W nW*
Rifle team Rifle team
nW
Rifle team
infanterie squad i
L OLD INFANTERIE PLATOON 1
93
PLATOON
HQ Section with:	X HEER	pl MOTOR IS IERT	ffiss
4 Infanterie Squads	170 points	220 points	200 points
3 Infanterie Squads	135 points	175 points	160 points
2 Infanterie Squads	100 points	130 points	120 points
Add Anti-tank Rifle team	♦ 15 points	♦ 20 points	*20 points
LEUTNANT ?
^TUTNAN^
Options
• Replace Command Rifle/MG team with a
Command SMG team at no cost.
During the Polish Campaign, the old infantry organisation
proved to be too cumbersome to operate effectively. A new
organisation was created in which each infantry platoon was
rearranged into four Gruppen, with each Gruppe reduced to
ten men. With an extra squad in each platoon, their firepower
increased as there were now four MG34 light machine-guns
for wer riflemen. As stocks became available, many non-
commissioned officers began to be armed with the MP40
m.iJiine pistol, further increasing the platoon’s firepower.
It is unclear whether all divisions had changed to the new
organisation in time for the Battle of France, but as many
divisions were short on men, they adopted the new organisa-
ti<>n with just three Gruppen, essentially the old organisation
with fewer men.
Command
Rifle/MG team
AM,
Light Mortar
team
L HQ SECTION]
L UNTEROFFIZIER?
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
INFANTERIE SQUAD?
L UNTEROFFIZIER?
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
L UNTEROFFIZIER?
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
INFANTERIE SQUAD 1
L UNTEROFFIZIER?
Rifle/MG team Rifle/MG team
Infantry platoons in the motorised divisions had trucks to
carry each squad with the HQ section squeezing into the
trucks wherever space was available. Tire trucks delivered
them to the battlefield fresh and ready to fight, unlike the
poor foot-slogging infantry who marched up to 30km
(20 miles) each day.
LINFANTERIE SQUAD?
INFANTERIE SQUAD?
L NEW INFANTERIE PLATOON
—Germany’s Mechanised Elite and the Horse-drawn Masses
Despite the image of Blitzkrieg and its mechanised armies,
the vast majority of German divisions were still horse-
drawn, just like they had been in the First World War. In
the Battle for France, Germany fielded ten Panzer divi-
sions, four and a half motorised divisions, two and a half
motorised SS divisions, and 73 infantry divisions.
Tlie Panzer and motorised divisions were the elite of the
German Army. Every element of these divisions was mo-
torised. They were the first to receive new equipment, were
given fit, young recruits, and were well trained. When
the Panzer Divisions were reinforced with a second rifle
regiment, they were given experienced units from the best
infantry divisions.
The infantry divisions by comparison, suffered from a
shortage of equipment and were often made up of reserv-
ists recalled to the colours and older men. Worse, they
suffered a constant drain of experienced soldiers as whole
companies and battalions were drawn off to form the
cadre of newly-forming divisions. The replacements they
received for these were of steadily deteriorating quality.
While a motorised infantry division had 2696 cars and
trucks for its two regiments, an infantry division had just
919 cars and trucks for its three regiments. The transport
deficit was made up with 4842 horses. Despite these
handicaps, the German infantry divisions fought well in
both Poland and France, aided no doubt by the fact that
the majority of French and Polish formations were no
better off.
The Waffen-SS was a distinct force from the army, although
it was under army control for operations. It was intended
to give the Nazi regime a politically-reliable military force
to counterbalance the ‘conservative nature’ of the bulk of
army officers.
As a result of being an all-volunteer force given constant
political indoctrination, the morale of SS combat troops
was excellent. On the other hand, when their determina-
tion to succeed was combined with a lack of experienced
officers, it lead to high casualty rates in some of their early
operations.
German
Infanterie Machine-gun Platoon ——*
Platoon
Infanterie Mortar Platoon
Platoon
HQ Section with:
2 Machine-gun Sections
95 points
135 points
3 Mortar Sections
, rnterie Machine-gun Platoons may make Combat
chments to [nfanterie Platoons.
Option
Add 3-ton trucks for +5 points for the platoon.
1
HQ Section with:
WEAPONS PLATOONS

;t fire support for the company is provided by the bar-
n's Macbinegewehr, or Machine-gun Company of three
. ons of four sMG34 heavy machine-guns and a mortar
..on. fire innovative sMG34 was the first true general
ose machine-gun. It is simply an MG34 light machine-
in a sustained-fire tripod incorporating a sprung cradle,
uce the recoil and vibration, making it easier to control
more accurate for continuous fire.
Option
i Add motorcycle and sidecar and 3-ton trucks for
+5 points for the platoon.
. the mortar platoons of the Allied armies have just two
. the German equivalent has six 8cm sGW34 mortars.
. ives the commander of a German infantry battalion
and flexible local artillery support in a way that the
^ап not match.
agh the mortars are nominally under the direct control
c battalion commander, this firepower is made available
. individual rifle compat . t omm n
Д MOTORISIERT
Щ ss
110 points
LEUTNANT 1
Ttutnant4!
'All
Command SMG team
L HQ SECTION]
L UNTEROFFIZIER^

ЛАА1 TfAAl
MG34HMG MG34HMG
Lunteroffizier 1
лАА1 лАА1
MG34HMG MG34HMG
MACHINE-GUN 1
SECTION
MACHINE-GUN
SECTION
infanterie machine-gun platoon I
X heir	Д MOTORISIERT	(5 ss
140 points	180 points	155 points
95 point»	125 points	110 points
 LEUTNANT
UTCHNANm
Lunteroffizier
Command
SMG team
^ЛА
8cm GW34 8cm GW34
mortar mortar
*A
Observer
Rifle team
L HQ section ]
Lunteroffizier 1
/^ЛА ^ЛА
8cm GW34 8cm GW34
mortar mortar
L MORTAR SECTION
Lunteroffizier
/^ЛА ^ЛА
8cm GW34 8cm GW34
mortar mortar

. MORTAR SECTION ]
L MORTAR SECTION
INFANTERIE MORTAR PLATOON
L HQ SECTION;
AH.
Command Rifle team
Option
• Replace all Rifle teams with Motorcycle Rifle/MG
teams for +50 points.
LEUTNANT ?
ututnantH
SUPPORT PLATOONS
INFANTERIE SCOUT PLATOON
PLATOON
	X Heer	k - j	MOTORISIERT	Щ SS
2 Scout Squads	85 points	110 points		100 points
Infanterie Scout Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons
unless mounted on motorcycles when they use the Blitzkrieg
Motorcycle Reconnaissance rules on page 13.
I lie regimental Spiihtrupp, or scout troop, reconnoitres ahead
l the infantry locating the enemy and detecting ambushes.
Motorised regiments and 55 Standarten mounted their scout
troops on motorcycles for greater mobility.
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
3 3.7cm РаКЗб
2 3.7cm РаКЗб
REGIMENTAL ANTI-TANK GUN PLATOON
Option
• Add motorcycle and sidecar and Kfz 70 trucks to the
platoon for +5 points.
In 1939 the 14 th Company in each infantry regiment was
the Panzerabwehrkompanie, or Armour Defence Company.
In April 1940 this was renamed the Panzerjiigerkompanie,
or Tank-hunter Company. The organisation did not change
i< h the name. In both the company has three platoons each
equipped with three 3.7cm PaK36 anti-tank guns. These
arc motorised to allow a quick response to an impending
armoured breakthrough—even in otherwise horse-drawn
units. The platoons are normally assigned to the infantry
companies in the locations most vulnerable to tank attack.
The 3.7cm РаКЗб is the primary German anti-tank gun at
th ' stage of the war, and it will go on to serve throughout the
ci >n diet. Whilst the РаКЗб struggles to penetrate the armour
o' rhe heavier Allied tanks like the Matilda and the Char B-l
bis, its anti-armour capabilities were very good against the
majority of French and British tanks.
L UNTEROFFIZIER?
L UNTEROFFIZIER?

Rifle team Rifle team
SCOUT SQUAD;
Rifle team Rifle team
SCOUT SQUAD]
INFANTERIE SCOUT PLATOON j
85 points
55 points
110 points
75 points
Щ SS
100 points
70 points
LEUTNANT 1
L LEUTNANT ।
AH
Command
SMG team
L HQ SECTION]
L UNTEROFFIZIER?
3.7cm РаКЗб
ANTI-TANK ?
L GUN SECTION |
L UNTEROFFIZIER?
3.7cm РаКЗб
ANTI-TANK 1
L GUN SECTION |
L UNTEROFFIZIER?
REGIMENTAL ANTI-TANK GUN PLATOON
1 ANTI-TANK
L GUN SECTION
3.7cm РаКЗб
96
German
Light infantry gun platoon
Platoon
HQ Section with:
Heavy Infantry gun Platoon
platoon
HQ Section with:
2 7.5cm lelG 18
50 points
65 points
L HQ SECTION]
L UNTEROFFIZIER?
L UNTEROFFIZIER
2 15cm slG33
Observer
Rifle team
шла
7.5cm leiG18 gun
АН m.
Command
SMG team
ГLEUTNANT1
Г Infanteriekompan
Щ ss
Options
W Add horse-drawn limbers as tractors for +5 points
for the platoon.
 Add 3-ton trucks as tractors and add a Kfz 15 field
The 13" Company in each regiment is the Injanteriegesclriitz-
’ompanie, or Infantry Gun Company. It has three light gun
platoons, each with two 7.5cm lelG 18 light infantry guns,
and a heavy platoon with 15cm guns. The guns are crewed
by the infantry and provide immediate artillery fire for the
eg inent without having to wait for the divisional artillery,
h 7.5cm lelG 18 is a light and useful Rheinmetall design,
tii .ig back to 1927. Like the 3.7cm PaK36, these guns
.. ould remain in service throughout the war.
Options
Add horse-drawn limbers as tractors for +5 points
for the platoon.
" Add Sd Kfz 11 half-tracks as tractors and add a
Kfz 15 field car to HQ Section for +5 points for
the platoon.
.u-y Infantry Gun Platoons may not be deployed in
bush.
. heavy platoon of the Infanteriegeschutzkompanie is
iped with two 15cm slG33 heavy infantry guns. Like
. ~.5cm leIG18, the 15cm sIG33 was designed as an
..'v piece and as a direct fire weapon for knocking out
- , ij-gun nests and bunkers. At 3750 lb. (1700kg), these
 were notable as being the heaviest weapon ever issued
infantry gun by any country.
55 points
7.5cm lelG 18 gun
INFANTRY GUN?
SECTION |
INFANTRY GUN
SECTION
light- infantry gun platoon I
X Heer	k J	MOTOR1SIERT	Щ SS
110 points	145 points		125 points
LEUTNANT
Lltutnant
tH m.
Command
SMG team
Observer
Rifle team
L HQ SECTION]
UNTEROFFIZIER?
L UNTEROFFIZIER
15cm slG33 gun
INFANTRY GUN ?
SECTION |
15cm slG33 gun
INFANTRY GUN
SECTION
l HEAVY INFANTRY GUN PLATOON
Light Artillery Battery-*—
Platoon
HQ Section with:
Staff team
Howitzer
Howitzer
MOTORISIERT
HAUPTMANN 1
L HAUPTMANN)
L HQ SECTION,
L GUN SECTION!
LIGHT ARTILLERY BATTERY
MOTORISIERT
4 8cm FK30(t)
2 8cm FK30(t)
260 points
140 points
275 points
145 points
310 points
165 points
4 10cm leFH30(t)
2 10cm leFH30(c)
360 points
190 points
4 10.5cm lcFIII8
2 10.5cm leFH18
Observer
Rifle team
LEUTNANT
^EUTNAHT^
AH. MhH
Command
SMG team
INFANTERIE PANZERSPAH PLATOON *
PLATOON
3SdKfz221 (MG)
75 points
Infanterie Panzerspah Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
Most foot-slogging infantry divisions had a platoon of three
machine-gun armed Panzerspdhwagen (armoured cars) in the
reconnaissance battalion.
L PANZERSPAH PATROL
INFANTERIE PANZERSPAH PLATOON
Command Sd Kfz 221 (MG) Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
Sd Kfz 221 (MG)
310 points
165 points
Options
Add horse-drawn wagon as transport and horse-
drawn limbers as tractors for +5 points for the
battery.
Add Kfz 15 field car and Kfz 68 radio truck as
transport and Sd Kfz 11 half-tracks as tractors for
+ 5 points for the battery.
Light Artillery Batteries may not be deployed in Ambush.
Each infantry division has an artillery regiment with three
light battalions and a heavy battalion. The light artillery bat-
talions normally have twelve 10.5cm leFH18 howitzers in
three batteries. Although the Germans considered these as
light howitzers, they were considerably larger and threw a
much heavier shell than the 75mm field guns used in French
and Polish light artillery battalions. The SS TotenkopfDivision,
the SS‘Deaths Head’ Division, was equipped with captured
Czech weapons rather chan German guns. It had a battalion
of 8cm FK30(t) field guns and two of 10cm leFH30(t) in
place of the normal 10.5cm leFH18 battalions.
L LEUTNANT 1
Howitzer
Howitzer
. GUN SECTION!
L LEUTNANT
98
Infanterie anti-tank gun Platoon
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
4 3.7cm РаКЗб
3 3.7cm РаКЗб
2 3.7cm РаКЗб
Option
• Add motorcycle and sidecar and Kfz 70 trucks to the
platoon for +5 points.
idle Germans recognised that concentrating their tanks
to Panzer corps was going to leave the rest of their army
•.ving to fend for themselves. As a result, they had more
iti-tank guns in each infantry division than any army
er than the British, and then they backed them up with
mv-level anti-tank battalions as well. An infantry division’s
•erfiigerabteilung, or Tank-hunter Battalion, of three
i'i panics, each equipped with twelve 3.7cm РаКЗб anti-
nI. guns.
J.7cm РаКЗб was a revolutionary concept when it first
i out. It inspired others to build their own anti-tank
. along similar lines, including the Americans, Japanese
I Russians.
HEAVY ARTILLERY BATTERY
Platoon
	f HEER	MOTORISIERT	ss
4 si 0cm K18	450 paints	585 points	•
2 (Item K18	230 points	305 points	
4 15cm sFH 18	370 points	480 points	415 points
2 15cm sFHlS	190 points	250 points	215 points
HAUPTMANN 1
UfAUPTMAN^
Options
Add horse-drawn wagon as transport and horse-
drawn limbers as tractors for +5 points for the
battery.
• Add Kfz 15 field car and Kfz 68 radio truck as
transport and Sd Kfz 7 half-tracks as tractors for
+ 5 points for the battery.
You may not field a Heavy Artillery Battery unless you
are also fielding a Light Artillery Battery.
Heavy Artillery Batteries may not be deployed in Ambush.
l division’s heavy artillery battalion normally has two
tteries of 15cm sFH18 howitzers and one battery of long-
, 1 si0cm KI8 guns mounted on the same carriage.
rse weapons are so heavy that, when horse-drawn, they
e the barrel taken oflf the carriage and towed separately,
a result, some infantry divisions have their heavy artillery
torised to save on the huge number of horses needed.
GERMAN
LEUTNANT 1
L LEUTNANT 1
L HQ SECTION]
L INFANTERIE ANTI-TANK GUN PLATOON |
L HQ SECTION]
L LEUTNANT
115 points
85 points
55 points
14? points
110 points
75 points
3.7cm РаКЗб
3.7cm РаКЗб
Command
SMG team
Command Staff team
SMG team
Howitzer
Howitzer
L GUN SECTION ,
HEAVY ARTILLERY BATTERY
L UNTEROFFIZIER1
LunteroffizierI
I ANTI-TANK
L GUN SECTION
3.7cm РаКЗб
3.7cm РаКЗб
130 points
100 points
70 points
I ANTI-TANK 1
L GUN SECTION |
INFANTER1EKOMPANIE
Observer
Rifle team
L LEUTNANT
Howitzer
Howitzer
„GUN SECTION 1
99


(Infantry company)
The Waffen-SS H was still expanding rapidly in 1939
and 1940 and did not yet include many supporting
weapons. These were all provided by the regular army.
SS companies can have unmarked support platoons
from the army, and support platoons from the Luftwaffe
(marked' . ). These platoons retain their own ratings,
counting as Allied Platoons (see page 183 of the rulebook).
PIONEER COMPANY
HEADQUARTERS
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
SS-Panzer Platoon
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
SS-Kradschiitzen Platoon
INFANTRY
ANTI-TANK
Wehrmacht & Luftwaffe Allies
ANTI-TANK
ARTILLERY
ARTILLERY
ANTI-AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT
100
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded prey.
Your Company HQ must be either Heer (marked Z), Motorisiert (marked R) or SS (marked Ц)).
All other platoons with variants must be of the same type as your Company HQ
A Pionierkompanie can have unmarked platoons and Luftwaffe platoons (marked ) as
support options. Remember that Luftwaffe platoons retain their own ratings, and count as
Allied Platoons (see page 183 of the rulebook).
*
MOTORISIERT
TRAINED
VETERAN
L COMPANY HQ 1
lPIONIERKOMPANIE HQ
CONSCRIPT j
TRAINED J
Ж
Company Command
SMG team
PIONIER PLATOON
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
Lif/I
CONFIDENT
L HQ SECTION '
Lunteroffizier 1
PIONIER SQUAD!
Lunteroffizier 1
PIONIER SQUAD]
PIONIER PLATOON
170 points
120 points
220 points
155 points
3 I’ionier Squads
2 Pionicr Squads
You may replace up to one Pioneer Rifle team per Pionier
>.quad with a Flame-thrower team at the start of the game
•efore deployment.
n First World War, the Germans formed their pioneers
to assault groups equipped with flame-throwers and other
ecialised equipment. They continued these tactics in the
- cond World War where they were called on to lead assaults
J t fortified positions.
oneer work was largely a matter of pick and spade work
ilie German army. As a result they formed largi pioneer
.noons to make sure there were plenty of picks and spades
ring the work.
Options
W Add Pioneer Supply horse-drawn wagon for
+20 points.
Add 3-ton trucks for +5 points for the platoon.
Add Pioneer Supply 3-ton truck for +25 points.
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer
Rifle team
'All
Command Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer Pioneer
Rifle team Rifle team
Pioneer Pioneer
Rifle team Rifle team
ТЕШ! TtfHI
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pioneer
Rifle team
Pionierkompanie
CONFIDENT
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
A Heer Pionierkompanie (marked ) is rated as Confident Trained. A Motorised Pionierkompanie (marked ) is rated
as Confident Veteran. An SS Pionierkompanie (marked H ) is rated as Fearless Trained.
HEADQUARTERS
COMPANY HQ—>
HEADQUARTERS
Company HQ
*
Option
Add motorcycles and sidecars for +5 points for the
.  infantry division has a pioneer battalion for assault
ineering tasks. Each Pionierkompanie (pronounced pi-o-
rr kom-pan-ee) is a self-contained organisation equal I 
4 ;pped for building or assaulting a bunker line.
X Heer		MOTORISIERT	ЦЗ ss
30 points	40 points		35 points
HAUPTMANN 1
QfAUHMAN^
COMBAT PLATOONS
2iC Command
SMG team
Щ SS
215 points
145 points
LEUTNANT
^HJTNAN?1
□jnteroffizier i
Pioneer
Rifle team
L PIONIER SQUAD
101
CONFIDENT
ЯЯй Mpport
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
The Germans always support their Schwerpunkt (focus of effort) with every weapon
available, and ensure that the supporting troops are as well trained as possible. Unless
otherwise stated. Divisional Support Platoons are rated as Confident Veteran.
VETERAN
Air Support
priority Air support
LEUTNANT 1
Ju 87B Stuka
' Establish a Stuka Schwerpunkt for +25 points.
Limited Air support
115 points
Stuka schwerpunkt
Although the British Royal Air Force and France’s Armee
de lAir outnumbered the German Luftwaffe (Air Force),
the Luftwaffe focused its efforts at the breakthrough
points, totally dominating the air above the battle.
If you establish a Stuka Schwerpunkt (see the option for
Priority Air Support above), you roll two dice on the How
Many Aircraft Table and take the best result.
Assault Gun platoon-
platoon
Sd Kfz 253 half-track with:
2 StuG A
495 points
The concept of the Sturmgeschiltz (StuG), or assault gun,
began in 1936 after a request for an armoured vehicle for the
artillery that could provide support for the infantry through
direct fire against machine-gun nests and bunkers.
The first five assault gun batteries (each of six StuG) were
available for the battles in France: 640. Sturmbatterie with
nfanterieregiment Grossdeutschland, 659. Sturmbatterie with
Xlll Armeekorps, 660. Sturmbatterie with 3. Infanteriedivision,
6<> Sturmbatterie operating against the Maginot Line, and
SS-Sturmb.ttterie with SS-Standarte LSSAH.
FLIGHT
The Junkers Ju 87B dive bomber was know by both sides
as the Stuka (an abbreviation for the German word for dive
bomber). The bent wing silhouette of rhe Stuka epitomised
Blitzkrieg warfare, developing a fearsome reputation during
the Polish campaign, which it further enhanced with massed
dive-bombing attacks during the Battle of France.
LEUTNANT 1
ПтиТИАН^
Command Sd Kfz 253
half-track
L HQ SECTION
UNTEROFFIZIER J
L UNTEROFFIZIER
StuG A
ASSAULT GUN 1
SECTION
StuG A
ASSAULT GUN
SECTION
ASSAULT GUN PLATOON
German
Self-propelled Infantry Gun Platoon
Platoon
LEUTNANT
2 15cm slG33 auf Panzer I
135 points
HEAVY INFANTRY GUN
The 15cm slG33 auf Panzer I was an attempt to make the
15cm infantry gun more mobile for attacks on bunkers
and fortified buildings—a need highlighted in the Polish
Campaign. The result was a devastating weapon for the
short-range destruction of guns and fortifications.
Unarmoured targets automatically fad their saves when
hit by the main gun of a 15cm dG33 auf Panzer I self-
propelled infantry gun.
L LEUTNANT 1
Command
15cm siG33 auf Panzer I
L HQ SECTION;
L UNTEROFFIZIER
15cmslG33euf Panzer I
INFANTRY GUN 1
SECTION
SELF-PROPELLED INFANTRY GUN PLATOON j
Self-propelled Infantry Gun Platoons may not be deployed in
Ambush.
Germany fielded six batteries of 15cm slG33 auf Panzer 1
with Panzer divisions in France.
Tank-hunter Platoon
platoon
4 Panzerjager I	335 points
3 Panzerjager 1	250 points
2 Panzerjager 1	165 points
LEUTNANT 1
ULEUTNAN^
Command Panzerjager I
L HQ SECTION]
German High Command recognised rhe need for a special-
ised vehicle capable of engaging enemy heavy tanks with a
weapon of greater penetrating power than the standard 3.7cm
P.1K36. To meet this need, they fitted a Czech 4.7cm anti-
rank gun in a limited traverse mount on a Panzer 1 chassis
with a gun shield to protect the crew. The resulting vehicle
was called the 4.7cm PaK(t) (Sf) auf Panzerkampfivagen I
AusfB, or Panzerjager 1 for short.
521. Panzerjagerabteilung(52\ Tank-hunter Battalion), with
three companies of six tank destroyers each, w as available at
the start of the campaign in France. Three other tank-hunter
battalions, 616., 643., and 670. Panzerjagerabt,dung were
still in training when the invasion began and were sent to the
fighting as soon as their training was complete.
L UNTEROFFIZIER^
Panzeriager I
Panzerjager I
TANK-HUNTER 1
SECTION
L UNTEROFFIZIER ~i
Panzerjager I
Й21Я!ЕЧ21 i
SECTION
L TANK-HUNTER PLATOON



ANTI-TANK GUN PLATOON
Platoon

LEUTNANT 1
HQ Section with:
4 3.7cm PaK36	145 points
3 3.7cm PaK36	110 points
2 3.7cm PaK36	75 points
Command
SMG team
L HQ SECTION;
OPTION
• Add motorcycle and sidecar and Kfz 70 trucks to the
platoon for +5 points.
tier many's experience against ranks in the First World War
led to the development of the world s first dedicated anti-tank
gun, the 3-7cm PaK36. This excellent little weapon equipped
the motorised anti-tank battalions of thc armoured divisions
ami the corps-level anti-tank battalions used to reinforce the
infantry where needed.
L UNTEROFFIZIER
3.7cm PaK36
3.7cm PaK36
ANTI-TANK 1
L GUN SECTION |
3.7cm PaK36
L UNTEROFFIZIER
3.7cm PaK36
ANTI-TANK
L GUN SECTION
ANTI-TANK GUN PLATOON fl
103
motorised Light artillery Battery
platoon
HAUPTMANN 1
L HAUPTMANN^
HQ Section with:
4 10.5cm leFH18	360 points
2 10.5cm lcFH18	190 points
Option
• Add Kfz 15 field car, Kfz 68 radio truck and Sd Kfz
11 half-tracks for +5 points for the platoon.
Command
SMG team
Staff team
L HQ SECTION!
Observer
Rifle team
Motorcycle
and sidecar
Motoriseel Light Artillery Batteries may not be deployed in
Ambush.
I
L LEUTNANT !
L LEUTNANT 1
Some light artillery batteries Intel unarmed and unamioured
Sd Kfz 251 half-tracks instead ofSd Kfz 11 half-tmcks. You
am model your Sei Kfz II half-tracks as Sd Kfz 251 half-
tracks if you wish.
10 ,5cm leFH18
10.5cm leFHlB
Panzer divisions had two battalions, each of twelve 10.5cm
howitzers. while the motorised infantry divisions had
three battalions. These provided the core of their artillery
support.
Although the Germans called these light artillery battalions,
their howitzers are much heavier and more powerful than
most countries’ divisional artillery.
10.5cm leFH18
10.5cm leFHie
LGUN SECTION-!
LGUN SECTION-!
MOTORISED LIGHT ARTILLERY BATTERY
L MOTORISED HEAVY ARTILLERY BATTERY j
Observer
Rifle team
MOTORISED HEAVY ARTILLERY BATTERY
Platoon
HQ Section with:
Chemical Mortar Platoon
*
Platoon
HQ Section with:
HAUPTMANN
L HAUPTMANN!
L HQ SECTION!
L HQ SECTION!
L UNTEROFFIZIER^
L MORTAR SECTION 1
L CHEMICAL MORTAR PLATOON
Motorised Heavy Artillery Batteries may not be deployed in
Ambush.
Observer
Rifle team
Option
• Add motorcycle and sidecar and Kfz 70 trucks to the
platoon for +5 points.
Option
• Add Kfz 15 field car, Kfz 68 radio truck and Sd Kfz 7
half-tracks for +5 points for the platoon.
10.5cm NbW35
mortar
Алхл
10.5cm NbW35
mortar
Staff team
10.5cm NbW35
mortar
10.5cm NbW35
mortar
Command
SMG team
Command
SMG team
LEUTNANT
^LUTNAN^
I
4 si Ocm KI8 2sl0cmK18	585 points 305 points
4 15cm sFH 18	480 points
1 15cm sFH 18	250 points
"Die Panzer divisions gained an additional heavy artillery
battalion for the battle of France. This battalion had eight
of the excellent 15cm sFH 18 heavy howitzer and four of the
lighter long-range siOcm KI8 guns. Tire heavy howitzers
proved their worth time and again as British and French
troops reeled under the impact of their 95 lb. (44kg) shells,
’ll,. KI8 guns (actually of 105mm calibre) proved their
worth in long-range counterbattery fire against enemy artil-
lery, and as an improvised anti-tank weapon against heavy
British and French tanks.
Motorcycle
and sidecar

4 10.5cm NbW35	145 points
2 10.5cm NbW35	85 points
1 ,. chief weapon of the chemical corps of the German army
is rhe 10.5cm Nebelwerfer 35, a conventional heavy mortar,
wii ch is able to fire high-explosive, chemical or smoke
rounds. Its name comes from Nebelwerfer, German for
smoke or fog projector. In 1939, three Nebelwerfer battalions
were available for the invasion of Poland. Nine months later,
ten battalions (numbered 1 through 9 and the Nebel-Lehr
Abteilung or Smoke-Demonstration Battalion) took pan in
the Battle for France.
L UNTEROFFIZIER 1
L MORTAR SECTION
HEAVY ANTI-TANK GUN PLATOON—*—
Platoon
HQ Section with:
LEUTNANT ’
2 8.8cm FlaK36 anti-tank gun
1 8.8cm FlaK36 anti-tank gun
370 points
190 points
’ATI
Command SMG team
Options
•	Add Kfz 15 field car and Sd Kfz 7 half-tracks for
+5 points for the platoon.
•	Upgrade to armoured half-tracks with Front, Side
and Rear armour of 0 for +5 points for the platoon.
•	Model 8.8cm FlaK36 guns with eight or more crew
and increase their ROF to 3 for +10 points per gun.
All 8.8cm FlaK36 anti-tank guns in a Heavy Anti-tank
Gun Platoon have Gun Shields. They are not anti-
aircraft: guns and cannot shoot at aircraft.
L HQ SECTION]
L UNTEROFFIZIER^
8.8cm FlaK36 anti-tank gun
ANTI-TANK
L GUN SECTION
L UNTEROFFIZIER^
8.8cm FlaK36 anti-tank gun
ANTI-TANK
L GUN SECTION
lheavy anti-tank gun platoon
The German Army was fully aware of the thick armour of
Trench tanks and made preparations to deal with them. Part of
their solution was to form three ScbwerePanzerjagerabteilung
(Heavy Tank-hunter Battalions) numbered 525, 560, and
605. These are equipped with the same 8.8cm FlaK36 guns
as the air force anti-aircraft units, but are trained for anti-
tank work instead.
The heavy tank-hunter units are well protected with gun
shields on their guns and armoured half-tracked tractors to
get them into position.
BUNKER FLAK PLATOON
*
PLATOON
LEUTNANT 1
2 8.8cm HaKI8 (Sfl)
450 points
BUNKERFLAK
The 8.8cm FlaK18 Sfl ‘Bufla’ was designed to suppress
bunkers from outside the range of the defenders’
weapons. The crews were well-trained in identifying and
locating bunkers and hitting their firing slits to force the
defenders to take cover.
L LEUTNANT ]
Command 8.8cm Fla KI 8 Sfl
HQ SECTION ।
L UNTEROFFIZIER^
8.8cm Fla KI 8 Sfl
L BUNKER FLAK SECTION 1
BUNKER FLAK PLATOON
8.8cm FlaK18 Sfl self-propelled guns can shoot at bunkers
up to 24"/60cm away rather than the normal l6”/40cm
limitation.
The first company ol 8. Panzeijagerabteiliingwith six 8.8cm
FlaK18 (Sf) sell-propelled guns fought alongside 1. and
2. Panzerdivision in France. They were heavily engaged
against French Char B-l heavy tanks during the battles on
the Meuse River.
SS-anti-aircraft Gun Platoon-*-
*
Platoon
4 Sd Kfz 10/5 (2cm)
3 Sd Kfz 10/5 (2cm)
ss
100 points
75 points
UNTERSTURMFUHRER
L UNTERSTURMFUHRER
Command SdKfz 10/5
(2cm) half-track
L UNTERSHARFUHRER
SdKfz 10/5 (2cm) half-track
The SS formed their own anti-aircraft companies to protect
their new divisions in France. SS-Anti-aircraft Platoons are
rated as Fearless Trained.
SdKfz 10/5 (2cm) half-track
ANTI-AIRCRAFT 1
SECTION
SdKfz 10/5 (2cm) half-track
ANTI-AIRCRAFT 1
SECTION
L SS-ANTI-AIRCRAFT GUN PLATOON
The Waffen-SS formed its own anti-aircraft companies for
the two SS Ir sions that took pirt in t'i .: Battle of France.
106
GERMAN т r
LUFTWAFFE SUPPORT PLATOONS
. . anti-,:': i t aft crews are trained in the methods of engaging ground targets, but
. tre.t of c.\ .rtise is anti-aircraft fire. Light Anti-aircraft Platoons and Heavy
ap Pl . are rated as Confident Trained.
•	 airy bet ,. ,n the Luftwaffe, Army and SS, Lightd Heavy Anti-aircraft
tt be Allied Platoons and follow the rules for Allies on page 183 of
гы rulebook.
CONSCRIPT j]
TRAINED
AVY ANTI-AIRCRAFT GUN PLATOON —
Э д TOON
' LEUTNANT
J s- .lion with:
. LEUTNANT i
Command SMG team
Options
 Add Kb 15 field car and Sd Kfz 7 half-tracks for
(mints for the platoon.
• ii' ! I S.Svrn I ials 16 guns with eight or more cress
and nit ri ass* their R.OF to 3 for +10 points per gun.
A Arm HaK18 itnti-aircrafi guns in a Heavy Anti-air-
(nin Platoon are anti-aircraft runs and can shoot
cjta, well a* ground targets. However. they
m<ipped with Gun Shields.
HQ SECTION
. UNTEROFF1ZIER i
LUNTEROFFIZIER 1
8.8cm FlaK36 anti-aircraft gun
8.8cm FlaK36 anti-aircraft gun
. AA SECTION
1 AA SECTION 1
HEAVY ANTI-AIRCRAFT GUN PLATOON I
 ;m FlaK36 anti-aircraft gun was first used against
the Spanish Civil War, just a year before the Second
began. Its usefulness as an anti-tank weapon
was well understood when Rommel made them famous
stopping the British Matilda infantry tanks at Arras.
L GHT ANTI-AIRCRAFT GUN PLATOON
PLATOON
SdKfz 10/5 (2cm) half-track
Command SdKfz 10/5
(2cm) half-track
SdKfz 10/5 (2cm) half-track
SdKfz 10/5 (2cm) half-track
LEUTNANT 1
♦ SdKfz 10/5 (2cm>
L LEUTNANT 1
Lunteroffizier 1
I ANTI-AIRCRAFT 1
L SECTION j
I ANTI-AIRCRAFT 1
L SECTION
caffe, or Air Force, is responsible for protecting the
- mi enemy aircraft. Rather than waste fighters trying
;t the whole front line, the Luftwaffe has attached
_ : anti-aircraft company to each Panzer and motorised
. division, and to a number of foot-slogging infantry
. as well. Equipped with the excellent Sd Kfz 10/5
pelled 20mm gun, these companies far surpass most
. counties’ anti-aircraft capability.
107
						
					mhhOr	
			WtW Arsenal	j			
- и						
	I		TAMM TFALK			
			1 АкЧК 1 DAlVlO			
	Name Weapon	Mobility Range	Front ROF	Armour Side Anti-tank	Top Firepower	Equipment and Notes
	1 Tanks					
fl’	Н Panzer I A or В	Half-tracked	1	1	1	Twin MG.
	Panzerbefehlswagen	Half-tracked	1	1	1	Hull MG.
•1 >	Panzer II а го C (early) 2cm KwK38 gun	Fully-tracked 16740cm	I 3	1 5	1 5+	Co-ax MG, Protected ammo.
	Panzer II C (lare) 2cm KwK38 gun	Fully-tracked 16' 140cm	2 3	1 5	1 5+	Co-ax MG, Protected ammo.
	Г Panzer II D or E 2cm KwK38 gun	Half-tracked 16" 1 4 0cm	2 3	1 5	1 5+	Co-ax MG, Protected ammo.
Г 1	к Panzer 35(c) 3.7cm KwK34(t) gun	Fully-tracked 24760cm	2 2	1 6	1 4 +	Co-ax MG, Hull MG, Protected ammo. Unreliable.
	 Panzer 38(c) А, В, C or D 3.7cm KwK38(t) gun	Fully-tracked 24760cm	2 2	1 6	1 4+	Co-ax MG, Hull MG, Protected ammo.
						
	Panzer III E or F 3.7cm KwKgun	Fully-tracked 24 "I60cm	3 3	3 6	1 T+	Twin co-ax MG, Hull MG, Protected ammo.
	L Panzer IV C or D 7.5 cm KwK37 gun Firing bombardments	Fuliy-rracked 24760cm 487120cm	3 2	2 7 2	1 6	Co-ax MG, Hull MG, Protected ammo. Smoke.
	I Assault-guns					
1 1	Sd Kfz 253	Half-rracked	1	0	1	M MG.
	StuG A 7.5cm StuK37gun	Fuliy-rracked 24 '160cm	5	3 7	1 3+	Protected ammo. Hull mounted.
	SELF-PROPELLED GUNS					
	И 15cm sIG33 auf Panzer I 15 cm sIG33 gun	Ha If-tracked 16740cm	0 1	0 8	0 1+	Overloaded, Slow rank. Bunker buster, Hull mounted, Heavy infantry gun (p. 103).
''Ч L	Tank-hunters					
		Half-tracked 24 "/60cm	0 2		0 4+	
' г	4.7cm PaK(t) gun			0 8		Hull mounted.
	8.8cm FlaKl8 (Sfl) 8.8cm FlaKl8 gun	Half-tracked 407100cm	1	0 13	0 3+	Awkward Layout, Overloaded. Hull mounted, Bunkerflak (p. 106).
	armoured Cars					
	1 Sd Kfz 221 (MG)	Wheeled	0	0	0	AA MG
	1 Sd Kfz 222 (2cm, early) 2cm KwK38 gun	Wheeled 16’1 40cm	0	0 5	0 5+	Co-ax MG. Self-defence anti-aircraft.
	f Sd Kfz 223 (Radio, early)	Wheeled	0	0	0	.AA MG.
	Sd Kb 231 (6-rad) 2cm KwK38 gun	Wheeled 16740cm	0	0 5	0 5+	Co-ax MG.
LT	К Sd Kfz 231 (8-rad, early) 2cm KwK38 gun	Jeep 16740cm	1 3	0 5	0 5+	Co-ax rMG.
Ц<1	Anti-aircraft (SP)					
ill 1	b Sd Kfz 10/5 (2cm) 2 cm Fla КЗ 8 gun	Half-tracked 16740cm	4	5	.5+	Anti-aircraft.
	| Vehicle Machine-guns					
	I Vehicle MG	16740cm	3	2	6	ROF 1 if other weapons fire.
	Twin vehicle MG	16740cm	4	2	6	ROF 2 if other weapons fire.
						
1	108					
>1 *-						
GUN TEAMS
Жсхроп	Mobility	Range	ROF	Anti-tank	Firepower	Notes
t MG	Adan-packed	24760cm	6	2	6	ROF 2 when pinned down.
• - т mortar	Man-packed	407100cm	-	2	6	Smoke bombardment.
\'i\X'35 mortar	Man-packed	407100cm	-	3	4+	Smoke bombardment.
1 • j 18 gun	Light	16740cm	2	5	3+	Gun shield, Smoke.
mbardments		48'7120cm	-	3	6	
,35 gun	Heavy	16740cm	1	8	1 +	Bunker buster, Gun shield.
mbardments		567140cm	-	4	2+	
1 - • - gun	Light	16740cm	4	5	5+	Anti-aircraft, Gun shield, Turntable.
	 .56 gun	Light	24760cm	3	6	4 +	Gun shield.
\36 anti-tank gun	Immobile	407100cm	2	13	3+	Gun shield, Turntable.
<36 anti-aircraft gun	Immobile	407100cm	2	13	3+	Heavy anti-aircraft. Turntable.
’ :1 ' gun	Heavy	24760cm	2	8	3+	Gun shield, Smoke.
.mbardments		807200cm	-	3	6+	Smoke bombardment.
-	1 i i, howitzer	Immobile	24760cm	1	9	->.	Gun shield. Smoke.
. - .imbardments		727180cm	-	4	Он-	Smoke bombardment.
18 howitzer	Immobile	24 7 60cm	1	9	ге	Gun shield, Smoke.
mbardments		727180cm	-	4	4+	Smoke bombardment.
' gun	Immobile	32780cm	1	15	2+	
_ ' mbardments		967240cm	-	4	4+	
- 8 howitzer	Immobile	24760cm	1	11	1 +	Bunker buster, Smoke.
_ । mbardments		807200cm	-	5	2+	Smoke bombardment.
Rifle team
16’74 Ocm
R. MG team
6
2
2
MG ream
16740cm
4’710cm
SMG team
3
16740cm
16’740cm
4
Tank Assault 3.
6
Flame-thrower.
4’710 cm
cannot shoot
Moves as a Heavy Gun team.
Mobility
Wheeled
Wagon
Wagon
Hall-tracked
Half-tracked
0
0
Half-tracked
0
0
Ha If-tracked
Recovery vehicle.
To Hit
Anti-tank
Firepower
INFANTRY TEAMS
TRANSPORT TEAMS
AIRCRAFT
AA MG, HMG carrier.
Pa ssen ge r- fi red A A M G.
Firepower Notes
Light Mortar team
Anti-tank Rifle team
ROF Anti-tank
Armour
Front Side Top Equipment and Notes
Flame-thrower team
Stuff team
Weapon
Bombs
Range
16740cm
Full ROF when moving.
Can fire over friend Iv teams.
ADDITIONAL TRAINING AND EQUIPMENT
Pioneer teams are rated as lank Assault 3.
Team

TRUCKS
Motorcycle & Sidecar or Kfz 15 field car
Krupp Kfz 70 or Opel Blitz 3-ton truck
Opel Kiz 68 radio truck
Horse-drawn wagon
TRACTORS
Sd Kfz .10 (11? Sd Klz 1 1 (30, or Sd Kfz 7 (8r) half-track
Horse-drawn limber
Armoured Personnel Carriers
Sd Kfz 251/1 (l.'narmourc-d) half-track
Sd Kfz 251/1 half-track
Sd Kfz 251/1 (HMG) half-track
Recovery Vehicles
Sd Kfz 9 (18t) half-rrack
A in raft
hi 87В Stuka
AA MG, Passenger-fired A A MG.
AA MG. Passenger-fired AA MG.
Notes
Optional Stuka Schwerpunkt (p. 102).
ФёгШаг ^per.afXxLilcf
DOCTRINE
ARMOURED INFANTRY
Infantry teams that started the Assault Step dismounted fight
alongside the half-track-mounted teams using the normal
assault rules.
. . is no team of an appropriate type within Command
then the Platoon Command team is Destroyed and
toon is left lead ,за.
As the platoon is not made up entirely of Armoured Tank teams,
i • 'fail back if Pinned Dos n by Defensive I- re, even /
vehicles’ armour protects the platoon from casualties.
Mounted Assault
. .as most armoured infantry use their half-tracks as
. taxis to get them close to the enemy, then dismount
ault on foot, German Panzerschutzen assault light op-
 an still mounted in their half-tracks.
These special rules reflect the doctrine and training that give German soldiers their edge in battle. These special rules
.-e the standard rules from the rulebook (on pages 166 to 168). Not all of the special rules in the rulebook apply as the
German Army has not yet developed some of the equipment it would later use to good effect.
Kampfgruppe
 “ "mpfgruppe, or battle group, is an important part of
. man military operations. Leaders at every level form
on-specific task forces from any troops available.
. leploying your force at the start of the game, you may take
ialf of the Sections or Squads (excluding the H Q Section)
•y Combat or Weapons platoons in the company andplace
i a special Kampfgruppe Platoon. The 2iC Command
becomes the Platoon Command team for this platoon,
to be Independent team and no longer counting
. C Command team. Teams placed in the Kampfgruppe
are no longer part of their original platoons.
mpfgruppe Platoon counts as a platoon for all purposes
"j deployment and Company Morale Checks.
Mission Tactics
e battle, every soldier in the company is briefed on their
n and how it relates to the overall battle plan. Far from
7 'omising security, this trust allows any soldier to take
aen their superior is killed.
>on Command Infantry team is Destroyed, another team
immediately. Remove any other Infantry team in the
that is within Command Distance of the Command
d replace it with the original Platoon Command team.
. . Command Tank team is Destroyed, another team
immediately. Nominate any other Tank team in the
that is within Command Distance of the Destroyed
•id team to be the new Platoon Command team.
...sport team cannot normally Charge into Contact.
.. ,i; a German Transport team from a platoon that is
'  of making a mounted assault may do so. A Transport
taking a mounted assault must not have mounted or
ntedpassengers earlier in the turn.
. t Assault Combat Round, one Infant) . teamen
ssengi, in each Transport team that is not Bailed Out
Stormtroopers
German soldiers have inherited the Stormtrooper ethos from
their fathers in the First World War. While other armies wait
for orders, the Stormtroopers are racing ahead to take their
objective.
Any German platoon with a Platoon Command team may
attempt a Stormtroopers move in its Assault Step.
Roll a Skill Test for each platoon.
•	If the test is passed, the platoon treats the Assault Step a 
Movement Step in which it can move up to another 4’11Oc .
regardless of its normal movement distance.
•	If the test is failed, the platoon cannot move any further this
turn.
Either way, a platoon that attempts to make a Stormtroopers
move cannot Launch an Assault in the same turn.
Although it is not the Movement Step, teams making a
Stormtroopers move may mount and dismount as if it was a
Movement Step.
Platoons cannot make Stormtroopers moves if they moved At
the Double. Bogged Down or Bailed Out vehicles cannot make
Stormtroopers moves.
Only Armoured vehicles can make Stormtroopers moves
if they are Pinned Down. Other types of team cannot make
Stormtroopers moves if they are Pinned Down.
Gun teams that shot earlier in the turn cannot make a
Stormtroopers move. Teams of any type that have fired an artil-
lery bombardment cannot make a Stormtroopers move.
may fight as if it was a Tank team (remember that Tank tea
cannot assault Tanks). The Transport teams themselves cannot
fight in the assault.
The passengers remain mounted in their half-tracks until the
platoon launches a Counterattack, whereupon they must
dismount.
111
LONDON
The miracle of Dunkirk
The French plan to counter a German invasion of the
Low Countries called for the British Expeditionary
Force (BEF) to march from Arras and Lille where it
was stationed, to the Dyle River where it would occupy
a sector of the front between rhe Belgian Army in the
north and the French First Army to the south. When
the Germans invaded on IO May 1940, the British
swung into action, reaching their positions early on the
morning of 11 May. Everything was going to plan
Five days later things looked quite different. File Dutch
had surrendered on 14 May after the bombing of Ihe
Hague, anti on the same day two German armoured
corps under Reinhardt and Guderian had broken
through the French lines on the Meuse River near Sedan.
On 16 May. the French ordered a retreat to the Escaut
River to re-establish a continuous front line. Fighting
by day, halting the Germans each time, and retreating
to the Senne, Dendrc and then Escaut Rivers by night,
the BEF was in position by the morning of 19 May.
Unfortunately the French generals hadn't reckoned with
the speed of the German armoured (roups. By the time
the Allied armies arrived on the Escaut, German tanks
were on the Canal du Nord, just fifteen miles from
Arras and only fifty from the sea The Allied supply' lines
running through Arras were about to be cut.
Faced with Germans on their doorstep, the British head-
quarters at Arras organised a counterattack. Frankforcc,
a force from the S" Division and the 1 Army Tank
Brigade under the command of General Franklyn,
counterattacked on 21 May. When the infantry was
delayed, the Г Army lank Brigade's heavy Matilda
infantry tanks smashed into the German spearhead
alone. Their armour was proof against everything the
Germans could throw at them until heavy artillery and
88mm anti-aircraft guns were brought up to stop them.
Unfortunately, although the attack gave the Germans a
serious shock and bought the British time to form a de-
fensive line, the attack and subsequent fighting around
Arras cost the British nearly all of their heavy tanks.
With the German thrusts pushing around the southern
flank and up the coast, the British landed forces at
Boulogne and Calais on 22 May to hold the ports and
link up with the BEL This was too little, too late and
the weak relief forces were bottled up in the ports. By
26 May both forces had been evacuated again. It was
now clear that the BEF was completely cut oft from its
supply lines and everyone was put on half rations.
On the same day, 26 May, l ord Gort, the commander of
the BEF, came to the conclusion that there was no longer
any hope of a fighting withdrawal back to France and
issued orders tor a retreat to the port of Dunkirk where
the Royal Navy would evacuate as much as possible of
the BEF. Once again the British forces began a step-by-
step retreat, fighting by day and marching by night
On 27 May. Belgium surrendered, leaving the British
and French armies with both flanks exposed. General
Montgomery’s 3'J Division saved the day with a
well-executed night march to secure the open flank.
However, little could be done for the open southern
flank and small groups delayed the Germans as long as
BOU
-«--KEY
Belgium Front Line
British Front Line
French Front Line
British Units
French Units
German Armoured Corps
German Case Yellow Attacks
German Case Red Attacks
British Counterattack
British Retreat
French Retreat
Rivers
ABBE--
DIEPPE
ST. VaLERY-E
IX CORP
Le Havre
Rouen
Case red
N С E
50
100
0 Miles
5 June 1940.
| HOTH |
Germans Crosses the
112
0 KM
so
I on
150
Arras
1»пкТ7ТТ
FRANCE
NOTH
NINTH
[REINHARDT
Somtnt
GUDERIAN
21 May
-Al IS
j KUECHLER |
ANTWERP
В E
U M
BRUSSELS
LILLt
Gembloux
HOEPNER
Namur
Sr<"T'r
MONS
Ghent
Germany Invade» The Netherlands
and Bclgumu 10 May 1940.	DlNANT
FIRST
FIRST
FIRST
pu , ' . while the main forces retreated to Dunkirk. In this
- assisted by Hitler who ordered that the German
cd divisions stop their pursuit of the BEF and prepare
1 -	. <cond phase of the campaign. Instead, the German
A - was supposed to sink the Royal Navy ships making
• - i. nation and in doing so, destroy the BEE
Ik f.,l the Royal Navy conducted the lion's share of the cvacu-
t	:.mv soldiers owed their survival to the gallantry of
Ikr of British civilians who sailed across the channel in
~ • n boats to rescue their trapped army. Their combined
e»- icuated the entire BEF by 3 June. On Churchill's
йяепсе the evacuation continued for a further day to lift
-	more French troops from the beaches as possible.
*	- - . :.e campaign in Belgium had been an unmitigated
_ - the ‘Miracle of Dunkirk' had at least avoided the
Oc i .. ion of the British Army.
•	• rn< BEF evacuating, the only British troops left in
Fun .. were the 51" (Highland) Division and the Г Ar-
. . ! Division These were ordered to contain the German
— —; mead at Abbeville under the French IX Corps.
The Г’ Armoured Division was first to arrive, and on 26 May
was ordered to attack the German defences with neither
infantry nor artillery support. The result was predictable
and despite incredible bravery, the only British armoured
division in France was gutted in a few hours. When the
Highlanders arrived, they could do little but hold the line,
waiting for the second BEF to arrive. The first elements of'
this, tiie 52,j! (Lowland) Division and partofthe I” Canadian
Division, arrived on 7 and 12 June.
They were too late to save the Highlanders as the Germans
attacked on 5 June and quickly broke through the over-
stretched line. The British right flank was held by Beauforce,
a collection of troops scraped together from working parties
and replacements from the Line of Communications.
They were no match for the German spearheads and the
51" (Highland) Division was soon outflanked and bypassed.
The Highlanders attempted to reach Le Havre for evacuation,
but the fast-moving German spearhead cut them off and the
division surrendered at St. Valery-cn-Caux on 12 June. Flu-
remaining British troops were evacuated soon afterwards.
BRITAIN ATrWAR

BRITISH FORCES
Between the two World Wars, Britain’s main concern was
policing its far-flung empire. Europe was of little concern
with Germany neutralised by the Treaty of Versailles and the
French unlikely to succeed in crossing the English Channel
against the Royal Navy. The British government was so sure
that the Royal Navy and their new darlings, the Royal Air
Force could sec off any threats that, even after rearmament
began in earnest, the British Army got little funding.
As a result, when the war came Britain could only offer France
a British Expeditionary Force (BEF) of just one corps of three
infantry divisions (compared with 33 French divisions im-
mediately ready for action). This rose to a full army of ten
divisions by the time the Germans invaded. Where the BEF
shone was its quality. Every single division was motorised, and
many of the battalions were made up of professional soldiers
unlike their allies and enemies who were all conscripts.
ROYAL ARMOURED CORPS
RELUCTANT
> CONFIDENT
FEARLESS
Despite having been a leader in the use of
tanks in the First World War and an exporter
of tank designs between the wars, Britain
entered the Second World War with roughly
the same number of medium and heavy
tanks as Poland. Tire majority of British tanks were machine-
gun-armed light tanks serving in the divisional reconnais-
sance regiments. Fortunately new designs were entering
production enabled the I'1 Army Tank Brigade (equipped
CONSCRIPT
TRAINED
with heavy infantry tanks) to join the BFF
in France just before the German invasion
and the I" Armoured Division (equipped
with cruiser tanks) to folloss- later in May.
This late start has left the British armoured
corps with insufficient time to train and develop practical
tactics, giving them a Skill rating of Trained. Despite their
rushed deployment, British tanks show considerable bravery
gaining a Motivation rating of Confident.
GUARDS
The two senior regiments of the Brigade of
Guards arc well represented in the BEF. The
1 Division's 1 (Guards) Brigade has the
3' * Battalion of the Grenadier Guards and
the 2nd of the Coldstream. Montgomery's
3 1 Division has 7 (Guards) Brigade with
Battalions of the Grenadier Guards and the 1“ Battalion of As guardsmen, they use the Unflappable special rule on
the Coldstream Guards. True to their traditions, the guards- page 134.
men follow orders to a ‘t’, standing their
ground and fighting hard. As long-service
professionals, the Guards (marked with a
Grenadier Guards cap badge w ) have a Skill
rating of Veteran. Their Motivation rating of
the Г' and 21J Confident reflects the guardsmen's behaviour under pressure.
REGULARS
RELUCTANT
CONSCRIPT
’ CONFIDENT	TRAINED
FEARLESS	VETERAN *
The British Army has traditionally been an
all-volunteer professional force. In 1939 this
still held true and the entirety of the first
corps to ship to France were long-service
soldiers from the Regular Army. Territorial
battalions joined the regulars as additional divisions were ac-
tivated, but the regulars still formed the majority. The British
Army had a cheerful outlook on the retreat to Dunkirk,
declaring that 'the British Army always starts a war with a
defeat, but always ends it in victory’. This attitude gains the
regulars (marked with a major's crown Aft) a Motivation
rating of Confident, despite the hardships of
the campaign. As long-service professionals,
they have a Skill rating of Veteran.
Although most of the regular highland bat-
talions served in India, there were a handful
in the BEF, along with a few territorials. These battalions
marched to the bagpipes (and even in the case of the Queen's
Own Cameron Highlanders, retained their kilts!). Highland
Scots regiments use the Bagpipes special rule on page 134.
F1
Я
TERRITORIALS
The British Army did not introduce conscrip- . tion until after the war began. Aside from the full-time professionals of the peacetime army, the only other source of soldiers was the Territorial Army. These men volunteered	£ RELUCTANT * CONFIDENT	CONSCRIPT j TRAINED	, was lacking, six months of full-time soldier- ing have turned the Territorials (marked 1 with a lieutenant's pip ^>) into real soldiers, 1 giving them a Trained Skill rating. Eager to do their bit for King and Country, the
	[ FEARLESS	VETERAN J	
for weekend training in peacetime, and were called up when ‘Terriers' are as willing to fight as the next man and earn
the war began in earnest. Although their peacetime training themselves a Motivation rating of Confident.
_:al Montgomery! experience in the Fitter World War
_ t him tne importance of proper planning, and that
.. must be well trained in modern warfare and i< J by
fCM ndem officers who knew and had practised their craft.
..n the wars Montgomery gained a reputation as an
. Tielv good trainer. A small, hawkish man, his single-
cd professionalism marked him out as an eccentric.
start of the Second World War he was a 5 1 year-old
-General, who had just assumed command of the
msides) Division. ‘Monty’, as his troops came to call
immediately set about training his division, weeding
ficers he thought not up to the job in the process. His
ng on how to conduct rearguards and to march at night
be needed in the fighting ahead.
. .s division conducted a stout defence on the Dyle
. on 15 and 16 May. When the British Expeditionary
---=——-------------------------
Characteristics
-General Montgomery is a Warrior and a Higher
nd Pistol team rated as Confident Veteran.
-iy field Montgomery in any Rifle Company for
~~ ints. Montgomery achieved his successes without the
tanks or the French far to the south. A force fielding
_ amery may not contain All or Al 2 Tank Platoons or
ied French platoons.
---------------
SPECIAL RULES
4 If assured: Montgomery had an unbounded belief in
' >ty to win, and persisted until he did. Montgomery
passes Company Morale Checks on a roll of 3+.
Hi .tut: Montgomery marched his entire division across the
. n front by night, reaching their new battle positions
. lawn. Before deploying your force you may select
d a Rif’. ?' „.is hat v „ ,1 ally b ' .-ployed
’. to be redeployed. This platoon is not deployed at
force rctn.ited, the 3rd Division : u. ssfully disengaged and
fell back in go< >d order to th, Dendrc River and then to the
1 ™hi Canal I hr 3 Division gave their German pursuers
a bloody i  at each river or canal they defended, suffering
comparatively few casualties in return.
While many commanders were found wanting in the stress
of the campaign, Monty exuded supreme confidence and
relished the challenges that arose. When his corps com-
mander, General Brooke was evacuated, Monty succeeded
him as commander of II Corps and oversaw the embarkation
of the corps from Dunkirk.
Back in England, Monty immediately set to work bringing
his troops back to readiness, forming one of the few divi-
sions capable of opposing a German invasion. In 1942 he
was ordered to Egypt to take command of the Eighth Army
for his most famous battle at El Alamein.
the usual time. Instead, it is deployed at the same time as
Independent teams.
Calm, Clear Brain: Montgomery knew the value of timing
and withdrew under cover of darkness and, unlike other
British Generals, made good use of the night. If you arc
defending in a mission using the Defensive Battle special
rule, you may elect, prior to your opponent's deployment, to
force the enemy to attack at dusk.
If you do this, the games starts in daylight. At the start of
the British third turn, roll a die. On a score of 5 + , night
has fallen. If the roll is unsuccessful, the attacker rolls two
dice at the start of their next turn, once again needing an ,
score of 5+ for night to fall. If it is still daylight at the i t
of the defender’s fourth turn, they roll three dice, and so on
increasing the number of dice by one each time until night
falls on any roll of 5 + .
\X' I w11 nig it falls, theN ° it Fit hi " г. >agel54 ,ie
r licbook come into effect for the remainder of the game.
117
(Tank Company)
£
s
о
3
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
British companies can have French troops (marked О ) as support options. Remember that
these platoons retain their own rules and ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see page 183
of the rulebook).
RECONNAISSANCE
-HH
3
°
J
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
Regiment HQ
Headquarters
Fusiliers Portes Platoon
ARMOUR
110 points
REGIMENT HQ
k ARMOURED REGIMENT HQ
Remember, all Light Mk VI C and A9, A1O, and A13
Cruiser tanks use the Tally Ho! and Broadside special rules
on page 135.
The fast. but lightly-armoured, cruiser and light tanks of
। the Г' Armoured Division fought alongside the French at
Abbeville on the Somme River rather than with the rest of
the British I speditionary Force in Belgium.
I Alt) Cruiser Mk II and
I l ight Mk VI В


HEADQUARTERS
COLONEL
ЕсоюйЁД
Options
•	Replace 2iC Command Light Mk VI В tank with
Light Mk VI C tank for +5 points, A9 Cruiser Mk I
tank for +40 points, or A10 Cruiser Mk II tank for
+ 50 points.
•	Add A9 Cruiser Mk I tank for +70 points, A10
Cruiser Mk II for +80 points, Light Mk IV В tank for
+30 points, or Light Mk VI C tank for +35 points.
•	Add Light Mk IV В tank for +30 points or Light
Mk VI C tank for +35 points.
Company Command
A10 Cruiser Mk II
2iC Command
Light Mk VI В
118
BRITISH
COMBAT PLATOONS
Command
Light Mk VI В
RELUCTANT
CONFIDENT
FEARLESS
Light Mk VI В
+590 points
+385 points
+295 points
100 points
65 points
Command
Light Mk VI В
Light Mk VI В Light Mk VI В
* LIGHT PLATOON
L ARMOURED COMPANY j
MOTIVATION AND SKILL	<
Britain fielded two armoured brigades, one from the Royal Tank Regiment, and one of л
raval.rv reai.mevits converted tn tanks. Both are trained, and. readv for action. An Armoured,
cavalry regiments converted to tanks. Both are trained and ready for action. An Armoured
Regiment is Confident Trained.
ARMOURED COMPANY
COMPANY HQ Platoon of:	
2 A13 Cruiser Mk HI and 2 A9 Cruiser Mk I CS	200 points
2 A13 Cruiser Mk III and 1 A9 Cruiser Mk I CS	165 points
1 A13 Cruiser Mk III and 2 A9 Cruiser Mk I CS	135 points
1 A13 Cruiser Mk III and 1 A9 Cruiser Mk I CS	100 points
• Replace all A9 Cruiser Mk I CS tanks with Light
Mk VI C tanks at no cost.
r HQ Platoon of:
2 A9 Cruiser Mk I CS and
1 Light MkVIC
2 A9 Cruiser Mk I CS
No HQ Platoon
ith Combat Platoons:
2 Cruiser and 2 Light Platoons
1 Cruiser and 2 Light Platoons
1 Cruiser and 1 Light Platoon
Options
•	Replace any or all A13 Cruiser Mk III tanks with
A13 Mk II Cruiser Mk IV tanks for +15 points
per tank.
•	Replace all Light Mk VI В tanks with Light Mk VI C
tanks for +15 points per Light Platoon.
litish followed the same theory as the Germans in
: their armour into a concentrated strike force. The
Araloured Division had more gun-armed tanks than any
n Panzer Division, and far better light tanks.
. HQ, Light and Cruiser Platoons of a Armoured
'any operate as separate platoons, each with their own
~ ,n Command team. Lite HQ Platoon is a headquar-
. . name only. It operates the same as any other platoon
a normal Platoon Command team.
gh its platoons operate as separate platoons for all
Purposes, an Armoured Company deploys all at the
. time as a single platoon. For example, this means that
t eat the entire Armoured Company as a single platoon
calculating the number of platoons held in Ambush
CONSCRIPT
TRAINED
VETERAN
ARMOURED REGIMENT
MAJOR
LSUBALTERN 1
Light Mk VI В
MJGHTP^TOOhT
^HUBADFR^S
Charge!
British armoured regiments displayed a distinct ‘cavalry’
attitude, even on occasion launching charges in tradi-
tional cavalry style. Due to their light armour and inabil-
ity to successfully engage anti-tank guns, the armoured
regiments fighting in France lost large numbers of tanks
in their attacks. In the true ‘Charge of the Light Brigade
tradition, they were still keen to fight on.
An Armoured Regiment ignores the first platoon Destroyed
when calculating Victory Points.
119
1
Headquarters
ARMOUR
2
HEADQUARTERS
L COMPANY HQ
О
>
MAJOR 1
ГмАЮ^
(Tank Company)
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
О
О
t-
3
ARMOUR
INFANTRY
ARTILLERY
ARMOUR
Al I Tank Platoon
AIRCRAFT
2
О
The BEF’s heavy tank formation, the T Army Tank
Brigade, consisted of the 4 and 7’ Battalions, Royal
Tank Regiment equipped with Infantry or T ranks (with
a handful of light tanks for command and liaison work).
As the T tanks were designed to cooperate with infantry,
they were heavily armoured, almost impervious to German
anti-tank weapons, but moved at a walking pace.
Initially, 4‘ RTR was equipped solely with the machine-
gun-armed, 1 1-ton Al 1 Infantry Tank Mk I (nicknamed
‘Matilda’ as it waddled like the cartoon duck of that
name!). 7 RI R, on the other hand, went to France with
COMPANY HQ—>
1 Al 1 Matilda and 1 Light Mk VI В	90	points
1 Al 1 Matilda	60	points
1 A12 Matilda Senior and		
1 l ight Mk VI В	265	points
1 AI2 Matilda Senior	235	points
Company Command
Matilda
2iC Command
Light Mk VI В
Option
Replace CommandAl 1 Matilda tankwith Command
All Matilda (0.5” MG) tank for +15 points.
L INFANTRY TANK COMPANY HQ


the new 2 pdr-armed, 27-ton Al 2 Infantry Tank Mk II or
‘Matilda Senior’ amongst its Al 1 Matilda tanks.
Ute brigade’s first action was its famous counterattack near
Arras which caused rhe Germans some consternation and
gave a brief, but essential, respite to the BEE 4r RTR lent
a couple of platoons of Al 2 ranks to 7'11 RTR for the battle,
giving both battalions a mix of the two types.
As a result of losses at Arras, the two barralions were
combined into a /7lh RTR with a mix of AU and A12
infantry tanks for the fighting on the Escaut Canal.
120
British с
A12 TANK PLATOON
PLATOON
и
*
PLATOON
HQ Troop with:
COMBAT PLATOONS
L A12 TANK PLATOON
SUPPORT PLATOONS
L HQ SECTION,
L SERGEANT
L SERGEANT
225 points
120 points
I Gun Troop with 4 OQF 18 pdr
I Gun Troop with 2 OQF 18 pdr
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
The Royal Tank Regiment hits it tradition of professionalism dating back to its formation
in the First World War. The Army Tank Brigade is well-prepared and ready for battle.
Infantry Tank Companies are rated as Confident Trained.
A11 Mati da
.GUN SECTION ,
All TANK PLATOON
	
1 3 All Matilda	J 185 points
	
• Replace Command Al 1 Matilda tank with Command
All Matilda (0.5” MG) tank for +15 points.
I 3 Al2 Matilda Senior	710 points
1 2 Al2 Matilda Senior	475 points
Option
• Replace up to half of the A12 Matilda Senior tanks
with Al 1 Matilda tanks for -175 points per tank.
4OTORISED BATTERY, ROYAL ARTILLERY
Options
•	Add 15 cwt trucks and Quad tractors for +5 points
for the platoon.
•	Replace 15 cwt truck carrying the Observer Rifle
team with an OP Scout Carrier for +5 points.
wd Batteries, Royal Artillery may not be deployed in
tillcry supporting the 50'" (Northumbrian) Division
tacked with the Iм Army Tank Brigade at Arras were
“ial artillery regiments equipped with the Ordnance
. Firing 18 pounder. This was the standard field artil-
e used by the British Army during the Great War.
preparation for a mechanised war, the guns have
_____nunition and steel wheels with pneumatic tyres in
. ooden wheels with steel tvres.
SUBALTERN
QUBALTER^
Command A11 Matilda A11 Matilda
TANK PLATOON 1
All TANK PLATOON
Command A12
Matilda Senior
SUBALTERN 1
LSUBAUER^
TANK PLATOON 1
A12 Matilda
Senior
A12 Matilda
Senior
Command Rifle team
CAPTAIN 1
L CAP1TAIN1
Staff team
Observer Rifle team
15 cwt truck
OQF 18 pdr
OQF 18 pdr
OQF 18 pdr
OQF 18 pdr
L GUN SECTION
MOTORISED BATTERY. ROYAL ARTILLERY
121
DIVISIONAL
T XLRY Squadron
HEADQUARTERS
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
ARMOUR
ARMOUR
ARMOUR
ARMOUR
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
-nw
Scout Car Patrol

ARMOUR
ARMOUR
MACHINE-GUNS
Rearguard
The Divisional Cavalry operated as the BEF’s rear-
guard, covering the infantry’s retreat. Their mobility
was used to break oft and retreat to the next defence
line rather than to attack the enemy.
A Divisional Cavalry Squadron always defends in any
mission that uses the Defensive Battle special rule.
MACHINEGUNS
ANTI-TANK

Anti-tank Ptatoori, Royal Artillery
ARTILLERY
AIRCRAFT
British
HEADQUARTERS
Company HQ—>
Headquarters
2 I ight Mk VI В
60 points
Option
• Add up to two Scout Carriers for +30 points
per carrier.
Company Command
Light Mk VI В
MAJOR ’
2iC Command
Light Mk VI В
L SQUADRON HQ
~ ' atriers in a Divisional Cavalry Squadron HQ are
.DIVISIONAL CAVALRY SQUADRON HQ |
O Divisional Cavalry Squadron
COMBAT PLATOONS
D . ! signal Cavalry Platoon

s.ATOON
3 Light Mk VI В
90 points
rih Expeditionary Force’s primary armoured for-
came from seven divisional cavalry regiments:
3. .al Dragoon Guards, 5th Royal Inniskilling
i Guards, 13d718l1' Royal Hussars (Queen Mary's
• =;> /]суь qqle King’s Royal Hussars, l'! East Riding
Г" Fife and Forfar Yeomanry, and the I'1 Lothians
Jcr Horse.
/intent has three squadrons with Vickers Mk VI В
s. Capable of 35 mph (56 ktu/h) and armed with a
- oled Vickers .303” and a Vickers 0.5” machine-gun
_ it Mk VI В was a useful light tank.
SUBALTERN 1
L SUBALTERN ।
Command Light Mk VI В
L HQ TANK
L SERGEANT^
Light Mk VI В
L TANK 1
L CORPORAL
Light Mk VI В
L TANK"!
L DIVISIONAL CAVALRY PLATOON
VISIONAL CAVALRY CARRIER PLATOON

P.ATOON
3 Scout Carrier
90 points
WARRANT OFFICERS
^ARRAN^FHCE^I
Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
Command Scout Carrier
1 as its light tanks, a divisional cavalry regiment was
tipped with Scout Carriers. The Scout Carrier has
. .1 light machine-gun in the rear crew compartment
opposite side from the infantry’s Bren Gun Carrier as
ard compartment was occupied by a Boys anti-tank
Fne with their cavalry role, every carrier is equipped
\’o. 11 Wireless (radio) set.
Lcorporal?
Scout Carrier
L CARRIER
L HQ CARRIER;
LCORPORALl
Scout Carrier
L CARRIER 1
DIVISIONAL CAVALRY CARRIER PLATOON
123
RIFLE COMPANY
Company HQ
DIVISIONAl support platoons
RECONNAISSANCE
Carrier Platoori
ANT-TANK
ЛААА
An It-tank


HEADQUARTERS

INFANTRY

INFANTRY

INFANTRY
1W
Rifle Platoon
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
Your Company HQ must be either Guards (marked *), Regular (marked L) or Territorial
(marked  ). All Combat and Weapons platoons must be of the same type as your Company
HQ. Divisional Support platoons may of any type and may be different from the Company HQ.
British companies can have French troops (marked О ) as support options. Remember that
French platoons retain their own rules and ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see page 183
of the rulebook).
II » 8118
ARMOUR
Al 1 Tank Platoon
Al 2 Tank Platoon
Divisional Cavalry
Platoon
Armoured Car Platoon
Light Tank Platoon О
FT Tank Platoon
ARMOUR
Divisional Cavalry
Carrier Platoon
Armoured Car Platoon
Scout Car Patrol
Light Tank Platoon О
INFANTRY

Rifle Platoon
LОС Platoon
Machine-gun Platoon
Fusiliers Portis л
Platoon	°
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs
Ratoon	Ф
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs л
Machine gun Platoon w
MACHINE-CUNS
Machine-gun Platoon
RECONNAISSANCE
ANTI-TANK

Motorcycle Platoon
Anti-tank Platoon.
Royal Artillery
ANTITANK
Anti-tank Platoon.
Royal Artillery
25mm Anti-tank
Gun Platoon
ARTILLERY
Reid Battery. Royal
Artillery
Artillery Battery
AJIterrarn Towed л
75mm Artillery Battery **
AIRCRAFT
Air Support
0
! Regular
T guards
HEADQUARTERS
L MAJOR 1
L COMPANY HQ
COMBAT PLATOONS
L CORPORAL 1
Anti-tank
Rifle team
Rifle/MG team
Rifle/MG team
L HQ SECTION,
L CORPORAL 1
RIFLE SQUAD ]
L CORPORAL
Light Mortar
team
•Htt
Rifle/MG team
Am
Rifle/MG team
AVI
Command
Rifle/MG team
Rifle/MG team
^IFLESQUA^J
RIFLE PLATOON
O rifle company
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
• -els Rifle Companies are rated as Confident Veteran. Regular Rifle Companies are rated as Confident Veteran.
itorial Rifle Companies are rated as Confident Trained.
Company HQ
Headquarters
Company I IQ
Add Mortar Section
Option
• a	Add a Scottish Bagpiper to a Regular or Territorial
-«r 2iC Command team for +10 points.
9 Guards	Д; Regular	Territorial	
30 points	30 points	25 points	
+ 50 points	♦50 points	♦30 points	
И			
-HU
Company Command
Rifle team
2iC Command
Rifle team
infantry divisions are unique in the world, being the
r nv with fully-motorised infantry—thev don’t have a
arse on strength. Initially, all battalions were pre-war
> made up almost entirely of long-service volunteers,
ng a brigade of Guards in Montgomery’s 3rJ Division,
т ten, battalions of territorials, part-time volunteers,
. jmpleted their training and joined them in the lines.
L RIFLE COMPANY RQ
Ri fle Platoon
Platoon
Q Section with:
3 Rifle Squads
2 Rifle Squads
9 Guards	t Regular	* TERRITORIAL
195 points	185 points	145 points
155 points	145 points	110 points
SUBALTERN OR PLATOON SERGEANT MAJOR 1
PubaSr^^^too^ergean^ajo?
the British Expeditionary Force first arrived in France
. .as a shortage of trained junior officers, so only the
platoon in a company was commanded by subal-
officers), while the second and third platoons were
.nded by platoon sergeant-majors (senior sergeants).
. latoons now have officers in charge, but there are still
. of PSM’s about.
: e squads (or sections as they are termed in the British
are eight men strong, with a corporal, Bren gunner,
; riflemen. Tire Lee Enfield Mk III rifle they use is
the same weapon as their fathers were armed with at the
. . r the Great War, but the first-rate Bren light machine-
s replaced the old Lewis gun. Two new weapons that
d be unfamiliar to their fathers are the 2" light mortar
: Boys anti-tank rifle.
RIFLE SQUAD I
Am
Rifle/MG team
125
WEAPONS PLATOONS
Carrier Platoon*--
*=
Platoon
3 Carrier Patrols
2 Carrier Patrols
1 Carrier Patrol
Ф Guards	л Regular	' Territorial
310 points	300 points	240 points
210 points	200 points	160 [Klints
110 points	100 points	80 points
Option
•	Arm up to one Bren Gun Carrier per Carrier Patrol
with a Boys anti-tank rifle for +5 points per carrier.
Currier Patrols operate as separate platoons, each with their
own conunantl team. Although its patrols operate as separate
platoons for all other purposes, a Carrier Platoon deploys
all at the same time as a single platoon. For example, this
means that you treat the entire Carrier Platoon as a single
platoon when calculating the number of platoons held in
Ambush or Reserve.
Carrier Patrols are Reconnaissance Platoons.
Each infantry battalion has a carrier platoon of three patrols.
Each patrol has three Bren Gun Carriers, each crewed by
an NCO, a driver/mechanic and a rifleman. The carriers are
aru ed with a Bren light machine-gun, with one carrier in
each patrol armed with a Boys anti-tank rifle as well.
Brigade Anti-tank Platoon ——*=—-
Platoon
HQ Section with:
3 Hotchkiss 25mm
О GUARDS " REGULAR	TERRITORIAL
80 points	70 points	50 points
Option
•	Add 15 cwt trucks for +5 points for the platoon.
ВТ., e the war there was debate about who would man
the anti-tank guns, the infantry or the artillery. In the end,
they ended up under Royal Artillery control. The invasion
of Poland made the infantry rethink their ideas and request
iheir own anti-tank guns.
B-, this time, all available 2 pdr anti-tank guns were needed
by the artillery ant-tank regiments, so the infantry purchased
Hotchkiss 25mm SA-34 anti-tank guns from the French
instead. These guns were so light that they were carried on
the back of the 15 cwt trucks rather than towed behind them.
These equipped the brigade anti-tank company of three anti-
tank platoons. An anti-tank platoon would be attached to
each battalion, and assigned to the sector most vulnerable to
tanks and most in need of anti-armour support.
Although the gunners had little time to familiarise them-
selves with these weapons, they held the Hotchkiss guns in
high regard as an effective weapon.
j ZONAL Suppo
i CONFIDENT
FEARLESS
Territorial
т
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
_ divisional and corps assets of the British Expeditionary force (BEF). such as machine-gun battalions and artillery
.Aments, supported any battalion that needed their assistance, regardless of regimental affiliation.
isional Support may be a mix of Regular and Territorial platoons, regardless of the rating of the rest of the force.
lar support platoons are rated as Confident Veteran. Territorial support platoons are rated as Confident Trained.
MOTORCYCLE PLATOON —*
Platoon
Q Section with:
3 Motorcycle Squads
2 Motorcycle Squads
* regular	Territorial
-	170 points
-	140 points
SUBALTERN !
UUBADTR^
. cycle Platoons use the Blitzkrieg Motorcycle
____issance rules on page 13 and are Reconnaissance
. ns while mounted.
divisions have a motorcycle battalion like the
1 Northumberland Fusiliers of the 50lh (North-
Division that counterattacked with the I'1 Army
gade at Arras. Their motorcycle platoons scouted
itt icking British infantry tank columns.
. '.ale companies have three small motorcycle platoons,
:th three sections armed with Bren light machinc-
d a light mortar and anti-tank rifle to be allocated to
uns as needed.
Command
Motorcycle
MG team
L CORPORAL ।
A A
Motorcycle
MG team
motorcycleI
SQUAD
Motorcycle
Light Mortar
team
L HQ SECTION;
L CORPORAL 1
Motorcycle
MG team
MOTORCYCLE!
SQUAD |
Motorcycle
Anti-tank rifle
team
^CORPORAL 1
Motorcycle
MG team
motorcycle!
SQUAD
L MOTORCYCLE PLATOON
gout Car patrol
=latoon
3 Daimler Dingo
Regular
' Territorial
SO points
Option
• Replace MG on Command Daimler Dingo with
Bovs anti-tank rifle for +5 points.
SUBALTERN 1
L SUBALTERN ।
L SERGEANT 1
L CORPORAL!
Patrols are Reconnaissance Platoons.
Command
Daimler Dingo
Daimler Dingo
Daimler Dingo
. :le battalions have two platoons of Daimler scout
>re commonly referred to as the ‘Dingo’. The patrols
imarily used for reconnaissance and liaison, and the
;celled in both these roles.
HQ SCOUT 'I
CAR I
L SCOUT CAR PATROL

I
127
OQF 2 pdr gun
OQF 2 pdr gun
OQF 2 pdr gun
SERGEANT 1
L ANTI-TANK SECTION 1
L ANTI-TANK SECTION 1
ANTI-TANK PLATOON. ROYAL ARTILLERY

PLATOON
SUBALTERN
^UBALJERfT!
Option
Add 15 cwt trucks for +5 points for the platoon.
British Machine-gun Platoons can fire bombardments
using their machine-guns. As they have no Anti-tank or
Firepower rating, they cannot Bail Out armoured vehicles
or Destroy teams in Bulletproof Cover, but can still Pin
Down platoons with one hit.
Command Rifle team
L HQ SECTION
L SERGEANT
L SERGEANT 1
J j.h corps has its own specialist machine-gun battalions.
These were assigned to divisions as needed and then com-
panies loaned out to each infantry brigade, which can then
loan platoons of four Vickers Mk I medium machine-guns
to battalions as required. The Vickers machine-gun is the
perfect weapon for the indirect-fire tactics perfected during
the Great War. It has proven its reputation for foolproof reli-
al i ity, and being water-cooled will fire for hours without
jamming.
Vickers HMG
Vickers HMG
Vickers HMG
Vickers HMG
MACHINE-GUN 1
SECTION |
MACHINE-GUN
SECTION
l MACHINE-GUN PLATOON
Anti-tank Platoon, Royal Artillery
Platoon
HQ Section with:
•4 2 pdr
2 2 pdr
Ф regular	; Territorial
180 points	135 points
90 points	70 points
Option
Add 15 cwt trucks for +5 points for the platoon.
^UBA^ER
^ubaherT
Each division in the BEF has its own Anti-tank Regiment
from the Royal Artillery. These have four batteries, each
with twelve anti-tank guns in three platoons. These were
positioned across the divisional front to prevent armoured
breakthroughs.
Command Rifle team
' HQ SECTION
L SERGEANT
The anti-tank gun used was the excellent Ordnance QF 2 pdr,
a high-velocity 40mm weapon capable of penetrating any
Gentian tank at combat ranges. Once emplaced, the 2 pdr
gun’s uniquely-designed three-legged carriage allowed it
a 160-degree traverse and provided excellent stability. The
OQF 2 pounder was considered one of the best anti-armour
weapons of its day, easily outperforming its German coun-
rpart, the 3.7cm РаКЗб gun.
OQF 2 pdr gun
128
British
ARMOURED CAR platoon
Platoon
loc Platoon
Platoon
HQ Section with:
' Regular
3 Morris CS9
105 points
L HQ ARMOURED CAR
3 I .ОС Squads
[ HQ SECTION]
[ CORPORAL
Hurricane I
Command Rifle team
Hurricane I
Hurricane I
25 points
FLIGHT
Hurricane gave a good account of itself during the Battle
for France, before its finest hour—the Battle of Britain.
O Divisional support
Hired Car Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
...in weeks of the invasion of Poland, the 12'1’ Royal
_crs (Prince of Wales) arrived in France. Then, on
..ay 1940, it was the first British regiment to cross the
n border.
ting in their Morris CS9 armoured cars, the
.ancers covered the withdrawal of the British troops so
t it the commander of the BEF, Lord Gort, wrote that
>ut the Twelfth Lancers only a small part of the Army
a have reached Dunkirk.
65 points
with a German breakthrough and absolutely no troops
tect them, officers in the Line of Communications (ab-
;cd LOC, but spelled out ‘el oh see) organised labour
 and reinforcements into improvised battalions. These
.. lacked the power to do much more than delay the
g German reconnaissance elements, but played a useful
. ’".trding and demolishing bridges to cover the retreat.
forces were hastily scraped together with whatever men
. 'qiiipment could be found, with no time for trainingas
.it. LOC Platoons are rated as Confident Conscript.
air Support-
sporadic Air support
Hurricane I is a dedicated air superiority fighter. It can
be used for Fighter Interception anti cannot be used for
nind Attack.
loyal Air Force of 1940 was designed to bomb Germany
submission and lacked aircraft suited to supporting
„nd operations. However, they did their best to keep
. German Air Force from attacking ground forces. I he
British fighter in France was the Hawker Hurricane.
iitc being slower than the German Bf 109E, the Hawker
Territorial
SUBALTERN 1
^UBAHERN^
Command Morris CS9
L SERGEANT 1
Morris CS9
.ARMOURED CAR-1
[CORPORAL
Morris CS9
[ARMOURED CAR
L ARMOURED CAR PLATOON
SUBALTERN
QUBAOER^
Rifle team
mw
Rifle team
LOC SQUAD 1
L CORPORAL 1
Rifle team
Rifle team
HOCSQUA^^
LOC PLATOON i
[ CORPORAL 1
Rifle team
Rifle team
LOC SQUAD
FLIGHT LIEUTENANT
^MGHWEHTTNAHT
Hurricane I
129

ROYAL ARTILLERY
L MAJOR !
Staff team
L HQ TROOP ।
У
t
HI
Command
Rifle team
лк
Observer 15cwttruck
Rifle team
CAPTAIN
CAPTAIN
L HQ SECTION
L SERGEANT
L SERGEANT 1
Command
Rifle team
CAPTAIN
CAPTAIN
Observer 15cwttruck
Rifle team
L HQ SECTION!
L SERGEANT
L SERGEANT !
Field gun
Field gun
Field gun
Field gun
Field gun
L GUN SECTION,
Field gun
L GUN SECTION
L GUN TROOP,
Command Rifle team
^sergeant 1
Field gun
Field gun
Field gun
Field gun
L GUN SECTION!
L GUN SECTION !
L GUN SECTION
L GUN TROOP!
L HQ SECTION!
L SERGEANT
L GUN SECTION 1
L GUN TROOP!
FIELD BATTERY. ROYAL ARTILLERY
I CAPTAIN
^AHAI^
Field gun
Field gun
Although a Field Battery, Royal Artillery or Royal Horse Artillery Battery is a single Support choice, each Gun Troop operates as a
separate platoon with its own Command team. The Staff team is an Independent team.
Although they count as separate platoons for all other purposes, a Field Battery, Royal Artillery or Royal Horse Artillery Battery
deploys as a single platoon, all at the same time. For example, all three Gun Troops are treated as a single platoon when calculat-
ing the number of platoons held in Reserve.
Note: The third Gun Troop does not have an Observer team. If the battery has OQF 4.5” howitzers, they will be from this troop
and do not have an Observer team.
130
British
FIELD BATTERY, ROYAL ARTILLERY—*—
PLATOON
		ф REGULAR 875 points 590 points 300 points 160 points	TERRITORIAL 675 point* 455 points 230 points 125 points
3 Gun Troops with 2 Gun Troops with 1 Gun Troop with	12 OQF 18/25 pdr 8 OQF 18/25 pdr 4 OQF 18/25 pdr 2 OQF 18/25 pdr		
3 Gun Troops with 2 Gun Troops with	8 OQF 18 pdr and 4 OQF 4.5” 4 OQF 18 pdr and 4 OQF 4.5”	-	605 points 390 points
2 Gun Troops with 1 Gun Troop with	8 OQF 18 pdr 4 OQF 18 pdr 2 OQF 18 pdr	-	445 points 225 points 120 points
OPTIONS
•	Add 15 cwt trucks and Quad tractors for +5 points
per Gun Troop.
•	Replace all 15 cwt trucks carrying Observer Rifle
teams with OP Scout Carriers for +5 points
per carrier.
leld Batteries, Royal Artillery may not be deployed in
.' nbush.
ROYAL HORSE ARTILLERY BATTERY
	*
	vi Regular
2 Gun Troops with 8 OQF 18/25 pdr	670 points
1 Gun Troop with 4 OQF 18/25 pdr	340 points
2 OQF 18/25 pdr	185 points
2 Gun Troops with 8 OQF 18 pdr	655 points
2 Gun Troops with 4 OQF 18 pdr and 4 OQF 4.5”	575 points
1 Gun Troop with 4 OQF 18 pdr	335 points
2 OQF 18 pdr	180 points
TERRITORIAL
OPTIONS
•	Add 15 cwt trucks and Quad tractors for +5 points
per Gun Troop.
•	Replace all 15 cwt trucks carrying Observer Rifle
teams with OP Scout Carriers for +5 points
per carrier.
•	Replace all Observer Rifle teams and their 15 cwt
trucks with OP Light Mk VI В tanks for +30 points
per tank.
4 Royal Horse Artillery Battery is organised the same as
.- Field Battery, Royal Artillery.
О Divisional Support
Batteries of the Royal Artillery and Royal Horse Artillery
fought in support of the BEF throughout their brief
campaign in Belgium and France in 1940. In the delaying
actions during the withdrawal to Dunkirk, gunners were
often forced to fire over open sights at German recon-
naissance troops and Panzers trying to cut of the retreating
British troops. When they did, they gave a good account
of themselves.
Royal Horse Artillery Batteries are rated as Fearless
Veteran and are Horse Artillery Platoons (see page 46 of the
rulebook).
RELUCTANT
CONSCRIPT
[ CONFIDENT	TRAINED ’
FEARLESS	VETERAN
Royal Horse Artillery Batteries may not be deployed in
A mbush.
BRITISH ARSENAL
													
L* 1 M 1 r '	L		TANK TEAMS										
	Name Weapon Light tanks Light Tank Mk VI В Vickers 0.5" MG L ,ght Tank Mk VI C He a 15mm gun Cruiser Tanks		Mobility	Front Range	ROF Ha If-tracked	1 16740cm	3 Half-tracked	1 16740cm	2	Armour Side	Top Anti-tank Firepower 1	1 3	5+ 1	1 5	5+			Equipment and Notes Co-ax MG. Co-ax MG. Broadside, Tally Ho.						
	A 9 Cruiser Mk I OQF 2 pdr gun		Fully-tracked	1 21"!60 cm	2		0	1 7	4+		Co-ax MG, Two Deck-turret MG, Unre Broadside, No HE, Tally Flo.					liable.	
в Cruiser Mk I CS OQF 3.7" mortar Firing Bombardments			Fully-tracked	1 /(F’74O<:w	2 407100cm		0	1		Co-ax MG, Two Deck-turret MG, Unreliable. Smoke only, Broadside, Tally Ho. Smoke bombardment only.						
	A10 Cruiser Mk I] OQF 2 pdr gun		Fully-tracked	2 24760cm	2		2	1 7	•? +		Co-ax MG, Slow tank, Unreliable. Broadside, No HE, Tally Ho.						
A13 Cruiser Mk III OQF 2 pdr gun			Fully-tracked	1 2-i 760cm	2		0	1 7	4 +		Co-ax MG, Fast tank, Unreliable. Broadside, No HE, Tally Ho.						
.1 г 1	A13 Mk II Cruiser Mk IV OQF 2 pdr gun Infantry Tanks		Fully-tracked	2 2-4760cm	2		1 1		Co-ax MG, Fast tank, Unreliable. Broadside, No HE, Tally Ho.						
Al 1 Matilda Al I Matilda (0.5’' Vickers 0.5"MG		MG)	Fully-tracked	6 Fully-tracked	6 16740cm	3		5	1 5	1 J	5+		MG, Unrel Unreliable,		iable, Very slov Very slow tank		’ tank.		
	Al2 Matilda Senior OQF 2 pdr gun Reconnaissance		Fully-tracked	7 24 760cm	J		6	2 7	1 +		Co-ax MG, Slow tank, Unreliable. No HE.						
	Bren Carrier With Boys anti-tank rifle Scout Carrier Boys anti-tank rifle		Half-tracked	0 16740cm	2 Half-tracked	0 16740cm	2		0	0 t	5+ 0	0 4	5+		Hull MG. Hull-mounted. Hull MG. Hull-mounted.						
	Morris CS9	Wheeled	0 Boys anti-tank rille	16740cm	2 O.4iruler Dingo	Jeep	I Vi r/1 Boys anti-tank rifle	16 740cm	2 Vehicle Machine-guns				0	0 4	5+ 0	0 4	5+		Turret Front MG. Hull MG. Hull-mounted.						
Vehicle MG			16740cm	3		6		ROF 1 if other weapons fin						
О			1						• * 4	—	J		
к .				d		a							
												J	
GUN TEAMS
BRITISH О
5
TRUCKS
Anti-tank
Weapon
To Hit
Firepower
AIRCRAFT
Weapon
:kers HMG
Firing bombardments
Notes
Fighter Interception only (p. 129).
iter Mk IV lankr
ng bombardments
3.7” gun
mortar
ch kiss 25mm gun
*QF 2 pdr gun
к ‘F 18 pdr gun
icing bombardments
• JF 4.5” howitzer
ing bombardments
Mobility	Range	ROF	Anti-tank	Firepower	Notes
Man-packed	24760cm	6	0	6	ROF 2 when pinned down.
	40’7100cm	-	-	-	
Man-packed	32780cm	-		6	Smoke bombardment.
Light	16740cm	3	6	5+	Gun shield, No HE.
Medium	24760cm	3	7	4+	Gun shield. No HE, Turntable.
Heavy	24’760cm	2	8	3+	Gun shield, Smoke, Turn cable
	72’7180cm	-	3	6+	Smoke bombardment.
Heavy	24760cm	1	7	2+	Gun shield, Smoke.
	64’7160cm	-	4	3+	Smoke bombardment.
Heavy	24’760cm	2	8	3+	Gun shield, Smoke, Turntable.
	727180cm		4	5+	Smoke bombardment.
Immobile	407100cm	2	13	3+	Heavy anti-aircraft, Turntable.
	INFANTRY TEAMS			
Tram	Range	ROF Anti-tank Firepower Notes		
< team	4”/10cm	I	1	6		
lit . .. am	16’74 0cm	1	2	6		
". MG team	16740cm	2	2	6		
V nm	16’740cm	3	2	6		
. _ < Mortar team	16740cm	1	1	4+	Smoke, Can fire over friendly teams.	
• -мп к Rifle team	16’740cm	1	4	5+	Tank Assault 3.	
. - -im		cannot shoot	Moves as a Heavy Gun ream.	
				
L	TRANSPORT TEAMS				
tie		Mobility	Armour Front Side Top	Equipment and Notes	
15 cwt truck	Wheeled	-			
г 1СГОГ	Wheeled	-	-	-
mt Carrier	Half-tracked	0	0	0
UA I OS tank 0
ьрт'пзн Special rules
These special rules reflect the dogged determination of the British soldier despite loss and adversity. These special rules
are the standard rules from the rulebook (on pages 171 to 175) with some additions. Not all of the special rules in the
rulebook apply as the British Army has not yet developed some of the equipment it would later use to good effect.
British forces in Blitzkrieg cannot use the Night Attack Special rule on page 171 of the rulebook as they made no night
attacks during the French campaign.
DOCTRINE
British Bulldog
Some 200 years ago, a French general remarked that the
British troops his infantry attacked appeared to have taken
root and be stuck to the ground. They refused to run away
when other troops would have. Nothing has changed and
British soldiers still have a reputation for tenacity and stub-
bornly refusing to give up ground that they have taken.
British platoons may re-roll failed Motivation Tests to
Co:	. attack in assaults.
Carry On, Sergeant
The backbone of the British Army is its Sergeants. Many a
new subaltern has been advised to let the Sergeant run d e
platoon and to follow his advice. If the officer is killed, the
Sergeant is more than able to keep the platoon fighting.
A leaderless British platoon may Launch Assaults. They do not
have to Break Off, hut may Counterattack if they pass their
Motivation Test.
GUARDS
’ The five Regiments of Foot Guards—the Grenadier Guards,
the Coldstream Guards, the Scots Guards, the Irish Guards,
and the Welsh Guards—are the most prestigious infantry
I units in the British Army. Their standards are very high in all
re j 4,-cts. Their most outstanding quality on the field of battle
is their steadiness.
Guards forces use all of the standard British special rules. In
, addition they have their own Unflappable special rule.
UNFLAPPABLE
The Guards are well known as being ‘unflappable’, retaining
their discipline when things go wrong under circumstances
where other units might get themselves in a ‘flap’ and become
unsettled.
Guards Platoons fight to the last and may re-roll any failed
Platoon Morale Checks. Your Company Command team may
re-roll Company Morale Checks.
SCOTTISH
Ah Tough the use of bagpipes on the field of battle was
banned between the wars, numerous pipers ignored orders
anti piped the attack home often wearing their kilt.
Scottish forces use all of the standard British special rules. In
addition they have their own Bagpipes special rule.
Bagpipes
Baj pipers have piped Scottish regiments into battle for
centuries. The tales of pipers walking through a hail of fire,
pipes wailing, abound. Even the deal h of rhe officer they are
acc< inp inying will not stop them.
Scottish Rifle Companies have a Bagpiper 2iC Command
team. If a Bagpiper 2iC Command team is Destroyed by enemy
shooting, roll a die.
•	On a roll of 4+, the piper’s music inspires the surviving
team members to keep going and the team is returned to
play immediately.
•	Otherwise, the piper and his officer meet a heroic end.
Any hits on the Bagpiper 2iC Command i. am do not count
towards Pinning Down the platoon.
Opel Blitz
British
ARTILLERY
.annot shoot when Moving at the Double.
TANKS
In
twelve-gun organisation of the early-war Field Battery,
 I Artillery with its mixed gun types is quite different from
‘'r iter all 25pdr eight-gun battery covered by the rulebook. To
T: the changes we wrote the Twelve-gun Battery, Combined
bardment, and Mixed Battery rules to replace the Eight-
Battery, Rounds On the Ground, and Mike Target rules in
lebook.
Twelve-gun Battery
ish artillery batteries have three semi-independent
-I ps. These are organised as two main troops and a ‘swing’
p to thicken the fire of the other troops as needed. The
main troops deploy near the battery staff team, while
. tnird ‘swing’ troop deploys further afield to reduce their
erability to counterbattery fire.
 attery’s Staff team is an Independent team which can join
Gun Troop as required. However, any Gun Troop within
. j and Distance of the battery's Staff team, whether or not
aff team joins it, counts as having a Staff team (allowing
..e the AU Guns Repeat! rule for instance).
Troops that are not within Command Distance of the Staff
can use the Combined Bombardment special rule to co-
 their artillery fire with the other Gun Troops.
Combined Bombardment
j First World War, British gunners quickly learned that
tk an immense amount of heavy artillery to desttoy dug-
itantry, more than they could muster. What they found
. d better was smothering the target with lighter shells to
the defenders down before the infantry assaulted them.
Tally Ho!
ish doctrine requires cruiser tanks to either remain
„aled or be moving when under fire. Under no circttm-
. , should they halt in the open. For this to work, the
g have to be capable of tir mg accurately on the move.
facilitate accurate shooting on the move, cruiser tanks
- high-speed power traverss ss stc tn ; Capable of spinning
the turret through a full circle  1 seconds and 1 s. y-
ted guns. Ute guns have no elevating controls. Instead
'riu c inner aims the gun using his shoulder, making them
curate on the move at short ranges.
Ho! means that the listed weapon does not suffer any
to its ROF for shooting on the move at rangt > up to
rn. In effect, it is assumed to be firing on the move at
Any Gun Troop within Command Distance of the battery's Staff
team may act as the base of a combined bombardment. Any
other Gun Troops from the battery (whether within Command
Distance of the Staff team or not) may join the base troop before
rolling to Range In and fire as a single combined Artillery
Battery with a Staff team.
If the number of weapons in the combined battery is:
•	Five or less, use the normal artillery rules.
•	Six to eight, you may either:
•	Use a double-width (12"/30cm by 6”/15cm) Artillery
Template to determine which teams can be hit, or
•	Use a normal Artillery Template, but re-roll all failed
rolls To Hit.
• Nine to Twelve, use a double-width (12 ”/30cm by 6 /15crn)
Artillery Template, but re-roll all failed rolls To Hit.
О Special Rules
Mixed Battery
There were not enough OQF 18/25 pdr guns for all of the
BEF’s artillery regiments, so most of the Territorial regi-
ments in France had old OQF 18 pdr guns and OQF 4.5”
howitzers from the First World War.
If thr. e or more OQF 4.5” howitzers fire in a Combined
Bombardment, then all of the guns and howitzers firing count as
having an Anti-tank rating of 4 and a Firepower rating of 5+.
If only one or two OQF 4.5" howitzers fire, the Concentrated
Bombardment use < the Mixed Bombardments rule on page 133
of the rulebook, ' - all л rap.-. firing will count as OQF 18 pdr
guns rate J ' tth.	-ik of 3 and a Firepower of 6.
Broadside
The British view tank battles as land-based naval battles with
the ‘cruiser’ squadrons steaming out to battle enemy tanks
while the other arms wait for their fate to be decided. Cruise :
tanks ‘steam’ in naval formations such as Tine abreast’ and
charge through the enemy lines firing ‘broadsides’.
Only the turret facing is used in determining whether a shot ;
the front o, the side armour of a tank with a weapon that u.c >
the Tally Ho i ule. The facing of the hull is irrelevant.
Ihr Broadside ride does not apply when the tanks mow At
the Doublt .> they always march with their turrets pointing
fot wai 'is.
Deck Turret MG
I l.e many tanks <>l its era, the A9 Cruiser Mk I has two
machine-gun turrets mounted or. the front of the hull  !. k.
Gju - mounted deck tu hat,: an all- mmd />.of fire,
except where their rotation is blocked by the vehicle* >uper-
sri ш tore in on >r >' tut rets.
LONDON
When the Germans invaded rhe Low Countries on 10 May
1940. France had four armies and the British Expeditionary
Force (BEF) covering the Belgian border. While rhe Seventh
Army hastened across Belgium to assist the Netherlands,
the BEF, First, Second and Ninth Armies swung up to
the line of the Dyle and Meuse Rivers. To the French, the
greatest threat was in the ’Gembloux Gap’ between rhe two
rivers. The Cavalry Corps of two light mechanised divi-
sions was sent to cover Gembloux until First Army was
in position. In the largest tank battle of the campaign the
Cavalry Corps clashed with the two armoured divisions of
Hoepner’s armoured corps at Hannut on 12 and 13 May.
The French ranks indicted considerably more losses on
the Germans rhan they took in the rwo-day battle before
breaking offand falling back behind First Army.
Unfortunately this success was negated by German suc-
cesses on the Meuse. Here two armoured corps under
Reinhardt and Guderian pushed through the lightly-
defended Ardennes Forest, reaching the Meuse near Sedan.
The French Ninth Army guarding this sector was largely-
composed of reserve divisions guarding impossibly wide
sectors. The Germans stormed across the Meuse on 14 May.
enlarged their bridgehead on 15 May, and then proceeded
to race across Belgium destroying the Ninth Army' and
cutting the First Army and BEF off in the process. The
Germans faced only scattered resistance, the strongest
being a daring, but isolated counterattack by General De
Gaulle’s armoured division at Montcornet on 18 May.
[t
BO
ST. VALERY-EN-CAUX
Rivers
ROUEN
National Borders
Belgium Front Line
British Front Line
French Front Line
German Armoured Corps
French Armies
French Counterattacks
By 20 May the Germans had reached the coast. The French
command was stunned, and lacking a reserve, unable to
coordinate a counterattack to rescue the trapped First Army
and BEF. As the trapped armies continued to fall back, the
only option left was evacuation by sea. The French and
British navies rescued 110,000 French troops, who were
returned to France and hastily rebuilt into new divisions to
defend the line of the Somme.
The French were determined to restore the honour of
France and implemented new ‘hedgehog’ tactics of all-
round defence along the Somme River as well as coun-
terattacks to reduce the German bridgeheads across the
river. These attacks were bravely' and skilfully pressed
home, but generally too weak and too poorly supported
to achieve much. When the German Army turned south
acro.ss the Somme on 5 lune, the new hedgehog tactics
at first appeared to be doing the trick. Stubborn French
resistance prevented the Germans from breaking out of
their bridgeheads anywhere but Abbeville. There Hoth's
armoured corps burst through, dislocating the French
defence and the remaining armoured corps broke through.
Once again, the French lack of reserves meant that they
could not seal the breach. Out of touch, the French high
command ordered new defensive lines formed on each
river, only to find that the Germans were already across the
river. Reduced to ordering troops to stand and fight to the
end where they stood, the French generals lost control of
the battle, and ultimately, of France.
36
0 KM
00



rentf) Forces

France suffered badly in the First World War. It’s casualty rate
as a proportion of the population was by far the highest for
the Western powers. This left an abiding determination not to
face the same experience again. When the Treaty of Versailles
that had crippled Germany began to fail in the early 1930‘s
France responded by building the Maginot Line, a monu-
mental line of fortifications facing the German border. This
fit well with the philosophy of the Armee de Terre, the Ground
Army (as opposed to the Armee de I Air, the Air Army), which
had drawn the conclusion from the war that a good defence
would always beat a good offence. Having satisfied themselves
of this, the French commanders then failed to ensure a good
defence, developing a plan that left their army extended across
a wide front in hastily-occupied positions with absolutely
no reserves. When the Germans broke through, the French
failure to consider high-tempo mobile operations left them
scrambling, trying to string together new hastily-occupied
front lines without the reserves to cope with breakthroughs.
CAVALRY AND ARMOURED DIVISIONS
Like Britain, France divides its tanks into two
distinct classes: cavalry tanks and infantry
tanks. The cavalry divisions' role is to cover
the infantry in the opening days ol the war as
they take up positions, and to exploit victory
in open-field battles (should such a thing ever happen). The
cavalry combines tanks, armoured cars and motorised infantry
in a mobile division capable of fighting a battle in depth, but
lacking combat power to hold ground.
f RELUCTANT CONSCRIPT j
1 CONFIDENT TRAINED "l
CONFIDENT
VETERAN
The infantry's tanks have a different role.
Their task is to accompany the infantry
across No Man's Land at a walking pace.
Most tanks are in independent battalions,
but four armoured divisions group most of
the heavy’ tanks into massive battering rams to be assigned to
infantry divisions as needed.
The well-trained tank crews have a Motivation rating of
Confident and a Skill rating ofTraincd.
ACTIVE DIVISIONS
The core of France's peacetime army is its
thirty active divisions. These arc manned by
the latest batch of conscripts—younger men
with up-to-date training. Despite a general
live-and-lct-live attitude to the war, they
RELUCTANT
CONFIDENT
FEARLESS
I ONSCF.IPi
TRAINED
VETERAN
unready for the pace of a modem, mecha-
nised war lets them down. The poilu (literally
‘hairy’ or ‘shaggy’), as the French called their
soldiers, was generally determined to save
France if he could. Active divisions (marked
were patriotic and responded to the German invasion w’hen it
came with an outraged determination to stop le Boche just as
their fathers had done. Unfortunately’ a command structure
with the infantry helmet badge j, ) have a Motivation
rating of Confident. Their training gives them a Skill rating
ofTraincd.
0 RESERVE DIVISIONS I
Having completed their year-long military
service. French conscripts were placed in the
reserve. When the war began, all of the reserv-
ists were called up and formed into divisions.
The younger, more recently trained soldiers
RELUCTANT
CONFIDENT
FEARLESS
were formed into a В series of active divisions, while the older
men whose training was less current were formed into reserve
divisions. The reserve divisions were last in line for equipment
CONSCRIPT
TRAINED
VETERAN
and were short of everything from officers to
rifles. Knowing this, the soldiers were not
optimistic about their chances of stopping
the Germans unaided. This gives Reserve
Divisions (marked with a helmet badge on
a WWI Sky Blue background J ) a Reluctant Motivation
rating, although their training and more recent experience
leaves them with a Skill rating of Trained.
COLONIAL DIVISIONS
France’s empire spanned the world from
West Africa to Syria, Indochina, and the
Pacific Ocean. To help police and defend
the empire, France raised divisions in the
colonics. Most came from the colonics of
CONSCRIPT
TRAINED
VETERAN
RELUCTANT
CONFIDENT
FEARLESS
troops, particularly the native troops, showed
an aggressiveness and determination that was
reinforced by tales of Germans executing
non-white troops out of hand. Their feats
of arms have earned French colonial troops
Morocco and Tunisia, although battalions from as far away as	(marked with the crescent moon a Fearless Motivation
Tahiti and New Caledonia played their part. Many colonial	rating, while their training gives them a Trained Skill rating.
d (terman t.inks   issed the 1\ dish frontier, Colonel
' de Gaulle, commander of the tanks of the Fifth
}.  v the German success in this campaign as . indicat-
_ c theories outlined in his book, The Army oj the Future,
hed five years earlier. The forceful expression of his
ons on the failings of the French hierarchy and the need
 more French armoured divisions antagonised the upper
ions of the French military.
? this, on 15 May 1940, five days after the German
v swept through the Ardennes, de Gaulle, now at 49
oungest General in the French Army, was appointed to
iiand the 4'”“ Division Cuirassee, an armoured division
in the process of forming. On 18 May de Gaulle took
. ’ i.ti ative, ordering an attack with just a battalion of Char
- bis heavy tanks, and two battalions of Renault R-35 light
. He hoped an attack using his doctrine of surprise and
1 movement would throw the Germans off their stride
slow the German advance. His bold attack captured
ntcornet after an advance of 15 miles (25km). However,
man artillery took its toll and his force retired to its start
Characteristics
cral de Gaulle is a Warrior and a Higher Command
sport team rated as Fearless Veteran. De Gaulle is
ted motorcycle.
may field de Gaulle in any Compagnie de Combat for
points. Light Tank Platoons in a force joined by de
die must have R-35 tanks.
SPECIAL RULES
or France: Any platoon joined by De Gaulle always passes
Motivation Tests on a roll of 3+.
\rtack: De Gaulle’s response to the crisis of 1940 was to
’. the Germans wherever and whenever he found them,
may deploy de Gaulle anywhere in your deployment
г^Щццэ
line near I .ion v. ith aiuund 100 German prisoners Althiiugh
Ins attack had little overall effect. the encounter with French
h. .o / tanks did scare the German High Command, leading
to an order to halt the German spearhead until the infantry
could Latch up and protect their flanks.
idle 4 Division Cutrassee were then ordered to Abbeville
to reduce the German bridgehead across the Somme. Once
again, de Gaulle saw the opportunity to take the enemy by
surprise. His tired troops and other hastily assembled forma-
tions attacked once again. The French took the Germans by
surprise and gained their initial objectives but lost tanks at a
rate they could not sustain, being forced to halt. There was
no doubting the valour of the French, but when the Germans
organised a strong counterattack, the fighting became des-
perate. The division held on to the ground it gained until
relieved on May 30 by the British 51s1 (Highland) Division
that had been rushed over from the Maginot Line.
When France fell de Gaulle decided to carry on the fight
from outside territorial France, becoming the leader of the
Free French forces fighting in Africa.
area before deploying any other troops. If you do this, you
may attempt to advance each Light and Battle Tank Platoon
that is deployed entirely within 12’730cm of de Gaulle as
you deploy it.
Roll a die immediately after deploying each platoon:
•	Onascoreof4+, the platoon moves up to 8”/20cm towards
to the enemy coming no closer than 12”/30cm to any
enemy team.
•	On any other roll, the platoon remains where it was
deployed, and no further platoons may attempt to
advance in this way.
Once you deploy any other type of platoon, you may no
longer attempt to advance your Light and Battle Tank
Platoons.
141
(Tank Company)
DMMMf Hi j
Medium Combat Platoon
к
Fusiliers-Vottiqeurs Platoon
о
>
Compagnie de Combat
COMBAT COMPANY
HEADQUARTERS
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
French companies can have British troops (marked O') as support options. Remember that
these platoons retain their own rules and ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see page 183
of the rulebook).
ARMOUR
ARMOUR
Battle Tank Platoon
Light Tank Platoon
INFANTRY
ARMOUR
Battle Tank Platoon
Light Tank Platoon
ANTI-TANK
ARMOUR
Battle Tank Platoon
Light Tank Platoon
ARMOUR
Light Tank Platoon bk

ARTILLERY

ANTI-AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT
Light Combat Platoon
Deep Reconnaissance Platoon ’bkf
Chasseurs Portes Platoon
Fusiliers Portes Platoon
Divisional 47mm
Anti-tank Platoon
Self-propelled 47mm
Anti-tank Platoon
All-terrain Towed
75mm Artillery Battery
All-terrain Towed
105mm Artillery Battery
25mm Anti-aircraft
Defence Platoon
&

Jill IIIIB
142
О
у
ENCH О
Company HQ
Headquarters
Battle Tank platoon -
Platoon
LIGHT TANK PLATOON - '
PLATOON
VETERAN
HEADQUARTERS
3 Renault Char B-1 bi*
550 points
3 Renault R-35
205 points
3 Hotchkiss 11-35 or 11-39
(1 long and 2 short guns)
3 Hotchkiss 11 35 or H 39
(3 long guns)
f RELUCTANT CONSCR1P
/•/tcirirtfctT TTIilbirn
CONFIDENT
FEARLESS
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
Trie concentrated light and heavy infantry tanks of a Division Cuirassee, or Armoured
Cavalry Division, are a potent breakthrough force. A Compagnie de Combat (pronounced
kohn-pan-y de kohn-ba) is rated as Confident Trained.
I Renault R-35
40 points
1 Hotchkiss H-35 or H-39 (SA-38)	i	_	< 65 points
1 Renault Char B-1 bis	185 points 1
.4 Company de Combat must have a Light or Battle
Tank Platoon equipped with the same type of tank as
the Company HQ.
CAPITAINE
.CAPLWNE^
Company Command tank
L COMPANY HQ 1
L COMPAGNIE DE COMBAT HQ
COMBAT PLATOONS
lhe Char В was nicknamed ‘Stahlkoloss’ (Steel Colossus)
the Germans for its size, thick armour and combat
; iwer. Oddly, the driver of the Char В aims the hull
: in by swivelling the whole tank, and fires it as well—
; though there is a loader to assist.
. . vault Char B-1 bis tanks use the Multiple Guns rule
. page 85 of the rulebook. When it stops to fire its guns,
: Renault Char B-1 bis can fire both its 47mm turret gun
d its 75mm hull gun. However, one of the two must fire
: ROF 1.
125 points
160 points
. : Battalions de Chars de Combat (BCC) were equipped
Renault R-35 tanks, although two had Hotchkiss H-35
>. Likewise, the Divisions Cuirassee (DC) had Hotchkiss
-: tanks. The French initially equipped their light tanks
- -he old 37mm SA-18 gun used in the First World War.
Sort gun has poor anti-tank capability. Aware that
would face large numbers of German tanks, a longer
SA-38 gun was developed, and by May 1940 they
enough long guns to rearm the platoon commander’s

LIEUTENANT
ndEUTENANT
Command Renault Char B-1 bis
L HQ SECTION,
LSOUS LIEUTENANT
SOUS LIEUTENANT 1
Renault Char B-1 bis
Renault Char B-1 bis
TANK SECTION 1
L TANK SECTION
l BATTLE TANK PLATOON
LIEUTENANT
Teutenant^
Command tank
. HQ SECTION,
. SOUS OFFICER. )
. TANK SECTION
L CAPORAL 1
Tank
L TANK SECTION ’
L LIGHT TANK PLATOON
tank in units equipped with Hotchkiss tanks. As new tanks
replaced casualties, the numbers available rose considerably
in June for the battles on the Somme.

(Tank Company)
CscadiWi <fe Combm
Combat Squadron
HEADQUARTERS
ARMOUR
5
О
Company HQ
ARMOUR
1
ARMOUR
H'ft/i О
Som
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
French companies can have British troops (marked О ) as support options. Remember that
these platoons retain their own rules and ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see page 183
of the rulebook).
INFANTRY

Fusiliers Portes Platoon
Fusiliers Motocydtstes Platoon
Rifle Platoon
5
О
E
1X1
5
Medium Combat Platoon
Medium Combat Platoon
light Combat Platoon
ARMOUR
Medium Combat Platoon
Light Combat Platoon
Medium Combat Platoon
Light Combat Platoon
ANTI-TANK
СДАЛ
Cavalry 25mm Anti-tank
Gun Platoon

RECONNAISSANCE
Deep Reconnaissance Platoon
Reconnaissance Platoon
ARTILLERY
All-terrain Towed
,	75mm Artillery Battery
All	Ail-terrain Towed
a	105mm Artillery Battery
t
AIRCRAFT
Air Support
Company HQ
*
Headquarters
1 Hotchkiss H-35 or H-39 (long gun)	65 points
I Somua S-35	105 points
An Escadron de Combat must have a Combat Platoon
with the same type of tank as the Company HQ.
CAPITAINE1
FTapfmin^
Company Command tank
L COMPANY HQ 1

lESCADRON DE COMBAT HQ
COMBAT PLATOONS
MEDIUM COMBAT PLATOON -
Platoon
5 Somua S-35
4 Somua S-35
3 Somua S-35
520 points
115 points
310 points
 Somua S-35 (pronounced saw-mwa) is considered by
, to be the premier medium tank of the thirties with a
sic combination of speed, range, armament and armour.
a result of the battles at Hannut and Gembloux where
mua tanks inflicted heavy losses on German tanks, Panzer
its were given orders to take on Hotchkiss tanks but to
id long-range engagements with the dangerous S-35.
LIEUTENANT
^JEUTTNAN^
Command Somua S-35
L HQ SECTION ।
SOUS OFFICIER 1
LCOMBAT SECTION^
Somua S-35 Somua S-35
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
LCOMBAT SECTION^
Somua S-35 Somua S-35
L MEDIUM COMBAT PLATOON
Light Combat platoon-*
*
Platoon
5 Hotchkiss H-35 or H-39 (1 long and 4 short guns) 4 Hotchkiss H-35 or H-39 (1 long and 3 short guns) 3 Hotchkiss H-35 or H-39 (1 long and 2 short guns)	250 point 205 points 160 points
3 Hotchkiss H-35 or H-39 (3 long guns)	205 points
LIEUTENANT 1
^JEUTFNAN^S
Command H-35 or H-39
L HQ SECTION 1
L. SOUS OFFICIER
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
H-35 or H-39	H-35 or H-39

H-35 or H-39	H-35 or H-39
France’s light mechanised divisions, the first two were
tripped with the Hotchkiss H-35 light tank, while the
d used the re-engined and updated H-39. After years of
paration, the divisions were at full strength for the battles
Belgium in May. There were five tanks in each platoon,
and the platoon commander’s tanks were armed with the
vg 37mm SA-38 gun.
LCOMBAT SECTION
LCOMBAT SECTION^
L LIGHT COMBAT PLATOON
After Dunkirk two new light mechanised divisions were
formed with brand new tanks. The urgent need for them in
the front line prevented them from being fully equipped,
so although most tanks had the longer-barrelled gun, com-
panies were small with just three tanks in each platoon.
(Mechanised company)
Company HQ
Headquarters
Option
Add 60mm Mortar Section for +25 points
DIVISIONAL SUPPORT PLATOONS
NFANTRY
a
Fusiliers Mortar Platoon
Medium Combat Platoon
Air Support
Light Combat Ptatoon
HEADQUARTERS
CAPITAINE
Company HQ
30 points
L CAPITAINE'
L COMPANY HQ '
COMPAGNIE DE CHASSEURS PORTES HQ
г
о
Deep Reconnaissance
Platoon
ANTI-TANK
к
Company Command 2iC Command
Rifle team	Rifle team
Carrier-borne Licht Infantry Company
2
2
5
HEADQUARTERS
Company HO
Chasseurs Portes
Platoon
INFANTRY
Chasseurs Portes
NMM
INFANTRY
Chasseurs Portes
rBrai
Fusiliers Portes
Platoon
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
ANTI-TANK
ARMOUR

Chasseurs 25mm Anti-
tank Gun Platoon
5
5
ANTI-TANK

Chasseurs 2Smm An11
tank Gun Ptatoon
ARTILLERY
Bartle Tank Platoon
Light Tank Platoon
ARMOUR
Battle Tank Platoon
light Tank Platoon
ARMOUR
Divisional 47mm
Anti-tank Platoon
AIRCRAFT
Lorraine 38L
A Division Cuirassee (DC), or Armoured Cavalry Division,
is the high command’s reserve of heavy breakthrough tanks
(hence the name is sometimes given as Division Cuirassee de
Reserve, DCR). A DC has a brigade of light and heavy battle
tanks, and a battailion de chasseurs portes equipped with
armoured personnel carriers.
146
MG team
MG team
Lorraine 38L
FRENCH О
RELUCTANT
CONSCRIPT
TRAINED
VETERAN
L LIEUTENANT,
L HQ SECTION,
L SERGENT 1
L SERGENT 1
L SERGENT
CHASSEURS SQUAD
50 points
L HQ SECTION,
L SERGENT 1
L SERGENT 1
’ CONFIDENT
I FEARLESS
Command MG team VB team
Command Rifle team
LIEUTENANT
^JEUTENA^^,
L ANTI-TANK SECTION
CHASSEURS 25MM ANTI TANK GUN PLATOON
L ANTI-TANK SECTION
25mm SA-34 gun
| MOTIVATION AND SKILL
Mounted in their armoured carriers, a Compagnie de Chasseurs Portes (pronounced kohn-
pan-y de sba-sir pawr-tay) is able to accompany tanks in battle. The chasseurs are ready for
anything and are rated as Confident Trained.
COMBAT PLATOONS
Chasseurs Portes Platoon
LIEUTENANT 1
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
3 Chasseurs Squads	175 points
2 Chasseurs Squads	130 points
Lorraine 38L
A peleton de chasseurs portes (light mechanised cavalry
at >n) is composed of well-trained, w" ped and
el irmed troops with twice the number of light m icltiiu-
.ans normal infantry. More importantly each squ.nl of
^aas<	, ' ..ied to .i.ic in a Lorrait . \'B( I ' (\<>:tiin
!i	A Г ...; e... Portes) 38L. Based on a supply carrier,
: I orrajne37I Tmctevr de Ratitaillemimt. it can carry up
u> ten men—four men in an armoured cargo bay and six
note n ..in armotirvi trailer.
Ihis made the French Army the only combatant during the
rd. tot Fiance fielding bait dions nioui ted in fully-tracked
Minoured personnel carriers, and the only country with
ole battalions of infantry in armoured personnel carrit r
each of the r armoured divisions at the start of the war.
WEAPONS PLATOONS
Chasseurs 25мм Anti-tank Gun Platoon
Platoon
HQ Section with:
3 25mm SA-34
Options
•	Add Lorraine 38L tractors for +10 points for the
platoon.
•	Mount 25mm SA-34 guns on the Lorraine 38L trac-
tors as portees and add a motorcycle and sidecar for
HQ Section for +5 points for the platoon.
. combination of the Lorraine 38L VBCP and the excel-
 Hotchkiss 25mm SA-34 gun provides chasseur anti-tank
-- with greater cross-country capacity than any other
valent French platoons. Some units experimented with
icing their 25mm anti-tank guns portee on top of their
- fP carriers to give them the ability to fire immediately
out dismounting the guns.
MG team MG team
Lorraine 38L
CHASSEURS SQUAD
MG team MG team
Lorraine 38L
CHASSEURS SQUAD
.CHASSEURS PORTES PLATOON
25mm SA-34 qun
mu
25mm SA-34 quo
L ANTI-TANK SECTION
L SERGENT 1
147
HEADQUARTERS
(Infantry Company)
INFANTRY
MACHINE-GUNS
ARMOUR
Medium Combat Platoon
light Combat Platoon
Fusiliers-Volbgeurs Platoon
<
ANTI-TANK
'ЙШ
£
ARTILLERY
A
ANTIAIRCRAFT
Air Support
О
^2
>
25mm Anti-aircraft
Defence Platoon
Cavalry 25mm Anti-tank
Gun Platoon
Sett propelled 75mm
Anti-aircraft Platoon
All-terrain Towed
_____.	75mm Artillery Battery
% к	All-terrain Towed
ТТ-Л A	105mm Artillery Battery
Divisional 47mm Anti-tank
Platoon
Self propelled 47mm
ARTILLERY
. •	All-terrain Towed
ьЖТ X у X 75mm Artillery Battery
Truck-borne Fusilier Squadron
HEADQUARTERS

Company HO
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
French companies can have British troops (marked @) as support options. Remember that
these platoons retain their own rules and ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see page 183
of the rulebook).
Fusiliers Machine gun
Platoon
ARTILLERY
Armoured Platoon
Fusiliers Mortar Platoon
RECONNAISSANCE
Reconnaissance Platoon
RECONNAISSANCE
Reconnaissance Platoon
Fusiliers Motocydistes
Platoon
RECONNAISSANCE
Fusiliers Motocydistes
Platoon
RECONNAISSANCE
Deep Reconnaissance Platoon
ANTI-TANK

nftMtcrie PLilouii


AIRCRAFT
К
&

-RENCH
Motivation and Skill
As befits France’s elite motorised infantry, an Escadron de Fusiliers Portes (pronounced es-ka-
drohn de foo-zee-yay pawr-tay), or Truck-borne Fusilier Squadron, is rated as Confident
Trained.
CONFIDENT
CONSCRIPT
1
HEADQUARTERS
COMPANY HQ

Headquarters
Company HQ
25 points
Options
•	Add 60mm Mortar Section for +20 points.
•	Add 25 mm SA-34 portee self-propelled guns for
+20 points per vehicle.
CAPITAINE 1
^PhAME^
m m л
Company Command
Rifle team
2iC Command
Rifle team
Motorcycle
and sidecar
L COMPANY HQ 1
Motorcycle
and sidecar
Esc.idrons de Fusiliers Portes are the core of a Regiment de
Dr, n Porte (RDP) or Truck-borne Di on I giment of
a DI M (Light Mechanised Division). It is one of the few
unit in the 1 n nch Army with its own integt , trat .port.
Thee are as mobile and well equipped as rheir German
counterparts.
Eat ii > mpany has its own 60mm mortar (later copied and
use 1 by the US Army) and t su i ly l.i t; a sc. io i of 25mm
anti tank guns attached I mm di bat ilimi machine gun mJ
support weapons squadron.
I ESCADRON de FUSILIERS PORTES HQ
COMBAT PLATOONS
Fusiliers Portes Platoon =-
Platoon
HQ Section with:
LIEUTENANT 1
^EUTENAN^
3 Fusiliers Squads
2 Fusiliers Squads
165 points
120 points
Command MG team VBteam Laffly S20TL truck
Like Germany, the majority of France’s infantry marched
with horse-drawn guns in support. However, the mechanised
divisions were superbly eq lipped with specialised trucks and
armoured vehicles tor almost every role imaginable. For the
Fusiliers Portes, the vehicle is the Laffly S20TL VDP (Voiture
de Dragons Portes or Truck-borne Dragoon Vehicle) truck.
The well-equipped Fusiliers Portes have twice the firepower
or a normal infantry platoon with eacl -quad having two
Chatellarault FM 24/29 light machine-guns instead of one.
The fusiliers mount their light machine-guns on anti-aircraft
mounts on their squad’s S20TL truck to protect them from
marauding German aircraft while on the march.
L HQ SECTION]
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
Wlf
MG team MG team
FUSILIERS SQUAD’]
Laffly S20TL truck
with two MG
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
MG team MG team
FUSILIERS SQUADS
Laffly S20TL truck
with two MG
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
The new DLM’s Formed in June were equipped with
American CMC ACK 353 trucks. Model your Escadron
de Fusiliers Portes as a later-style DLM by replacing
the Laffly S20TL VDP with GMC 2'/2-ton trucks
MG team MG team Laffly S20TL truck
with two MG
LFUSILIERS SQUAD’]
L FUSILIERS PORTES PLATOON j
(Battlefront Miniatures codes LJS430 or US431).

fusiliers Machine-gun Platoon
. Platoon
LIEUTENANT 1
HQ Section with:
L LIEUTENENT]
4 8mm mle 1914 HMG
105 points
Fusiliers Machine-gun Platoons use the Integrated Defences
rule on page 175. This allows them to swap a Machine-
gun Section for a Fusiliers Section from a Fusiliers Fortes
Platoon.
The Hotchkiss Mlf 1914 became the standard heavy
machine-gun of the French Army dm mg World War One
when 1 broke an attacks as they advanced across No
Man’- land.
At the beginning ot the next World War it retains its place
in thi French Army— < vc sturJi and reliable. Interestingly
it can lire either lr. m individ r.il metal trays of 24 rounds or
251 round articulated metal belts.
Command Rifle team Laffly S20TL truck
L HQ SECTION]
Lmarechal DESLOGIS
Lmarechal des logis
8mm mle 1914 8mm mle 1914
Laffly S20TL truck
with two MG
MACHINE-GUN
SECTION
8mm mle 1914 8mm mle 1914
Laffly S20TL truck
with two MG
MACHINE-GUN
SECTION
.FUSILIERS MACHINE GUN PLATOON
WEAPONS PLATOONS
Fusiliers Mortar platoon ~
PLATOON
LIEUTENANT
HQ Section with:
4 81mm mle 27/31
95 points
L LIEUTENANT]

Option
• Add Laffly S20TL trucks for +5 points for the
platoon.
Almost every mortar used by every nation in the Second
World War (and since) was essentially derived from the
outstai ding Brandt mle 27/31 (introduced in 1927 and
updated in 1931) mortar. Even its 81.4mm calibre became
the European standard used by both Allied and Axis forces.
81mm mle
27/31 mortar
81mm mle
27/31 mortar
As bi fits their elite status, the motorised infantry have lull
battei es of four mortars in their mt, bine-guns and support
weapons squadron. This gives the infantry its own artil-
lery battery to silence enemy machine-guns and anti-tank
weapons as the infantry attacks.
L HQ SECTION]
Lmarechal des logis
. MARECHAL DES LOGIS
Command
Rifle team
Observer Laffly S20TL truck
Rifle team
L MORTAR SECTION
L MORTAR SECTION
FUSILIERS 8IMM MORTAR PLATOON
81mm mle
27/31 mortar
81mm mle
27/31 mortar
The Resurrection of France’s mechanised Cavalry—*=-
All three of France’s Divisions Legere Mecanique (DLM),
Light Mechanised Divisions, were lost in Belgium in the
retreat to Dunkirk. This left France desperately short of
mechanised troops to counter the anticipated German thrust
south across the Somme River.
In early June, plans were drawn up to form seven new DLM’s
from the remains of the Divisions Legere Cavalerie (DLC),
Light Cavalry Divisions, that had fought in the Ardennes and
along the Somme River. Events overtook the plan and only
five were actually formed. Although named as divisions, they
were little more than a reinforced motorised infantry brigade
with just 20 to 40 tanks and a dozen armoured cars.
The first three new DLM’s were formed into a rebuilt Cavalry
Corps. This is tasked with delaying Hoth’s Panzer corps’
advance on Paris so the Tenth Army can form a new defensive
line. Despite hard fighting that significantly delayed the lead
elements of Hoth’s corps, they were repeatedly outflanked
and forced back to the Loire River.
The remaining two divisions were assigned to Divisions
Cuirassee (DC) to form mobile groups. 4е""' DLM joined
General de Gaulle’s 4‘ DC in its attacks on the Abbeville
bridgehead. Z""’ DLM joined General Buisson’s 3‘"" DC
near Soissons. There they faced the well-equipped Iя and
21 1 Panzer Divisions, stopping their advance for two days
before being overwhelmed and destroyed.

SUPPORT PLATOONS
Cavalry 25mm Anti-tank Gun Platoon-*-—	>
Platoon
LIEUTENANT
HQ Section with:
. LIEUTENANT 1
4 25mm SA-34
70 points
Option
• Add Laffly W15T trucks for +5 points for the
platoon.
Command
Rifle team
. HQ SECTION
к SOUS OFFICIER 1
SOUS OFFICIER
Anti-tank guns are best used in ambush supporting infantry,
sc it is rather unusual that French have the divisional anti-
tank squadron (Escadron Divisionnaire Anti Chars) as part of
the tank-equipped combat brigade, even though it is more
likely to support the fusiliers of the dragoon regiment.
The squadron’s 25mm Hotchkiss SA-34 guns are an ex-
tremely capable weapon. It’s penetration exceeds that of the
Guinan 3.7cm Р.1КЗ6 anti-tank gun and with skill, courage,
an, I patience it .tn destroy any Panzer.
-ОДАХ
25mm SA-34 gun
mx*
25mm SA-34 gun
. ANTI-TANK SECTION
25mm SA-34 gun
25mm SA-34 gun
к ANTI-TANK SECTION 1
TOWED 25MM ANTI-TANK GUN PLATOON |
о escadron. de Fusiliers Portes
BRITISH SUPPORT PLATOONS
The British 1" Armoured Division laun< lied i joint att.u к on Abbeville wit > French dragoons. However, the degree of co-
operation they attained /. is limited by a lack ot titm to prepare tot I he attack. Things weren’t helped by delays preventing the
French fusiliers reaching the front until the British ittick had aht ad'' stalled.
Armoured Platoon
Platoon
SUBALTERN ’
3 Light Mk VI В
90 points
к SUBALTERN
3 Light MkVIC
105 points
3 A13 Cruiser Mk III
205 points
Replace any or all A13 Cruiser Mk III tanks with
A13 Mk II Cruiser Mk IV tanks for +15 points
per tank.
. SERGEANT 1
Command tank
HQ TANK 1
к CORPORAL 1
The tankies and cavalrymen of the 1“ Armoured Division
are brave and know their craft. Armoured Platoons are
rated as Confident Trained.
L TANK 1
L TANK
f RELUCTANT CONSCRIPT 1
2 CONFIDENT TRAINED *
veteran
L ARMOURED PLATOON |
The French high command assumed that the British
Armoured Division was equivalent to their own Division
Cuirassee, and ordered them to attack the dug-in German
positions around Abbeville. However, the British tanks were
lighdy-armoured and fast, the opposite of the slow, heavy
fenci. 1 mks, and suffered heavy casualties.

HEADQUARTERS
(Mechanised Company)
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
Company HQ
RECONNAISSANCE
Reconnaissance Platoon
INFANTRY
Fusiliers Portes Platoon
Fusiliers Motocydistes
Platoon
ARMOUR
Medium Combat Ptatoon
Light Combat Platoon
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs Platoon
Combat Car Platoon
INFANTRY
RECONNAISSANCE
Deep Reconnaissance Platoon
£
£
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs Ptatoon
RECONNAISSANCE
Reconnaissance Ptatoon
RECONNAISSANCE
Deep Reconnaissance
Platoon
Reconnaissance Platoon
Combat Car Platoon
RECONNAISSANCE
Deep Reconnaissance
Platoon	Ж1
Reconnaissance Platoon
Fusiliers Portes Platoon (__
Fusiliers Motocydistes ' *
Platoon
MACHINE-GUNS
Fusiliers Machine-gun ’
Platoon J
ARTILLERY
ANTI-TANK
ANTI-TANK
СДАЛ
ARTILLERY
Cavalry 25mm Anti-tank
Gun Ptatoon
25mm Anti-tank Gun Ptatoon
Sett-propelled 47mm
Anti-tank Platoon
All-terrain Towed
,	75mm Artillery Battery
Jk Ъ V	All-terrain Towed
ftWri-пЛ n	105mm Artillery Battery
AIRCRAFT
Air Support
Fusilier Mortar Platoon
Reconnaissance
And-tank Platoon
FRENCH
Motivation and Skill
With typical cavalry dash, an Escadron de Reconnaissance (pronounced es-ka-drohn de
re-kaw-ne-sahn) seeks out the enemy and engages them in advance of the main line. These
brave cavalrymen are rated as Confident Trained.
CAPITAINE
„ТарпрмиП
О ESCADRONDE RECONNAISS
HEADQUARTERS
L. SCOUT SECTION 1
DEEP RECONNAISSANCE PLATOON
CONSCRIPT
TRAINED
I RELUCTANT
T CONFIDENT
УГ1
DEEP RECONNAISSANCE PLATOON
PLATOON
Command Panhard AMD-35
Deep Reconnaissance Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
COMBAT PLATOONS
L HQ SECTION ~
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
L SCOUT SECTION 1
5 Panhard AMD-35
4 Panhard AMD-35
3 Panhard AMD 35
165 points
135 points
105 points

COMPANY HQ
HEADQUARTERS
1 Panhard-Schneider P-16	35 points
1 Renault AMR-35 (7.5mm)	30 points
1 Hotchkiss H-35 or H-39 (long gun)	55 points
1 Panhard AMD-35	35 points
An Escadron de Combat must have a Combat platoon
with the same type of vehicle as the Company HQ.
he French designed their Automitrailletise de Decouverte
AMD), Deep Reconnaissance Armoured Cars, to advance
ahead of their division to locate the enemy and report
. eir movements. As they were expected to operate with
. :tle support apart from their own motorcyclists, the AMD
.Med to be capable of defending itself. Tire Panhard AMD
lele 1935 has a two-man turret armed with the excellent
Mnm SA-35 gun, a shortened version of the towed 25mm
? л-34 anti-tank gun that fires higher-powered ammunition
maintain its performance. The AMD-35 has two drivers,
r.e facing forward and the other backwards, allowing it to
Company Command armoured car
L COMPANY HQ 1
L ESCADRON DE RECONNAISSANCE HQ
The Company Command armoured car is a Reconnaissance team.
Panhard
AMD-35
I LIEUTENANT
FjeuttnanT
Panhard
AMD-35
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
Panhard
AMD-35
Panhard
AMD-35
reverse out of an ambush. Its reliability, its ability to travel
186 miles (300km) on a tank of fuel, and its near-silent
operation help make it one of the best armoured cars in
service at the start of the war.

153
F
RECONNAISSANCE PLATOON
Platoon
5 Renault AMR-35 (3 7.5mm MG and 2 13.2mm MG) 3 Renault AMR-35 (2 7.5mm MG and 1 13.2mm MG)	140 points 85 points
3 Hotchkiss H-35 or H-39 (short gun)	160 points
3 Hotchkiss H-35 or H-39 (1 long and 2 short guns)	175 points
Uh Automitrailleuse de Reconnaissance (AMR), or Recon-
naissance Armoured Car. is the opposite of the AMD.
Where as the AMD scouts far ahead of the army, tracking
their advance, the AMR fights the covering battle in front of
the french lines. Their job is to force the enemy to deploy
and launch an organised attack ahead of the main line of
defence. This slows the enemy advance, buying more time
for the infantry to dig in and prepare.
The main AMR is the Renault .AMR-35, a light two-man
tank found in the Regiments Dragons Portes. Platoon and
section commanders used a version armed with a 7.5mm
light machine-gun, backed up by a more cramped version
France had a bewildering variety of reconnaissance units
in May 1940. Almost every type of division had its own
reconnaissance organisation, and some like the Divisions
Legere Mecanique had more than one reconnaissance force
in each division! They all had a common theme of armoured
cars and motorcyclists, with the addition of motorised
fusiliers portes in the regiments de dragons portes.
The Divisions Legere MAanique (DLM). Light Mechanised
Divisions, were grouped in the Cavalry Corps and had the
role of screening the French advance into Belgium and The
Netherlands. They fought the biggest tank battle of the
campaign at Hannut on 14 and 15 May as they delayed
the advance of Hoth's Panzer corps into the Gembloux gap.
Their regiments de decouverte (deep reconnaissance regiments)
operated out front to give the division plenty of warning as
to the direction of the German advance. This allowed the di-
visions' cavalry tanks to fight on the ground of their choice.
When the Germans reached the corps’ positions, the recon-
naissance squadrons of the bataillons de dragons portes
(dragoon battalions) operated as close-in reconnaissance to
warn the infantry of any German tanks that broke through
the cavalry’s tanks. The light AMR scout ranks then pulled
back revealing the infantry and their anti-tank guns waiting
in fortified villages. No German tanks broke through this
second line of defence.
The six Divisions Legere Cavalerte (DLC). or Light Cavalry-
Divisions. were lighter versions of the DLM. They screened
the Ardennes to buy’ time for the Ninth Army to fortify then-
positions on the Meuse River. Their regiments d'autos-mitrail-
teuses (armoured car regiments similar to deep reconnaissance
regiments) and small regiments de dragons portes delayed the
German advance through the forests and mountains for three
LIEUTENANT
Command Renault
AMR-35 (7.5mm)
L HQ SECTION 1
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS 1
L MARECHAI DES LOGIS
Renault AMR-35 (7 5<nm|
Renault AMR-3517 5mm)
Renault AMR-35113 2mm)
L RECCE SECTION 1
Renault AMR 35 (13.2mm)
L RECCE SECTION
RECONNAISSANCE PLATOON
Reconnaissance PLttoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
with 13.2mm heavy machine-guns. As there were in-
sufficient Renault AMR available, the one DLM used
Hotchkiss H-39 cavalry tanks instead.
FRENCH RECONNAISSANCE FORCES
days as they were slowly forced back to the Meuse River
Once in the open terrain of northern France, they were no
match for the massed Panzer divisions and withdrew across
the Somme River where they counterattacked attempts by
the Germans to cross the river.
Of the Divisions Cutrassee (DC), the Armoured Cavalry'
Divisions, only de Gaulle's 4 DC had any reconnaissance
elements having absorbed the half-formed •#'' DLMinclud-
ing its regiment de decoutvrte and regiment de dragons portes.
De Gaulle also absorbed the remains of the 5"~ DLC making
his division one of the most powerful in existence.
The infantry had almost as many variations as the cavalry.
'The motorised Grouper de Reconnaissance de Corps dAnnee
(GRCA), or Army Corps Reconnaissance Groups, and the
Groupes de Reconnaissance de Division d'Infanterie (GRD1),
or Infantry’ Divisional Reconnaissance Groups, advanced
ahead of the infantry in rhe advance into Belgium and
covered their retreat back to Dunkirk.
With a mobile mix of Panhard AMD-35 armoured cars,
old Panhard-Schneider P-16 half-tracked armoured cars or
Hotchkiss cavalry tanks, and motorcyclists, they were quite
capable of giving the German advanced guan! a bloody nose,
especially when supported by motorised artillery and anti-
tank guns. Some of the GRDI were reinforced with the small
but potent AMR-35 ZT-2 and ZT-3 light self-propelled
anti-tank guns making them even more effective.
Having sent the German advanced guard reeling back, the
reconnaissance group would break off and fall back to the
next blocking position leaving the Germans to launch their
attack against an empty village. After a significant delay, the
German advance guard would advance again, only to run
into the reconnaissance group's next ambush.
154
COMBAT CAR PLATOON
Platoon
( oinhat Car Platoons are Reconnaissance Platoons.
Combat car
lieutenant
3 Panhard-Schneider P-16
90 points
L LIEUTENANT 1
175 points
HQ SECTION^
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
LCOMBAT SECTION^
к COMBAT CAR PLATOON |
3 Hotchkiss H-35 or H-39
(1 long and 2 short guns)
3 Hotchkiss H-35 or H-39 (short gun) I 160 points
ntry divisions have Grottpes de Reconnaissance de Division
ianterie (GRD1), or Infantry Divisional Reconnaissance
roups, to perform the traditional cavalry role of scmifi ig
J flank protection. In the motorised infantry divisions,
traditional cavalry are replaced with armoured cars and
orcyclists.
ten the first five motorised GRDI were formed, the only
routed car available for their reconnaissance platoons
> the old Panhard-Schneider P-16 half-tracked armoured
. Originally designed in 1929 as an Automitrailleuse de
that (AMC), or Armoured Combat Car, it was replaced
this role by the Hotchkiss and Somua cavalry tanks.
Combat car
Command combat car
LCOMBAT SECTION^
The Panhard-Sclii ider P-16, like the later Panhard
AMD-35, had two drivers, one facing forward and the
other backs . to drive the vehicle out of danger away
from the enemy in an emergency. Like the AMD-35, it
was well armed, having the same 37mm SA-18 gun as J .e
Hotchkiss tank.
The other two motorised GRD1 were equipped with
Hotchkiss H-35 and H-39 cavalry tanks, as no more
Panhard-Schneider P-16 combat cars were available.
WEAPONS PLATOONS
Reconnaissance Anti-tank platoon
Platoon
1 Renault AMR-35 ZT-2 and
2 Renault AMR 35 ZT-3
I Renault AMR-35 ZT-2 and
I Renault AMR-35 ZT-3
I LIEUTENANT
^JEUTTNAN?^
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
110 points
55 points
Command Renault Renault
AMR-35 ZT-2 AMR-35 ZT-3
Renault Renault
AMR-35 ZT-2 AMR-35 ZT-3

onnaissance Anti-tank Platoons are Reconnaissance
toons.
< first five motorised GRD1 each have an anti-tank platoon
ipped with Renault AMR-35 ZT-2 and AMR-35 ZT-3
 aured cars. Only ten of each of these odd little two-man
Lies were built. They mount the same 25mm SA-35 gun
he Panhard AMD-35. The ZT-2 mounts its gun in an
nely cramped turret on a standard AMR-35 hull, while
. ZT-3 has its gun mounted as a self-propelled gun in a
d casemate.
LHQ SECTION]
L RECONNAISSANCE ANTI-TANK PLATOON |
LCOMBAT SECTION"1

The two vehicles operate in pairs. The low, turretless ZT-3
uses its small silhouette to work its way into a good ambush
position. Meanwhile the larger, turreted ZT-2 stays further
back in cover to protect its flanks.
With easily the best gun in the GRD1 reconnaissance bat-
talion, the AMR ZT-2 and ZT-3 give the reconnaissance a
serious anti-tank capability.

eat
К
Sscudreu de Fusiliers ?fcotee^efis'tes ’
(Mechanised Company)
MOTORCYCLIST FUSILIER SQUADRON
MACHINE-GUNS
ARMOUR
Medium Combat Platoon
Armoured Platoon
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
French companies can have British troops (marked O)) as support options. Remember that
these platoons retain their own rules and ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see page 183
ot the rulebook).
Light Combat Platoon
Fusiliers-Voltlgeurs Platoon
8
2
2
о Hotrliltiu H-35 tank
Fusilier Motocydistes
Platoon
ft
ft
reconnaissance
HEADQUARTERS
Company HQ
RECONNAISSANCE
I
Fusilier Motocydistes
Platoon
RECONNAISSANCE
Fusilier Motocydistes
Platoon
RECONNAISSANCE
Fusilier Motocydistes
Platoon

3

Fusiliers Machine-gun
Platoon
ARTILLERY

<
i
>
Fusilier Mortar Platoon
Reconnaissance
Anti-tank Platoon
ANTI-TANK
RECONNAISSANCE
Deep Reconnaissance
Platoon
Reconnaissance Platoon
Combat Car Platoon
Fusiliers Portes Platoon
JL.
RECONNAISSANCE
Deep Reconnaissance
Platoon
Reconnaissance Platoon
Combat Car Platoon
Fusiliers Portes Platoon
&
ft
4AAAA
ARTILLERY
Cavalry 25mm Anti-tank
Gun Platoon
propelled 47mm
tank Platoon
All-terrain Towed
,	75mm Artillery Battery
Jk Jk Jk	All-terrain Towed
-TvЛ a	i osnim Artillery Battery
AIRCRAFT
Air Support
1$ field ear and Opel Blitz У ton fruit
’ 'Jr
French о
!£__
20 points
COMPANY HQ
Headquarters
HEADQUARTERS
Company HQ
Company Command
Motorcycle Rifle team
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
Roaring across the Trench and Belgian country side on their Gnome-Rheme motorcycle
combinations, the motorcyclists of etn Escadron de Fusiliers Motocyclistes (pronounced es-ka-
drohn de foo-zee-yay maw-taw-see-klecst) are rated as Confident Trained.
Г RELUCTANT CONSCRIPT
^CONFIDENT 1 —
I FEARLESS
TRAINED
VETERAN
Fusiliers motocyclistes Platoon
Platoon
HQ Section with:
COMBAT PLATOON
2 Fusiliers Squads
165 points
L HQ SECTION]
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
L MARECHAL DES LOGIS
FUSILIERS SQUAD
FUSILIERS SQUAD
FUSILIERS MOTOCYCLISTES PLATOON
Motocyclistes Platoon
О Dlttnountet
Motorcycle
MG team
Motorcycle
MG team
Motorcycle
VB team
Fusiliers Motocyclistes Platoons use the Blitzkrieg Motorcycle
Reconnaissance rules on page 13 and are Reconnaissance
Platoons while mounted.
Command Motorcycle
MG team
Motorcycle
MG team
«Aril
Motorcycle
MG team
LIEUTENANT
. LIEUTENANT .
Options
•	Add 60mm Mortar Section for +20 points.
•	Add 25mm SA-34 portee self-propelled guns for
+ 20 points per vehicle.
Looking at the French cavalry arm, one can see how rhe
motorcycle has replaced the horse. Each battalion in a
dragoon regiment of a DEM (Light Mechanised Division)
. as one squadron mounted on motorcycles, while each
_. . [> of the regiment de decouverte (scout regiment) mo.lies
•  । moured car squadron with a squadron of motorcyclists.
In du light cavalry division, every second squadnu if the
. Ii. nised brigade is mounted on motorcycles. Even the
:t e infantry divisions’ reconnaissance groups hate a
t tot rrcycle squadron.
lien supported by their accompanying armoured cars,
c motorcyclists are highly mobile and pack a considerable
г inch in fast-moving battles.
CAPITAINE 1
1 COMPANY HQ '
, ESCADRON DE FUSILIERS MOTOCYCLISTES HQ
The Company Command team of a Compagnie de Fusiliers
Motocyclistes Platoons use the Motorcycle Reconnaissance
rules on page 13 and is a Recce; team while mounted.
 ch peleton de fusiliers motocyclistes, as the motorcycle
atoons are known, has a headquarters and two groups of
-iliers divided into two sections each with an FM 24/29
;ht machine-gun. The headquarters has rhe platoon
c mmander and the combined VB rifle-grenadiers of the
a toon.

(mice and Colonial)
Fusiuer Licht Infantry Company
COMBAT PLATOONS Л4 HEADQUARTERS
HEADQUARTERS
Company HO
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
Your Company HQ must be either Active (marked ) or Colonial (marked 9 ) AI1 other
platoons with variants must be of the same type as your Company HQ. Your company can also
be supported by unmarked platoons.
French companies can have British troops (marked O,') as support options. Remember that
British platoons retain their own rules and ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see page 183
of the rulebook).
DIVISIONAL SUPPORT PLATOONS
INFANTRY
Fusihers-Voitigeurs
Platoon	Ж>
INFANTRY

Platoon
INFANTRY
Fusiliers- Vottigeurs
Platoon__________
INFANTRY
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs	ф
Platoon	Ж
MACHINE-GUNS

ARMOUR
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs
Machine-gun Platoon Ж
MACHINE-CUNS

Fusiliers-Voltigeurs
Machine-gun Platoon Ж
ANTI-AIRCRAFT

20mm Anti-aircraft S&l
Machine-gun Platoon Ж*
RECONNAISSANCE
Art*
Fusilier Motocychsles
Platoon	Ж1
ARTILLERY
Fusiliers-Vottigeurs
Mortar Platoon Ж
ANTI-TANK
СДАЛ
25mm Anti-tank
Gun Platoon
Battle Tank Platoon
Light Tank Platoon
Medium Combat Platoon
Light Combat Platoon ^4
FT Tank Platoon
INFANTRY
Fusiliers Motocyclistes
Platoon	Ж1
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs	^>1
Platoon	Ж
Rifle Ratoon
RECONNAISSANCE
Light Tank Platoon
Deep Reconnaissance
Platoon
Combat Car Platoon

ANTI-TANK

Divisional Anti-tank
Platoon
Serf-propelled 47mm
Anti-tank Platoon
Self-propelled 75mm
Anti-aircraft Platoon
ARTILLERY
Horse-drawn	'
75mm Artillery Battery j
ARTILLERY
hWtAAi.
Horse-drawn	'
75ЛМП Artillery Battery ,
ARTILLERY
Horse-drawn	'
75mm Artillery Battery ,
Horse-drawn	1
Heavy Artillery Battery ,
All-terrain 75mm Towed '
Artillery Battery
All-terrain 105mm
Towed Artillery Battery
ANTI-AIRCRAFT
25mm Anti-aircraft
Defence Platoon
AIRCRAFT
Air Support




Fusilier light infantry Company
CompQ'griie d^Jusihers^Voftigeurs
.	~ (Reserve)
DIVISIONAL SUPPORT PLATOONS
ANTITANK
Divisional Anti-tar*
Platoon
You must field one platoon from each box shaded black and may field one platoon from each
box shaded grey.
Any platoons with variants must be Reserve (marked ). Your company can also be sup-
ported by unmarked platoons.
French companies can have British troops (marked О ) as support options. Remember that
these platoons retain their own rules and ratings, and count as Allied Platoons (see page 183
of the rulebook).
INFANTRY
Rifle Platoon
RECONNAISSANCE
Light Tank Platoon
Fusiliers Portes Platoon
Deep Reconnaissance
Platoon	flb
Combat Car Platoon	к
Machine-gun Bunkers
Fusiliers Motocydistes
Ptatoon
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs
Ptatoon
ARTILLERY
Horse-drawn
75mm Artillery Battery
Horse-drawn
Heavy Artillery Battery
АН-terrain 75mm
Towed Artillery Battery
All-terrain 105mm
Towed Artillery Battery
Heavy Anti-aircraft (л
Platoon	*
HEADQUARTERS
Company HQ
ARTILLERY
ЙМ.ААА.
Horse-drawn	kife
75mm Artillery Battery
AIRCRAFT
Air Support
MACHINE-GUNS
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
MACHINE-GUNS
INFANTRY
INFANTRY
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs
Platoon
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs
Platoon
Fusiliers-Voltioeurs
Machine-gun Platoon
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs
Platoon
Fusiliers- Voittoeurs
Machine-gun Platoon
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs
Platoon

P ACTIVE
Colonial
FEARLESS
Reserve
ONFIDENT TRAINED '
FEARLESS | VETERAN J
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
France has full-time active divisions, reserve divisions of older men who have finished their military service, and colonial divi-
sions. As a result the ratings of a Compagnie de Fusiliers-Voltigeurs (pronounced kohn-pan-y de foo-zee-yay vawl-tee-zhir) vary
depending on type. An Active company is rated as Confident Trained. Reserve companies are rated as Reluctant Trained.
Colonial companies are rated as Fearless Trained.
HEADQUARTERS
Company HQ
Headquarters
Company HQ
Add Mortar Squad
Add Mortar Section
Add Anti-tank Section
Add Resupply Section
Option
• Add horse-drawn limbers for +5 points for the
platoon.
Motorised Options
: Add an additional Resupply Section for +30 points.
Replace both horse-drawn limbers in the Anti-
tank Section with Renault UE tractors as Weapons
Carriers for +5 points for the section.
*
£3 ACTIVE	RESERVE	ф COLONIAL
25 points	20 points	30 points
+20 points	+15 points	♦25 points
+40 points	♦35 points	♦45 points
♦35 points	♦30 points	♦40 points
♦30 points		♦35 points
CAPITAINE 1
^APITAIN^
-HU
Company Command
Rifle team
-HU
2iC Command
Rifle team
L COMPANY HQ
Renault UE carriers use the Resupply Section special rules
on page 175.
On 5 xMay 1940, France fielded 71 infantry divisions. Of
these 20 were active divisions—seven motorised Divisions
d’Infanterie Motorisee (DIM), ten Divisions d’Infanterie (DI)
marching on foot with horse-drawn supporting weapons,
three were mountain Divisions d’Infanterie Alpine (DIA),
and eight were colonial—four Divisions d’Infanterie
Coloniale (DIG) and four North African Divisionsd’Infanterie
Nord-Afiicaine (DINA). The remaining 43 divisions were all
reservists. 24 divisions were Type A, having most of their
equipment, and 19 were Type B, with older men, and
lacking in equipment and officers. The reserve divisions were
placed in quiet sectors of the front. Unfortunately for France,
Sedan, where the Germans made one of their breakthroughs,
was deemed a quiet sector.
lire French infantry divisions were easily the best equipped
in the world for First World War-style trench warfare. Every
battalion had a resupply section with Renault UE carrier.
These could be used to carry or tow the battalion’s weapons
into position across shell-torn ground under fire, but more
importantly, they could resupply the battalion under fire.
 COMPAGNIE DE FUSILIERS-VOLTIGEURS HQ
An infantry battalion consumes immense amounts of food
and ammunition, so every night in the First World War
long columns of soldiers make their way up to the front-line
trenches, laden down with supplies. Every night the bat-
talion lost soldiers from these supply parties to artillery fire.
Now, with the Renault UE carrier available, supplies can be
delivered quickly and safely by an armoured vehicle.
French о
Fusiliers-voltigeurs Platoon—*
Platoon
HQ Section with:
3 Fusiliers Squads
2 Fusiliers Squads
active
120 points
90 points
О reserve
100 points
ф Colonial
145 points
110 points
I LIEUTENANT
LIEUTENANT
The section de fusiliers-voltigeurs (fusiliers-voltigeurs platoon)
is another example of the French infantry’s perfect organisa-
ti< n for trench warfare. The platoon has a small group of rifle
grenadiers with the Tromblon VB grenade launcher in the
pl. ioon headquarters to knock out machine-gun nests, and
three groupes (sections) offusiliers-voltigeurs.
Th. demi grout'c de fusiliers (shooters half-. rion) is the base
of lire, delivering a fusillade of shots from their MAS rnodele
ll ’<> bolt-action rilles and the squad’s Chatellarault FM
modele 1924/29 light machine-gun. Under the cover ol this
fire, the demi groupe de voltigeurs (manoeuvre half м. tion'i
vaults out of the trenches and sprints across No Man’s L. mi
to ; -sault the enemy trench. 
Most reserve divisions retained the old Berthiei modelt 1916
rifle and some even had the old Chwchat 1M »Ыг4 1915
light machine-gun, but all had the excellent Tromblon I В
itrenade launcher.
Command Rifle/MG team
. SERGENT 1
Rifle/MG team
ли»
Rifle/MG team
VB team
. HQ SECTION 1
FUSILIERS SQUAD 1
l SERGENT 1
Wlf
Rifle/MG team
Rifle/MG team
к FUSILIERS SQUAD 1
. SERGENT i
Rifle/MG team
Rifle/MG team
FUSILIERS SQUAD 1
VOLTIGEURS PLATOON
L* -
Hatchkiss H-35 (short) and Hotchkiss H-35 (Idl
WEAPONS PLATOONS
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs Machine-gun Platoo
platoon
HQ Section with:
2 Machine-gun Sections
® ACTIVE
100 points
О Reserve
80 points
•  COLONIAL
115 points
LIEUTENANT
ILIEUTENENT
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs Machine-gun Platoons use the Integ-
rated Defences rule on page 173. This allows them to
swap a Machine-gun Section for a Fusiliers Section from a
Fusiliers- Voltigeurs Platoon.
Command Rifle team
HQ SECTION 1
I SERGENT 1
I SERGENT
Each bataillon of infantry had a fourth company, the
Compagnie dAccompagnemcnt, for its heavy weapons. This
company fielded three machine-gun platoons, an anti-
aircraft machine-gun platoon, a mortar section, and an
anti-tank section.
8mm mle 1914 8mm mle 1914
HMG HMG
8mm mle 1914 8mm mle 1914
HMG	HMG
MACHINE-GUN
SECTION
I MACHINE-GUN
L SECTION
FUSILIERS-VOLTIGEURS MACHINE GUN PLATOON
20мм Anti-aircraft machine-gun Platoon
Platoon
HQ Section with:
4 20mm
3 20mm
2 20mm
mle 1939
mle 1939
mle 1939
© ACTIVE
80 points
60 points
Reserve
ф Colonial
70 points
45 points
lieutenant
. LIEUTENENT 1
HI
Command Rifle team
, HQ SECTION
Option
• Add horse-drawn limbers for +5 points for the
platoon.
Motorised Option
' Replace all horse-drawn limbers with 2-ton trucks
к SERGENT 1
t. SERGENT
20mm mle 1939 gun
20mm mle 1939 gun
I MACHINE-GUN i
L SECTION I
20mm mle 1939 gun
20mm mle 1939 gun
MACHINEGUN
SECTION
20MM ANTI AIRCRAFT MACHINE-GUN PLATOON I
SUPPORT PLATOONS
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs mortar Platoon
Platoon
HQ Section with:
2 Mortar Sections
Q ACTIVE
95 points
Reserve
Colonial
Motorised Option
Add a 2-ton truck for each Mortar Section for
+5 points for the platoon.
LIEUTENANT
LIEUTENANT
Command Rifle team
kA
Observer Rifle team
I HQ SECTION
i SERGENT i
t SERGENT
81mm mle 27/31 mortar
81mm mle 27/31 mortar
L MORTAR SECTION T
81mm mle 27/31 mortar
81mm mle 27/31 mortar
L MORTAR SECTION 1
FUSILIERS-VOLTIGEURS MORTAR PLATOON j
О COMPAGNIE DE FUSILIERS-VOLTIGEURS
MACHINE-GUN BUNKERS ~^=------
BUNKERS
4_______________________________
4 HMG Bunkers
3 HMG Bunkers
2 HMG Bunkers
Q ACTIVE
О reserve
320 points
240 points
160 points
Options
•	Add up to one Anti-tank Obstacle per bunker for
+ 100 points per obstacle.
•	Add up to three Barbed Wire Entanglements per
bunker for +10 points per entanglement.
HMG BUNKERS AND BARBED WIRE
You must place HMG Blinkers, Anti-tank Obstacles, and
Barbed Wire Entanglements in your deployment area before
any objectives are placed. An HMG Bunker may not be
placed within 8j20cm of another bunker, on a road or
track, across a railway line, nor in a stream, river, lake or
other water feature. In addition, an Objective may not be
placed on a Bunker.
HMG Bunkers follow the rules for Bunkers (see page 210
of the rulebook). Anti-tank Obstacles use the rules on page
214 of the rulebook). Barbed Wire Entanglements use the
rules on page 212 of the rulebook).
A company with HMG Bunkers always defends against
another Infantry Company in missions with the Defensive
Battle special ride.
MACHINE-GUN BUNKERS
While the huge blinkers of the Maginot Line fortifications
attract a lot of attention, they weren’t the only bunkers de-
fending France. Smaller bunk .-rs also extended north-west of
the Maginot Line covering the Meuse and Sambre Rivers.
As a result, one of die biggest problems facing the 1st Panzer
Division at Sedan was the numerous bunkers lining the river
banks. It v s pc i haps fortunate for the German foi. ; 'it
the shape of the river salient prevented the bunkers fr .in
being mutualis supporting, otherwise the bunkers would
have made the crossing far harder as they did elsewhere.
25мм Anti-tank Gun Platoon -*=-
platoon
Option
•	Add horse-drawn limbers for +5 points for the
platoon.
MOTORISED OPTION
Replace all horse-drawn limbers with Renault UE
tractors for +5 points for the platoon.
Each infantry regiment also fields a platoon of three 25mm
anti-tank guns. These regimental anti-tank gun platoons
were backed up by the Compagnie Divisionnaire Anti-Chars
(CDAC), the Divisional Anti-tank Company with an ad-
ditio 1.11 twelve 25mm guns.
The Hotchkiss 25mm SA-34 anti-tank gun that equips these
units is an excellent, highly-accurate weapon that is capable
of defeating the armour of any German tank. With an effec-
tive flash suppressor, the SA-34 guns proved very difficult to
spot when fired and on one occasion, a lone SA-34 was able
to take out seven German Panzers in a single engagement.
25MM ANTI-TANK GUN PLATOON
urea
RENCH
L LIEUTENANT!
L HQ SECTION^
L SERGENT 1
L SERGENT
L ANTI-TANK SECTION
L ANTI-TANK SECTION 1
L HQ SECTION!
L LIEUTENANT
L LIEUTENANT
325 points
175 points
Anti-tank gun
ACTIVE
120 points
f.' ACTIVE
290 points
155 points
Anti-tank gun
Command Rifle team
HI
Command Staff team
Rifle team
CAPITAINE
^APTTAIN^
DIVISIONAL ANTI-TANK PLATOON
Horse-drawn 75mm Artillery Battery
Platoon
HQ Section with:
2 47mm SA-37
2 75mm mk 1897
У? Colonial
.GUN SECTION ।
kGUN SECTION !
HORSE-DRAWN 75MM ARTILLERY BATTERY ।
i _ 5mm ntk 189"
2 75mm mk 1897
Horse-drawn 75mm Artillery Batteries may not be deployed
in Ambush.
75mm mle 1897 guns from a Divisional Anti-tank
Platoon may not fire bombardments.
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
0 Reserve
95 points
80 points
•J COLONIAL
135 points

Options
•	Add horse-drawn limbers for +5 points for the
platoon.
•	Equip all 75mm mle 1897 guns with turntables for
+ 5 points for the platoon.
motorised Option
- Replace all horse-drawn limbers with 2-ton trucks
and add a motorcycle and sidecar to HQ Section at
no cost.
Like the British, the French share the task of anti-tank defence
between the infantry and the artillery. Ml Idle the infantry
have their CDAC, the artillery has a Batterie Di vision Haire
Anti-Chars (BDAC), or Divisional Anti-tank Battery, as the
10lh Battery of the artillery regiment. This battery has four
platoons, each with two new 47mm SA-37 anti-tank guns.
Some reserve units still have old 75mm field guns instead.
DIVISIONAL ANTI-TANK PLATOON I
FUSILIERS-VOLTIGEURS
О Reserve
230 points
130 points
Options
•	Add horse-drawn wagon and horse-drawn limbers
for +5 points for the battery.
•	Equip up to one 75mm mle 1897 gun with a turn-
table for +5 points.
motorised Option
Л Replace all horse-drawn limbers and the horse-drawn
wagon with 2-ton trucks and add a motorcycle and
sidecar for the Observer Rifle team at no cost.
75mm mle 1897
Observer Rifle
team
75mm mle 1897
On 5 June 1940, the 5rh Battery of 37’“'' RAD (Regiment
d’Artillerie Divisionnaire) consisting of four 75mm mle 1897
guns, one fitted with a Arbel turntable to allow it to engage
tanks attempting to flank the battery, were deployed east of
Sains near Amiens. There they fought an engagement against
40 German tanks, destroying 12 before they were overrun.
75mm mle 1897
75mm mle 1897
British heavy anti-aircraft units were trapped in the French Channel port of Boulogne by the advancing German Panzers.
The. I tight alongside the French garrison on the outskirts of the city.
Heavy Anti-aircraft Platoon
Horse-drawn heavy Artillery battery *
Platoon
HQ Section with:
4 105mm L mle 1913 S
2 105mm L mle 1913 S
4 155mm C mle 1917 S
2 155mm C mle 1917 S
Option
Add horse-drawn wagon and horse-drawn limbers
for +5 points for the batter}'.
motorised Option
Replace all horse-drawn limbers and the horse-drawn
wagon with 2-ton trucks and add a motorcycle and
sidecar for the Observer Rifle team at no cost.
You may not field a Horse-drawn Heavy Artillery
Battery unless you are also fielding a Horse-drawn
75mm Artillery Battery.
Horse-drawn Heavy Artillery Batteries may not be deployed
in Ambush.
As well as its 36 75mm mle 1897 guns, n: active infantry
division also has 24 155mm C mle 1917 S In .ivy howitzers.
Tn. can be supplemented as needed by the fire of corps-
lev.’. 105mm L mle 1913 S long-range gun...
BRITISH SUPPORT PLATOONS
PLATOON	
HQ Section with:	
1 4 OQF 3.7”	515 points
1 2 OQF 3.7”	255 points
Option
Model OQF 3.7” guns with eight or more crew and
increase their ROF to 3 for +10 points per gun.
A Heavy Anti-aircrafit Platoon may not be deployed in
Ambush.
The crews of the OQP 3.7' guns were anti-aircraft troops
with little training in fighting tanks. Heavy Anti-aircraft
Platoons are rated as Confident Trained.
0 ACTIVE	Q Reserve	• COLONIAL
275 points	215 points	305 points
145 points	115 points	160 points
305 points	240 points	340 points
160 points	130 points	180 points
		
		
	LArllAINh _	
Observer Rifle
team
Command Staff team
Rifle team
I HQ SECTION J
L LIEUTENANT ;
L LIEUTENANT 1
LGUN SECTION ,
kGUN SECTION
HORSE-DRAWN HEAVY ARTILLERY BATTERY
SUBALTERN
JsUBAUTRb^
L HQ SECTION^
Command Rifle team
HEAVY ANTI AIRCRAFT PLATOON
Air Support
FT Tank Platoon
Platoon
Moraine Saulnier MS.406
25 points
VETERAN
Ms.4oe
Г CAPORAL
dvisferiai Support
MOTIVATION AND SKILL
The French Army was one of the best equipped in the world with all of the supporting arms
required by a modern army. In general the support troops were competent and well-trained,
being rated as Confident Trained tinless otherwise stated.
Sporadic air support
Ute Moraine Saulnier MS.406 I is a dedicated air supe-
riority fighter. It can only be used for Fighter Interception
and cannot be used for Ground Attack.
The MS.406 armed with an engine-mounted 20mm cannon
and two 7.5mm machine guns in the wings, was the m r
modern and numerous fighter in the Armee de lAir.
3 Renault FT-18 and 2 Renault FI-31
95 points
France still had several thousand First World War Renault FT
tanks in 1940. Over 500 of them were still in service in inde-
pendent bataillons de chars de combat (BCC) tank battalions
in the front lines. Although adequate for infantry support,
they were totally outclassed by German tanks in a mobile
battle.
MS.406
RELUCTANT
CONFIDENT
(HARLESS
CAPITAINE
^APTTAIN^
MS.406
L FLIGHT
FLIGHT
LIEUTENANT
LIEUTENANT
Command Renault FT-18
L HQ SECTION^
L SOUS OFFICIER 1
Renault FT-18 Renault FT-31
TANK SECTION 1
CONSCRIPT
TRAINED
Renault FT-18 Renault FT-31
L TANK SECTION ’
FT TANK PLATOON
DIVISIONAL 47MM ANTI-TANK PLATOON —
PLATOON
HQ Section with:
2 47mm SA-37
I 120 points
Option
•	Add Motorcycle and Laffly W15T tractors for
+ 5 points for the platoon.
The APX 47mm mle 1937 L/53 gun is the best anti-tank
gun on the battlefields of 1940. Its penetration of 2’750mm
or .irmour at 500m is more than half again as much as the
German 3.7cm РаКЗб, Every French division is supposed to
haw ,i divisional anti-tank battery of eight 47mm guns, and
most Jo. Only a few of the less-well equipped reserve divisions
have to make do with old 75mm field guns instead.
47mm SA-37 gun
47mm SA-37 gun
^NTF^NJaECTObJ^g^NTF^NIGSECTlO^
Ж DIVISIONAL 47MM ANTI TANK PLATOON Д
SELF-PROPELLED 47MM ANTI-TANK PLATOON
PLATOON
5 47mm Wl 5 TCC 4 47mm Wl 5 TCC 3 47mm Wl 5 TCC	350 point» 280 points 2)0 points
The French organised batteries d’anti-char automoteurs
(BACA) or self-propelled anti-tank batteries, ofW15 TGC
tank hunters and 25mm anti-aircraft guns when they realised
thi i lack of mobile anti-tank weapons.
These tank-hunters were very effective. In only eight days
of combat 54~"’'; BACA destroyed 28 tanks, 5 armoured
cars, and shot down 1 fighter, with none of its tank hunters
damaged by the enemy.
LIEUTENANT 1
^JEUTENAN^
Command Laffly W15 TCC
L HQ SECTION)
L MARECHAL DE LOGIS
L MARECHAL DE LOGIS
Laffly W15 TCC
Laffly W15TCC
Laffly W15TCC
L ANTI-TANK SECTION
Laffly W15 TCC
L ANTI-TANK SECTION 1
к SELF-PROPELLED 47MM ANTI TANK PLATOON
SELF-PROPELLED 75MM ANTI-AIRCRAFT PLATOON
PLATOON
LIEUTENANT1
4 Autocanon de 75mm
3 Autocanon de 75mm
2 Auiocanon de 75mm
255 points
190 points
125 points
At the time of the invasion, 236 Autocanon de 75mm mle
1913/1934 (designed in 1913 before the First World War
and mounted on a De Dion Bouton truck chassis) were still
in service. Despite its age, these weapons gave a good account
of themselves, both against aircraft and as improvised anti-
tank weapons. The battery defending the Saint-Folquin
bridge destroyed three German tanks on 24 May 1940.
L LIEUTENANT)
Command Autocanon de 75mm
Autocanon de 75mm
ANTI-AIRCRAFT 1
SECTION |
L MARECHAL DE LOGIS
Autocanon de 75mm
Autocanon de 75mm
ANTI-AIRCRAFT 1
SECTION I
SELF-PROPELLED 75MM ANTI AIRCRAFT PLATOON
Motorcycle and sidecar
75mm mle 1897
75mm mle 1897
75mm mle 1897
И0
Staff team
75mm mle 1897
Observer Rifle team
HI
Command Rifle team
25mm mle 1938 gun
25mm mle 1938 gun
25mm mle 1938 gun
HI
Command Rifle team
LIEUTENANT
I LIEUTENANT
I HQ SECTION
MARECHAL DE LOGIS
MARECHAL DE LOGIS
i GUN SECTION 1
i. GUN SECTION
MARECHAL DE LOGIS
L GUN SECTION
25MM ANTI-AIRCRAFT DEFENCE PLATOON
CAPITAINE
. CAPITAINE
HQ SECTION 1
LIEUTENANT 1
1 LIEUTENANT 1
IGUN SECTION ।
LGUN SECTION ।
Platoon
HQ Section with:
Platoon
HQ Section with:
3 25mm mle 1938
2 25mm mle 1938
70 points
45 points
4 75mm mle 1897
2 75mm mle 1897
290 points
155 points
ALL TERRAIN TOWED 75MM ARTILLERY BATTERY
25mm Anti-aircraft Defence Platoon
Option
•	Add Motorcycle and Laffly W15T tractors for
+5 points for the platoon.
The need for light anti-aircraft guns became apparent to the
French during the Spanish Civil War. The Hotchkiss 25mm
mle 1938 was rushed into production fill the gap in the
French arsenal. This gun had been designed in 1932, and
initially rejected by the French Army. This gun is provided
with armour-piercing rounds and is used in a dual-purpose
role.
Every division is supposed to have an anti-aircraft defence
battery of six 25mm guns and many divisions had received
their allocations by the German invasion.
All-terrain Towed 75mm Artillery Battery
Options
•	Add Laffly S20TL trucks for +5 points for the
platoon.
•	Equip up to one 75mm mle 1897 gun with a turn-
table for +5 points.
All-terrain Towed 75mm Artillery Batteries may not be
deployed in Ambush.
Despite its age the 75mm mle 1897, known to the French as
the Soixante Q;;.'.. e .<. Seventy 1 ive’, remains a revolutionary
we ipon. More than tO wars alter its introduction it is still a
des istating weapon, p.ink ul.irlv when used against infantry
in the open.-tAffll ut he guns hun the core of the French
artillery a m.
105mm C mle 1935B
ALL-TERRAIN TOWED 105MM ARTILLERY BATTERY
PLATOON
CAPITAINE 1
HQ Section with:
4 105mm C mle 1935B	160 points
2 105mm C mle 1935B	85 points
Option
• Add Laffly S20TL trucks for +5 points for the
platoon.
All-tenMH Towed l05nu>i Artillery Batteries may not be
deployed in Ambush.
Of more advanced design, but fewer in number than the
75mm mle 1897, was the excellent little Bourges 105mm
Court mle 1935. It coo had a relatively high rate of fire and
was designed with a split trail that splayed the guns’ wheels
outwards to provide additional protection for its crew.
The majority of these modern howitzers went to the various
forms of cavalry division, although enough remained for the
motorised and several other active divisions to replace their
old 155mm C mle 1917 S heavy howitzers with this more
mobile piece.
W
Command Rifle team
нН
Staff team
XA
Observer Rifle team
Motorcycle and sidecar
L hq section;
L LIEUTENANT 1
105mm C mle 1935B
105mm C mle 1935B
Lgun section;
L LIEUTENANT
uHii
105mm C mle 1935B
Lgun section '
ALL-TERRAIN TOWED 105MM ARTILLERY battery
Hull-mounted, No HE, Portee.
French Йг5£ГШ1
TANK TEAMS
Wheeled
2ч 
Armour
i Хжж<	Mobility Range	Front ROF	Side Anti-tank	Top Firepower	Equipment and Notes
Ca .alry Tanks					
• . .	• I 1-39 >hort gun	) Fully-tracked	3	3	1	Co-ax MG.
-	16740cm		4	J+	One-man turret.
’ tl-Зй Jong gun)	Fully-tracked	3	3	1	Co-ax MG.
	24 760cm	2	5	4 +	One-man turret.
	Fully-tracked	4	3	1	Co-ax MG.
 - - “	24 "/60cm	2	6	4 +	One-man turret.
Combat Tanks					
	Fully-tracked	1	1	1	MG, Very slow tank, Unreliable.
	Fully-tracked	1	1	1	Very slow tank, Unreliable.
-	16' '/40cm	2	4	4 +	One-man turret.
1 Ь~-	.	Fully-tracked	3	3	1	Qo-wt MG, Slow tank.
-- ’ J- MgitH	16740cm	2	-/	4 +	One-man turret.
’B-1 b\	Fully-tracked	6	5	2	Co-ax MG, Multiple Gun, Slow tank, Unreliable.
(' t	24760cm	2	A	4 +	On.-man turret.
	24 760cm	2	6	3 +	!.	layout, Hull mounted.
armoured Cars					
‘AjR-35 (7.5mm MG)	Halt-tracked	1	0	1	MG, Unreliable.
. • R-35 (13.2mm MG)	Hal'-tracked	1	0	1	Unreliable.
_	' 1 Gt	16740cm	3	.3	5+	
± v.' Beider P-16	Wheeled	0	0	0	Co-ax MG, Limited vision.
. •.18 gun	16740cm	2	i	4 +	One-man turret.
. /	\MD-35	Wheeled	1	1	0	Co-ax MG, Limited vision.
	16"!40cm	2	6	5+	No HE.
Tank-hunters					
: MR-35 ZT-2	Half-tracked	1	0	1	Co-ax MG, Unreliable.
_ r >	a-34 gun	/6’740cm	2	6	5+	One-man turret, No HE.
 UMR-35 ZT-3	Half-tracked	1	0	1	Co-ax MG, Unreliable.
•’i SA-34 gun	16740cm	2	6	2 +	Awkward layout, Hull-mounted, No HE.
 a 5TCC	Wheeled	0	0	0	A/\ MG.
SA-37 gun	24 760cm	3	9	4 +	Hull-mounted, No HE.
SELF-PROPELLED GUNS
\-34 ponce	Wheeled
: SA-34 gun	16740cm
non de 75mm
 mle 1 ^73 -4 gun
VEHICLE MA'CHlNEiCUKlS
16 "/40cm
Awkward Layout, Overloaded, Slow, Stabiliser jacks.
ROF I if other weapons fire.
nztr // C tanks
GUN TEAMS
Weapon	Mobility	Range	ROF	Anti-tank	Firepower	Note»
8mm mle 14 HMG	Man-packed	24760cm	6	2	6	ROF 2 when pinned down.
(10mm mle 35 mortar	Man-packed	24760cm	j	1	3+	Can tire over friendly troop».
Firing Bombardment		32780cm	*	2	6	
81mm mic 27/31 mortar	Man-packed	407100cm	•	2	6	Smoke bombardment.
20mm mle 1939 gun	Light	16740cm	4	5	5*	Anti-aircraft. Turntable.
25mm mle 1938 gun	Light	16740cm	4	6	5*	Anti-aircraft, lurnrablc.
25mm SA-34 gun	Light	16740cm	3	6	5.	Gun shield. No HE.
47mtn SA-37 gun	Medium	24760cm	3	9	t.	Gun shield. No HE.
75mm mle 1897 gun	Heavy	24760cm	2	8	3+	Gun shield. Qui. к fire. Smoke.
t iring bombardment»		64"/160cm	-	3	6»	Smoke bombardment.
105mm C mle 1935 В howitzer	Heavy	16740cm	1	7	2+	Gun shield. Smoke.
Firing bombardments		727180cm	-	4	4+	Smoke bombardment.
105mm L mle 1913 S gun	Immobile	24764km	1	9	2+	Gun shield.
firing bombardments		80"/200crti	-	4	4r	
1 55mm C mle 1917 S howitzer	Immobile	16740cm	I	10	U	Bunker hustcr. Gun shield.
Firing bombardments		727180cm	-	5		
BUNKERS
Range ROF Anti-tank Firepower Notes
HMG Bunker
24’‘/60cm	6
6 ROF 2 when pinned down.
INFANTRY TEAMS
Team	Range	ROF	Anti-tank	Firepower	Note»
Rifle team	16740cm	1	2	6	
Rifle/MG ream	16740cm	2	2	6	
MG team	16740cm	3	2	6	
VB team	8'720cm	2	1	4»	Can fire over friendly teams.
Scarf ream			cannot shoot		Moses at a Heavy Gun team.
TRANSPORT TEAMS
Vehicle MOTORCYCLES	Mobility	Armour Front Side	Top	Equipment and Notes
Gnome-Rhone or Rene Gillett motorcixlc and «dec.it	Jeep	•	-	
TRUCKS				
WI5T tractor	Wheeled	-	-	
S20 FL truck	Wheeled	-	-	Two optional passenger-fired AA MG
Citroen 23. or GMC 2-ton truck	Wheeled	-	-	
Supply Carriers				
Renault UE	Half-tracked	0	0	1	Supply < larriett (p. 1751
armoured Personnel Carriers				
Lorraine 381.	Fully-tracked	1	0	0	Two passenger-fired AA MG. Slow lank.
AIRCRAFT
Aircraft	Weapon	To Hit	Anti-tank	Firepower	Notes
Moraine Saulnier MS 406	-	-	-	-	Fighrcr Interception only <p. 167).
These special rules allow the French forces to fight the methodical and controlled series of battles they planned to fight.
Note that for the purpose of these rules all troops from the French Republic and its colonies are French.
DOCTRINE
High Command
To the French Army, rhe First World War demonstrated
that although breakthrough attacks were possible on a small
scale, they made little difference strategically. The war was
won by carefully conducted methodical advances planned
bv the high command—"la btihulie conduit? or 'la bataille
ahodique . An advance of 500 metres per day docs not
sound much, but over three months that amounts to an
..d ance of 50 kilometres—a significant gain by First World
War standards. The French entered the Second World War
ready to make these incremental advances and keep them up
until the war was won.
When a Freud} player places an objective in the enc '*  de-
ni meat area or in No Man's Land, they may place it up io
i '/10cm closer to their table edge than normal.
Trench Warfare
French troops are trained for ti . h warfare. 'Their opera-
dr il plan is to mak. a short deliberate advance under cover
of massed artillery fire, then fortify' their position to hold it
while the artillery comes up to repeat the process. While the
adv; iu.e is slow, it is sure and will eventually result in the
d^. at of the enemy.
F> cb Infantry and Gun teams (except those from Colonial
latoons) attempting '- Dig In succeed on a roll •" .5+.
Whi 	у ' fensive Fire, Dug In French Gun teams
c:....r.t over atty : . >ch Infantry team in a Foxhole or Trench,
7 ther the Infants; .hoots or not.
Integrated Defences
To make their defensive positions even more impregnable,
French infantry platoons often trade rifle squads for heavy
machine-gun sections from their machine-gun platoons.
Although this sacrifices mobile firepower, it allows every
platoon to benefit from the defensive capabilities of heavy
machine-guns.
At the start of the game before deployment, each French
Machine-gun Platoon (except Colonial Machine-gun Platoons)
may exchange two HMG teams from the Machine-gun Platoon
for two Rifle/MG or MG teams from a Combat Platoon Each
Machine-gun Platoon may only make this trade with one
Combat Platoon.
<  c this, both platoons must be dismounted and their Transport
teams Sent to the Rear.
Colonial Troops
1 rance has a large colonial empire. Colonial troops are re-
cruited to protect and maintain it from the native tribes of
Algeria, NIn oct • and Senegal. While they may not be an fait
with the latest military methods, they are renown for their
ferocity and prowess in personal combat.
Colonial platoons do not use the Trench Warfare and Integrated
Defences special rules. Instead, they hit in assault combat on a
roll of3+.
AUTOCANONS
Stabiliser Jacks
The A ,ti и ,i. de 7~ч in  a 913 d< figti inc- lining the
standard 75mrn mle 1897 field gun on a De DjOO Bouton
truck The fire .ointol s\ tem was updated in 1931 hut
citherwise the design w'oiks just fine, despite being nearly
5<J v. irs old.
One innovative feature of the design was the stabiliser jacks
that scop the vehicle from tipping over from the shock of
. coil and a gun shield to pr irect the crew from hostile fire.
Once the jack1, are lowered, it is difficult to put the gun out
of action as most hits to the truck have little effect on the
gun’s al ility co Keep shooting and the gun shield and . , к
Innly pt!• ret t I he ; un and its crew'.
If an At . । ,' 7 .  d I not move in its previous turn it
is protect. ' • у its, ' - ' ~id and counts as having Bulletproof
C . er against all: co' ' of ’ in front of the line of the
gun shield in the enemy turn.
ARTILLERY
Central Fire Control
The French artillery arm is the pinnacle of military technology.
When an observer places a request for fire, the artillery
battalion's paste central du groupc, its fire direction centre,
assigns ail available artillery batteries to fire the mission. This
way the artillery's resources are used in rhe most efficient
manner. For this to work all requests must go through the
proper channels with trained officers directing the fire.
French Company Command teams cannot act as spotting teams
for artillery bombardments.
When a French artillery battery that has a Staff team fires a
bombardment, you may chose to group other artillery batteries
with Staff teams into the same bombardment before rolling to
Range hi as a Central Fire Control Bombardment.
Quick Fire
Tlie canon de 75mm mle 1897 is a superb piece of French
engineering. It was the first gun in the world to combine
a breech-loading weapon with an effective recoil system.
This quick-firing weapon made every Other artillery piece
obsolete. Despite being over forty years old. the soixante
quinze, the seventy five’, is still one of the most rapid-firing
artillery pieces in existence.
All French Artillery Bombardments and Central Fire Control
Bombardments with four or more guns or howitzers use the
following rules:
•	If there are four or more guns and howitzers including at
least two 75mm mle 1897 guns, then re-roll all failed To
Hit rolls.
•	If there are six or more guns and howitzers firing, use a
double-width (12 750cm by 6 715cm) Artillery Template to
determine which teams can be hit and re-roll al! failed To
Hit rolls.
•	If there arc nine or more guns and howitzers firing, your
opponent must re-roll all successful Saves for teams hit by
the bombardment in addition to the bombardment using
a double-width template and re-rolling all failed rolls To
Hit.
If there are fewer than four guns firing, use the following rules.
•	If there is just one 75mm mle 1897 gun, then the
bombardment does not suffer the usual *! penalty To Hit
for firing a bombardment with a single weapon. It must still
re-roll al! successfill To Hit rolls.
•	If there are two or three 75чип mle 1897 guns, then the
bombardment does not re-roll To Hit rolls.
Heavy Artillery
French divisions usually mixed a light artillery regiment
with the 75mm mle 1897 with a smaller regiment of heavier
105mm or 155mm howitzers. Their central fire control
enabled them to combine the fire of both elements to
produce devastating combined bombardments.
105mm C mle 1935B & 105mm L mle 1913 St If th-re
or more 105mm C nde 1935 В howitzers or 105mm L mle
1913 Sguns fitr in a Central Fire Control Bombardment, then
all of the guns and howitzers firing count as having an Anti-
tank rating of 4 and a Firepower rating of5+.
If only one or two 105mm guns or howitzers fire in a Central
Fire Control Bombardment, then all weapons firing count as
75mm mle 1897 guns having an Anti-tank rating of 3 and a
Firepower rating of 6.
155mm C mle 1917 S: If three or more 155mm C mle 1917 S
howitzers fire in a Central Fire Control Bombardment, then all
of the guns and howitzers firing count as having an Anti-tank
rating of 4 and a Firepower rating of 4+.
If only one or two !55тт C mle 1917 S howitzers fire in a
Central Fire Control Bombardment, then all of the guns and
howitzers firing count as having an Anti-tank rating of3 and a
Firepower rating of5+.
		Examples of French Artillery !				Special	. Rules			
		Number ofWeapons						Effect		
	75mm mle 1897	105mm С mle 1935 В or 105mm L mle 1913 S	155mm С mle 1917 S	Total Guns	Re-roll Hits	Re roll Misses	Double Width	Re roll Saves	Anti-tank	firepower
	1	-	•	1		X	X	X	3	6
z	1 or 3	-	-	2or3	X	X	X	X	3	6
Э	4 or 5	-	*	4 or 5	X		X	X	3	6
	6 to 8	-	-	6 to 8	X			X	3	6
	9 to 12	-	-	9 to 12	X			л,/	3	6
I x	1 or 3	2	-	4 or 5	X		X	X	3	6
1 5 1	2	3	-	5	X		X	X	4	5»
1 °	4	2	•	6	X			X	.3	6
5 1 1Л	4	3or4	-	7 or 8	X			X	4	5»
	6 to 8	3 or 4	A	9 to 12	X				4	5*
	7 or 8	2	•	9 or 10	X				3	6
>5mm	2 or 3	-	2	4 or 5	X		X	X	3	5*
	T	-	3	5	X		X	X	4	4*
Л	2or3	-	2	4 or 5	X		X	X	3	5+
< rC	4	-	3 or 4	7 or 8	X			X	4	4»
	6 to 8	*	3or4	9 to 12	X				4	4*
	7 or 8	-	2	9 or It)	X				3	5+
TANKS
French О
One-man Turret
rench tanks retain the one-man turret of their First World
War forebears. Although this is sufficient for infantry-
support, in tank-versus-tank clashes the commander is faced
with the impossible task of finding new targets, and loading
an . firing the gun, while directing the driver as well.
.4 k with a one-man turret may not fire the gun mounted in
. w ‘•/Ct while moving, and may not fire both the turret gun
 7ae turret machine-gun in the same turn.
French Tank Tactics
At first glance, the one-man turrets of French tanks and the awkward layout of the hull-mounted 75mm gun on the Char
B-l bis (the driver actually aims and fires the gun!) makes it seem impossible to fight the fast-moving Germans. However,
a little understanding of la bataille methodique will repair such deficiencies in your training.
French tanks are perfect for attacking enemy defences. They are well armoured and can simply drive into position,
machine-gunning the enemy as they advance, then halt and destroy enemy machine-guns and anti-tank weapons with
their guns. Their small crews allow the tanks to be small and cheap, giving you more armour protection and more tanks,
and allowing you to overwhelm the enemy defences with numbers.
It is when fighting a mobile enemy that you must be more clever. The secret is to determine where the battle will be fought,
place your tanks there, and then ensure that the battle is fought there. When defending, this is relatively simple—the
enemy must take their objectives. If your tanks are deployed around the objective or covering the route to the objective,
the enemy must come to them. Get your tanks into concealed firing positions and destroy the enemy when they come to
vou. Always keep a reserve to move into position to block any unexpected attempts to outflank your force.
lhe principles are the same if you arc to attack. The enemy must defend the objective. Move your tanks there and the
enemy will come to the fight or lose the battle. Once the enemy comes to you, your thick armour and numbers will
defeat their tanks. Do not be tempted to chase after the enemy. They will dance away and you will achieve nothing. Keep
your eye on the prize and take the objective. Do not let your opponent distract you from victory.
L ।
||
RESUPPLY SECTIONS
Supply Carriers
lhe additional supplies delivered by a Renault UE can make
a huge difference at a critical moment.
One of the ctciu. 1 problems of trench warfare is bringing
enough ammunition and food forward to the troops. After
an advance, when the supplies needed to be carried forwards
across No Man’s hand, the losses in the supply parties could
be horrendous. Ihe French invented the ideal solution—the
Renault UE carrier, a small armoured vehicle with a tipping
bin towing a trailer full of supplies. This could go anywhere
the infantry went, w.upplying them while safe from
machine-gun and anil ?ry fire.
.4 Coinpagnie de Fusiliers-Voltigcurs usually attaches all of the
Renault UE carriers fi'om the Resupply 8. , lions of the Company
HQ out to its platoons и ' g the Making Attachments i th,
HQ rule on page 184 of the rulebook. Hie Renault UE carriers
re allocated individually, and each platoon can be given up to
 ree carriers, lhe carriers can be attached to:
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs Platoons (page 161),
Fusiliers-Voltigcurs Machine-gun Platoons (page 162),
20mm Anti-aircraft Machine-gun Platoons (page 163),
Fusiliers-Voltigeurs Mortar Platoons (page 165), and
25mm Anti-tank Gun Platoons page 164).
loons with Renault UE carriers attached can not be placed
Imbush.
Limited Vision
Most French tanks had prominent cupolas to give the com-
mander all-round vision. However, their armoured cars and
reconnaissance tanks generally lacked this feature leaving
them less able to respond to threats from their flanks.
Tanks with limited vision add +1 to the score required to hit
when shooting any weapon at targets that are entirely behind a
line drawn across the front of the tank's hull.
In each player's turn a platoon can use one attached Renault
UE carrier to allow it to deliver a burst of fire in a Shooting
Step or as Defensive Fire in an Assault Step. The carrier must
be In Command and neither Bailed Out or Bogged Down, The
carrier is Sent to the Rear and removedfi'om the game before any
dice are rolled. A platoon delivering a burst of fire can either:
•	Count as having twice as many weapons when firing an
Artillt Ba bardment in this Shooting Step, or
•	Roll one. :tra die to hit for each team (two extra dice for HMG
teams) t! it ' ! C naiid when shooting in this Step.
Weapons Carriers
Renault UE carriers were used to move weapons under fire or
across broken ground with the crew walking alongside.
hi addition to acting as supply carriers, Renault UE carriers can
move guns around the battlefield. A carrier can carry a Man-
packed Gun team or tow a wheeled Gun team as Passengers.
While carrying Passengers, the Renault UE only moves
6 "115cm.
POLISH TERRAIN GUIDE
Most of the fighting in Poland was in the cctnr.il lowlands. The land here is remarkably flat and quite rural apart from the cities.
(Being low lying, there arc numerous streams and creeks meandering across the plains, and particular!) in the north, large numbers
of lakes and maishcs. Tie la inland us an old-fashioned io. ik л iiii long ti.umv ;tiip fields dj.ucm m villages that stniggk along
both sidt ;' >f the n>ad< 'I u -e td.i. are not fenced or hedge d.
This chart pn iud<x n opiional u.rr to de. ide what t< rt in to pl.we .1 the t ,1 .1.-. Divide the t.il c int. 60cm squares. Tin. 1 .layers
take turns tn р'кк ,. tare and toll t.> , . :i.u terrain ; । - ,1 r. ,1 r.'in it. lhe ex.irt i.imDr and diliu nsions of the features
are up to the piasets.
Basic Terrain
The pt dominant terrain h iture in th. art w is open farmland, which t.ittd .о Cioss-country terrain
Ridges, Rises, or pasture
Roll again:
1 Ridge
A low ridge (at least 12”/30cm long) provides the
highest elevation in the area.
The ridge is Difficult Going and taller than a tank or
truck. Connect ridges in adjacent squares.
2 or 3 Rise
One to three low rises (up to 12”/30cm long) swell
from the surrounding farmland.
A rise is Cross-country terrain. It should be high enough
to conceal tanks positioned on the far side.
4 to 6 Pasture
This area is mainly pasture aside from a small
farmhouse.
Villages and Farmland
P Roll again:
el or 2 Village
A village of four to twelve houses along a single
road.
A village must have a road leading to another road or
village, or to a table edge.
3 or 4 Hamlet
A hamlet consisting of two to six houses along a
single road.
A hamlet must have a road leading to another road,
village, or hamlet, or to a table edge.
5 Large Farm
A large farm comprised of a large farmhouse and one to
three smaller buildings.
A finn must have a road leading to another road,
tilage, or ha inlet, or to a table edge
6 Standing Crops
Two or three long narrow fields (at least 12'730 long)
of tall wheat or corn are growing in this area.
Standing crops are Area Terrain (see page 61 of the
rulebook) str 'ng about  high (around
/2 "U2mm).
WOODS
Roll again:
1 to 3 Large Wood
A large wood covers most of this area. It should link
with large woods in adjacent squares.
4 to 6 Scattered Woods
One or two small woods (at least 12”/30cm across)
cover this area.
Rivers, Streams, and Marshes
Roll again:
1	River
A wide river wends its way across the battlefield.
A tree-lined river flows across the table through this
square. Its course must start on one table edge and
exit an adjacent table edge, passing through all other
river squares.
A river is Impassable and must have a road bridge or a
ford (Difficult Going) in each square it passes through.
2	Stream
A stream runs through the farmland.
Streams are Very Difficult Going and must have a road
bridge or a ford (Difficult Going) in each square it
passes through.
Connect streams in adjacent squares. They must meet the
table edge or a river at one or both ends. Most streams
are lined with trees.
3	to 5 Creek
A creek waters the fields of the urr. binding farms.
Creeks are Diffi ult Going
Connect creeks in	si 1 n : inert the
л-. ,  edge or a str m . or river at one or both 1 > 7 ' " ist
err. are lined tvii trees.
6 Marsh or Lake
An area of wetl md orlake (at k i t 12’731 fem across)
or three smaller areas (up to 6’715cm across).
A marsh is Difficult Going.
Lakes are Impassable.
FRENCH & BELGIAN TERRAIN GUIDE
Northern France and Belgium are largely flat. They are drained by numerous canals and rivers that formed the focus of many
battles as the British and French tried to form defensive lines along them. The countryside is densely populated with hamlets
md villages. The French attempted to turn these into defensive 'hedgehog' all-round defensive positions where ever possible
’ uountec the mobility of the German tanks.
Ihi< chart provides an optional way to decide what terrain to place on the table. Divide the table into 2760cm squares. The
pij’, ers take turns to pick a square and roll to see what terrain they' should place tn it. The exact number and dimensions <>l
rhe features are up to the players.
Basic Terrain
Г ; primary terrain is large open fields lacking in hedgerows or fences. It is rated as Cross-country terrain.
.-----------— - »•	.4---------4b.---. W 	 >4	»	——*=
Hill or Ridge
Roll again:
1 Hill
\ low hill (at least 12’730cm across) dominates the
surrounding countryside.
Ihe hill is taller than a lank and Difficult Going and
probably wooded.
2 or 3 Ridge
\ low ridge (at least 12’/30cm long) looks over the
fields.
7A ridge is taller than a rank and is Diffictdt Gotng.
Connect ridges tn adjacent squares.
4 to 6 Rise
• hie to three low rises (up to 12”/30cm long) break
through the flat fields.
! tie is Cross-country terrain. It is just high enough to
ч ral tanks positioned on the far side.
VILLAGES
Roll again:
1 to 3 Village
illage of four to twelve houses clustered around a
„г -sroads.
dingy must have a road leading to another road or
,e, or to a table edge.
4 or 5 Hamlet
A hamlet consisting of two to six houses along a
ungle road.
।". let must have a road leading to another road,
о hamlet, or to a table edge.
Villa or Manor
-t-tc farm comprised of a large villa with a walled
-. .ird and one to three smaller buildings.
or manor must have a road leading to another
llage, or hamlet, or to a table edge
Woods and Trees
Roll again:
1 or 2 Woods
One or two small woods (at least 12’730cm across)
cover this area.
3 to 6 Tree-lined Road
A tree-lined road runs through this square.
Treat the line oj trees as a very tall Linear Obstacle like
an overgroum hedge. While it blocks line of sight, the
line oj trees is not an obstacle to movement.
Rivers and Streams
Roll again:
1 to 3 River or ('anal
Either a narrow river wends its way across, or a
straight-banked canal flows through this square.
A river or canal flows across the table through this
square. Its course must start on one table edge and exit
an adjacent table edge, passing through all other river or
canal squares. A river or canal is Impassable and must
have a road bridge or a ford (Difficult Going) tn each
square it passes through.
4 or 5 Stream
A stream runs through the fields of this square. While
not as much of an obstacle as a river, it is still a sig-
nificant barrier.
Streams are Very Difficult Going and must have a road
bridge ora ford (Difficult Going) in each square it passes
through. Connect streams in adjacent squares. They must
meet the table edge or a river at one or both ends. Most
streams are lined with trees.
6 Creek
A creek meanders its way through the field.
Creeks are Difficult Going. Connect creeks in adjacent
squares. They must meet the table edge or a stream or river
at one or both ends. Most creeks are lined with trees.
PCLISblPAIOCinGlGclIDe
Polish Rifle team
100%
Reflective Green (890)
Base colour tor tanks
Flat Flesh (955)
Exposed flesh
Beige Brown (875)
Gun stock, tool handles
Flat Brown (984)
Camouflage colour
Flat Earth (983)
Ammunition pouches
Khaki (988)
Bed toll
Green Grey (886)
Webbing
Dark Sand (847)
Camouflage colour
Green Brown (879)
Uniform
Flat Earth (983)
Boots
Brown Violet (887)
Helmet
All miniatures on this page shown
POLISH CAMOUFLAGE
Polish ranks followed a standard
camouflage pattern of horizontal
diamond-shaped patches ol Dark
Sand (847) and Flat Brown (984)
over a base colour of Reflective
Green (890). Most tanks were
painted with an airbrush giving a
soft edge between colours, but some
photographs show brush-painted
tanks as well.
Gunmetal (863)
Gun met.il
All colour names and codes given are for the Vallejo range of Flames Ol War paints, available from the online store and
Flames Of War stockists. More comprehensive painting and modelling guides can also be found on the
www.Flames OfWar. com website
POLISH INFANTRY
POLISH TANKS
8

+ +
PAINTING GERMAN PRIMED 1 RACKS
Basecoat tracks with Cavalry Brown (982)
Followed by a wash of Black Shade (201)
Then a drybrush of Gunmetal (863)
GERMAN INFANTRY
German Caino
Dark Green (979)
Helmet, mess tin
Field Grey (830)
Tunic
Black (950)
Webbing
Khaki 988
Bread bag
Flat Flesh (955)
Exposed flesh
Beige Brown (875)
Gun stock, tool handles
Gunmetal (863)
Gun metal
London Grey (836)
or Field Grey (830)
Trousers
Black (950)
Boots

German Rifle team

GERMAN VEHICLES
When Germany invaded Poland in 1939, its armoured
vehicles displayed a large white cross (A) as the national
emblem, this proved to be an excellent, highly visible,
aiming point for Polish anti-tank gunners. Gentian crews
quickly tried to partially obscure it by smearing on mud or
oil. The yellow paint used for unit markings was also used
to paint out the centres of the cross (B) or die entire cross
(C) as a low-visibility alternative
For the invasion of France the army copied a Luftwaffr-
style cross. This cross had a white outline with the dark
grey vehicle colout showing through in the centre of the
crass (D)
German Grey (995)
Black Grey (862)
Base colour
Chocolate Brown (872)
Camouflage
All miniatures on this page shown at -<100%
BRITISH PAINTING GUIDE
100%
Beige Brown (875)
Gun stock», tool handles
Olive Grey (888)
Gas cape
Flat Flesh (955)
Exposed flesh
'Khaki Green G,3' was the standard service colour for vehicles and everything which needed a coat of paint. Use Brown Violet (887) as
basecoat for any painted meta], then apply a camouflage scheme as detailed below.
British Rifle team
Gunmetal (863)
Gun metal
Black (950)
Boots
Green Grey (886)
or Khaki (988)
Webbing, gas mask bag
English Uniform (921)
Uniform
Brown Violet (887)
Helmet
LIGHT DISRUPTIVE CAMOUFLAGE COLOUR
Light and cruiser ranks from rhe Armoured Regiments of
1" Armoured Division had their Khaki Green covered by
Cruiser Tank Green (202) over most of the vehicle leaving
svavy diagonal and horizontal bands in Brown Violet (887)
as the disruptive camouflage colour.
DARK DISRUPTIVE CAMOUFLAGE COLOUR
All vehicles and guns belonging to Infantry Tank Companies.
Divisional Cavalry Squadrons, or Rifle Companies, and those
from Divisional Support had wavy diagonal and horizontal
bands in German Camo Dark Green (979) {sainted over the
basic colour of Brown Violet (887)
PAINTING DIRTY TRACKS
Basecoat tracks with
( German Camo
Medium Brown (826)
Followed by a wash of
Black Shade (201)
Then a drybrush of
Gunmetal (863)
INFANTRY
VEHICLES
.4// miniatures on tbit jsagc shown at --<^100%
180

100%
Hat Flesh (955)
Exposed flesh
Flat Earth
(983)
Tan Yellow
(912)
Beige Brown (875)
Gun stocks, tool handles
Gunmetal (863)
Gun metal
Gunship Green (895)
Base colour for ail tanks
Green Brown (879)
Uniform, greatcoat
French Rifle team
German Camo Black
Brown (822)
Outline between colours
Olive Grey (888)
Helmet
Chocolate Brown (872)
Boots
MINTING CLEAN FRACKS
Basecoat tracks with
Black Grey (862)
Followed by a wash of
Black Shade (201)
Then a drybrush of
Gunmetal (863)
ЛИ miniatures on this page shown
German Camo
Orange Ochre (824)
Pack
German Camo Beige (821)
Webbing, canteen
All French Links haJ their camouflage applied in the f.n югу before being sent to their units Each factory had their own camouflage schemes,
although they changed our time. It is common replacement tanks to have a different camouflage scheme from the rest of their unit.
FRENCH VEHICLES
RECOGNISING GERMAN TANKS
Patter IВ
8.8 см. FlaKl 8 (Sf)
3 (cmd, gnr, dvr)
6.4 tonnes
4.42m (14’6”)
2.06m (6’9")
2.25m (7'5”)
13mm (0.5 )
40 km/h. (25 mpk)
140 km (87 miles)
Crew:
Weight:
Length:
Width:
Height:
15см. slQ33 cu^pML/tr I
Weapons: 15cm slC/33 W.
Armour:
Speed:
pML7wjdjer 1
Weapons: 4.7cm ?t>.K(i) gun
Armour:
Speed:
e

Crew:	2 (cmd/gnr, dun)	Weapons: 2k 7.92 MCj13 MO	Crew:	3 (cmd, rdo, dur)	Weapons: 1k 7.92 MO13 MO
Weight:	5.8 tonnes	Armour: 13 mm (0.5”)	Weight:	5.9 tonnes	Armour: 13 mm (0.5")
Length:	4.42m (14’6")	Speed:	40 km/h (25 mpk)	Length:	4.42m (14’6”)	Speed:	40 km/h (25 mpk)
Width:	2.06m (6’9)	Range:	170 km (105 miles)	Width:	2.06m (6'9")	Range: 170 km (105 miles)
Height:	1.72m (S’ 8”)		Height:	1.99m (6’6")	
PMVZpr 35 (t)	Patter 38(t)
CrtU’:	4 (сила,gw, dur,	Weagcns: 7x 3.7ci4t KwK34(t) giut,	Crew:	4 (сшА,gw, dur,	Wea.p<m4: 7>c 3.7сил, KwКЗ8(t)	
со-dur)	2k 7.92 MCj37(t) MC	co-dtrr)	gun,
Weight: 10.5 tonnes	Armour: 25mm (1”)	Weight: 9.4 tonnes	2k 7.92 MC37(t) MCj
Length: 4.90m (16’1”)	Speed: 35 km/h (22 mpk)	Length: 4.60m (15' 1")	Armour: 25mm (1")
.th: 2.10m (6’ 11”)	Range: 190 km (118 miles)	Width: 2.12m (6’ 11”)	Speed.:	42 km/h (26 mpk)
Height: 2.3Sm(7’8")	Height: 2.40m (7‘ 10”)	Range:	250 km (156 miles',
Crew:
W ' kt:
Length:
Width:
Hi--,M:
13mm (0.5")
40 km/k (25 mpk)
140 km (87 miles)
4 (cmd, gnr, Idr, dorr)
8.5 tonnes
4.67m (15’4")
2.06m (6’9”)
2.80m (9’2")
Crew:	9 (cmd, gnr, 6k Idr, dvr)	Weapons: 8.8cm FlaKl8gun	
Weight:	20.0 tonnes	Armour:	15mm (0.6”)
Length:	7.35m (24' 1”)	Speed:	50 km/h (30 mpk)
Width:	2.50m (8’2")	Range:	260 Pm (160 miles)
Hesght:	2.80m (9'2")		
182
Patter 11
Paws/tr IV D
Crete:
Wf'dlt:
Le, .--h:
Wt Hl:
H„ . i-t:
Crew:
w
Lets 
Width:
Heii- 1 <.
~r
Crew:
Weg.-t
Lr
j
Width:
Height:
W&i . .t:
Len jik:
wid-
Hl lit:
3 (cmd, gnr, dvr)	Weapons: 1x 2cm. KwK.30gun,	Crew:
8.9 tonnes	1x 7.92 M.Q34 MQ	
4.81m (15’9")	Armour: 14.5 mm (0.6”)	Weight:
2.22m (7’4")	Speed:	40 km/h (25 mph)	Length:
1.99m (6'6")	Range: 200 km (124 miles)	Width: Height:
PMC/ew III E
5 (cmd, gnr, ldr, dvr,
co-dvr)
19.5 tonnes
5.38m (17'8")
2.92m (9'7")
2.44m (8'0")
Weapons: 1x. 3.7cm KwK gun.
Зх. 7.92 M 34 '-W
Armour: 30mm (12")
Speed:	42 km./к (26 mph)
Range:	250 km (156 miles)
5 (cmd, gnr, Ldr, dur,
co-dvr)
20.0 tonnes
5.92m (19'5”)
2.84m (9’4")
2.68m (8’ 10")
Weapons: 1x. 7.5cm KwK37gun
2x 7.92 MQ34 Ml)
Armour: 30mm (1.2 ")
Speed:	40 km/h (25 mph)
Range:	200 km (125 miles)
Stu(j A
4 (cmd,gnr, Idr, dvr) Weapons: 1x. 7.5cm StuK37gun
Weight: 19-6 tonnes
L--.,th: 5.38m (17’8")
Width: 2.92m (9’ 7”)
Height: 1.95m (6'5")
Armour: 50mm (2")
Speed: 40 km/h (25 mph)
Range: 160 km (100 miles)
ItL Kfz 221 (ZAQ)
2 (cmd/g-ч, )•:)
4.0 tonnes
4.80m (15’ 9")
1.95m (6 ’ 5")
1.70m (5’7’)
Weapons: MC,34 MQ
Armour: 8mm (0.3")
Speed: 90 km/h (55 mph)
R. ge: 320 km (200 miles)
Crew:	3 (cmd, gnr, dvr)
Weight: 4.8 tonnes
Length: 4.80m (15'9")
Width: 1.95m (6’S’)
Height: 2.00m (ь / ,
5cC Kfz 222 (2см.)
Weapons: 2cm KwK30 gun
1X MC/34 w-.c,
Armour: 8mm (0.3")
Speed:	85 km/h (53 mph)
R.cge: 300 km (188 miles)
Id Kfz 10/5 (2см)
.' .	. ,, ' vr)
5.5 tonttei
4 75m <15 7")
2.00m (6' 7")
Wtiponit: 2cm Fla К	,
Агнсоиг. ml
'perd	6>nv.‘>' (4< mfdi)
Routge:	300 кмс (188 miles)
5d Kfz. 251
Crew:	2 (cmd/gnr, dvr)
eight: 7-8 ionnes
l ength: 5.80m (19’ O’)
И- ddl: 2.10m (6’ 11”)
Height: 1.75m (5’9")
Weapons: 1 or 2x ЗЛС/34 MP
Armour: 15 fttm '0-6")
Speed: 53 kfn ''it (33 m oh)
Range: 3(V 2m (188 mites)

RECOGNISING BRITISH TANKS
A. 9 Cruiser Mk ICS
А9 Cruiser Мк I
Crew:	6 (cmd, gnr, Idr, dvr, Weapons:	1x 2 pdr gun,	Crew:	6 (cmd, gnr, Idr, dvr, Weapons: 1x 3.7" lunmtser,
	2x MG ghr)	3x Vickers 0.303” MG		2x MGgnr)	3x Vickers 0.303' \aQ
Weight:	13.0 tonnes	Armour:	14mm (0.6)	Weight:	13.0 tonnes	Armour: 14mm (0.6)
Length:	5.79m (19’0”)	Speed:	40 km/h (25 mph)	Length:	5.79m (19’0)	Speed: 40 km/h (25ir.nh '
Width.:	2.50m (8'3”)	Range:	240 km (150 miles)	Width:	2.50m (8’3)	Range: 240 km (150  • I
Hei„.rr:	2.65m (8'9)		Height:	2.65m (8’9)
Crew:
Hght:
gth:
Width:
Height:
4 (cmd, gnr, Idr, dor)
14.2 tonnes
6.02m (13’9")
2.54m (8’4)
2.59m (8’ 6)
A13 Owiwev Mk III
Weapons: 1X 2 pdrgun,
1x Vickers 0.303”MG
14mm (0.6)
48 km/k (30 mph)
144 km (90 miles)
ArmOWT:
Speed:
Crew:
Weight:
Length:
Width:
Height:
A13 Mk II Cruiser Mk IV
Weapons: 1x 2 pdrgwn,
1X. Vickers 0.303"MC,
30mm (1.2")
48 km/h (30 mpk)
144 km (90 miles)
4 (cmd, gnr, Idr, dvr)
15.0tmutes
6.02m (19'9")
2.54m (8’4)
2.59m (8’ 6)
Armour:
Speed:
Range:
Liwyvt Tmlk Mk VI В
3 (cmd, g nr, dvr)
5.3 tonnes
3.95m (13’0)
2.06m (6’9”)
2.22m (7’4)
Crew:
Weight:
Lei sgth:
wi •
t Height:
Ci'ew:
Light Тмьк Mk VI0
3 (cmd, gnr, dvr)
5.3 tonnes
3.95m (13’0)
2.06m (6’9)
2.13m (7'0)
W< . nons: 1x Beta 15mm gust,
1x Beta 7.92mm MQ
14mm (0.6)
56 km/h (35 mph)
208 km (130 miles)
Ar.-.iowr:
"veed:
Km .
Crew:
Weight:
Length:
Width:
Length:
Width:
Height:
Weapons: 1x Vickers 0.5" &.
1x Vickers 0.303" MG
Armour: 14mm (0.6")
Speed:
Range:
A12 MaddlcU. Stnlov
4 (en d. gnr, Idr, nor) Weapons: 1x. 2pdrgun,
1x Vickers 0.303"MG
78mm (3.1“)
24 km/h. (15 mph)
257km (160 mdm.)
2< 9 temnes
5л '«< (' 18'S")
2.59m (8'6)
2.51m (8’3”1
Armour:
Speed:
Range
Crew:
Weight:
Le ph:
Width:
Crew:
Weight:
Length:
Width:
Height:
We i-аил: 1x Bren 0 '03" M.,
OUT:
BrtSC Carrier
3 (cmd, M r, :
3.3 tonnes
3.66m (12 0)
2 06m (69)
1.59m (5’3 ’)
56 кт/к (35 mph)
208 km (130 miles)
Scout Carrier
3 (cmd, gnr, dvr)
3.3 tmines
3.66m (12'0)
2.06m (b 9”)
1..'9m (5'3)
10mm (0.4")
50 km/k (30 ip
240 km (150 miie
Weapons: 7x -ays a- rifle
1A вг*я 0303" MQ
Wmm (OH ")
50 km/k (30 mph)
?40 I.,.. (150 files]
Armour:
Speed:
Range
RECOGNISING FRENCH TANKS
All miniatures on this page shown at
Armour:
Speed.:
Range:
at:
10:
r
,kt:
ilk:
Weapons: 1x. 37mm SA-18gan,
lx 7.5mm MAC31 MG
Armour: 40mm (1.6’)
S ':
4 (cmd, gnr, 2x dor)
8.2 tonnes
4.79m (15’9”)
2.01m (6'7")
2.31m (7'7")
.\kt:
.I'k:
itk:
int:
SO144MA S-35
3 (cmd/gnr/ldr, dor, Weap
rdt)
19.5 tonnes
38m (17'8”)
? 12m (7’0")
2.62m (8’7 )
12. 1 tot
4.22m .3'.^
1.95m
Weapons: 1x 25mm SA-35 gun,
1x 7.5mm MAC31 MG
Armour: 26mm (2”)
Speed:	73 km/k (46 mpk)
Range:	300 km (186 milts)
PmmM Char B-1 vis
4 (cmd/gnr/ldr,
dvr/gnr, Idr, rdo)
31.5 tonnes
6.35m (20’ 10”)
2.50m (8'3”)
2.79m (9'2”)
Weapons: 1x 47mm SA-34 gun,
1x 75mm SA-35 aun,
1x7.5шм M:AC31 MG
60mm (2.4")
28 km/k (18 r -
160 km (100 miles
KeitaiM R-35
2 (cmd/anr/ldr, do-,)
10.6 to
Hotchkiss H -3. ' Г.4 - /У 1
X.
140 km (88 mdes)
1x ’ ’
Hcrfthkiss H-35 (SA-38)
37r . SA-18 cjim or
- SA-38 iju.n,
MAC31 MG
Hotchkiss H-39 (SA
Crew:
Weight:
Lengtk:
Widtk:
Height:
drrhkiss H-39 (SA-38)
1x 37mm SA-18 gun or
37mm SA-38 gun,
1x 7.5mm MAC31 MG
40mm (1.6")
36 km/k (23 mpk)
150 km (94 miles)
RECOGNISING POLISH TANKS
Crew:
’>« (7'5”)
Ranae:
17 mm (0.7”)
3S km/k (22 mpk)
150 km (93 nodes)
3 (cmd/gnr, Idr, dim)
9.9 tonnes
4-57m (15)
I enptk:
Width:
’rfeu~ht:
Crew:
Weight:
Length:
Width:
Height:
Weapons: 2x 7.92 ivz. 30 M(/’s
Armour:
peed:
Weapons: 1x 3
1x /..
Armour: . 3 . .. .
7TP dw
3 (cmd/gnr, gar, dor)
9.3 tonnes
4.57m (15)
2.41 m (7‘ 11')
2.27 m (7 > )
Designed In New Zealand
Printed In China
ISBN 978-0-9864514-9-2
.X" Product Code RX'.WI
flames Of War website and discussion forum:
http://www. FlamcsO War.com
©Copyright, Baulefronr Miniatures Limited, 2010. All rights reserved.
780986